1. Home
  2. Citroen
  3. Citroen 2016 CITROëN C4 PICASSO User Manual

Citroen 2016 Citroën C4 Picasso Car

Product's Documents

Below are documents related to this product, you can read online or download:
Main documentSpecificationQuestions and answersRelateds Products
2016 CITROëN C4 PICASSO photo

User Manual

This is the main product document for model 2016 CITROëN C4 PICASSO.

The file format is pdf, 527 pages, you can download this manual here .

background
TYPO CITROEN (OTF) LIGHT 25 PT
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap00_couv-imprimeur_ed01-2016
Handbook
background
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap00_couv-imprimeur_ed01-2016
On-line handbook
If the "MyCITROËN" function is not available on the CITROËN public website for your country,
youcanndyourhandbookatthefollowingaddress:
http://service.citroen.com/ddb/
FindyourhandbookontheCITROËNwebsite,under"MyCITROËN".
Select:
Selectoneofthefollowingmeansofaccessto
viewyourhandbookon-line...
This personal and customisable space allows you to establish direct and special contact with the
manufacturer.
thelanguage,
the vehicle, its body style,
theprinteditionofyourhandbookappropriateforthedateofregistrationofyourvehicle.
Scanthiscodefordirectaccesstoyourhandbook.
Referringtothehandbookon-linealsogives
you access to the latest information available,
easilyidentiedbythebookmark,associated
withthissymbol:
background
Key
Thiskeywillenableyoutoidentifythespecialfeaturesof
yourvehicle:
C4 Picasso
Grand C4 Picasso
Grand C4 Picasso with 5 seats
Grand C4 Picasso with 7 seats
CITROËN has a presence on every continent,
acompleteproductrange,
bringingtogethertechnologyandapermanentspiritofinnovation,
foramodernandcreativeapproachtomobility.
Wethankyouandcongratulateyouonyourchoice.
Happymotoring!
At the wheel of your new vehicle,
gettingtoknoweachsystem,
eachcontrol,eachsetting,
makesyourtrips,yourjourneys
morecomfortableandmoreenjoyable.
Thishandbookhasbeendesignedtohelp
youmakethemostofyourC4Picassoinall
circumstancesandincompletesafety.
Takethetimetoreadthroughitsoasto
familiariseyourselfwithyourvehicle.
Thishandbookcoversallofthevariations
in equipment available across the whole
C4Picassorange.
Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of
the equipment described in this document,
dependingonitstrimlevel,versionandthe
specification for the country in which it was
sold.
Thedescriptionsandillustrationsaregivenas
indicationsonly.
AutomobilesCITROËNreservestherightto
modify the technical characteristics, equipment
andaccessorieswithouthavingtoupdatethis
editionoftheguide.
Thisdocumentformsanintegralpartofyour
vehicle.Remembertopassitontothenew
ownerintheeventofthesaleofthevehicle.
Key
safetywarning
additional information
contributes to the protection of the environment
background
Contents
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap00a_sommaire_ed01-2016
Touch screen tablet 11
Instrument panels 17
Indicatorandwarninglamps 21
Gaugesandindicators 37
Adjustmentbuttons 45
Trip computer 48
Instruments
Overview
Electronickey-remotecontrol 51
KeylessEntryandStarting 53
Centrallocking 60
Doors 61
Boot 63
Motorisedtailgate 64
Hands-freetailgateaccess 68
Alarm 70
Electricwindows 73
Access
Front seats 75
Rear seats 82
Seat modularity 89
Steeringwheeladjustment 91
Ventilation 92
Heating 94
Dual-zonemanualairconditioning 95
Dual-zoneautomaticairconditioning 97
Front demist - defrost 102
Rear screen demist - defrost 102
Scentedairfreshener 103
Interiorttings 105
Rearmultimedia 113
Courtesy lamps 121
Interiormoodlighting 122
Ease of use and comfort
Drivingrecommendations 123
Starting-switchingofftheenginewiththe
electronickey 125
Starting-switchingofftheenginewith
KeylessEntryandStarting 127
Electricparkingbrake 131
Hillstartassist 138
5-speedmanualgearbox 139
6-speedmanualgearbox 139
Automaticgearbox 140
Gear shift indicator 145
Stop & Start 146
Memorisingspeeds 149
Speedlimitrecognition 150
Speed limiter 154
Cruise control 157
Dynamic cruise control 160
Dynamic cruise control
with Stop function 167
Collisionriskalert 176
Assisted lane departure
warningsystem 178
Blind spot sensors 182
Fatiguedetectionsystem 185
Parkingsensors 187
Reversingcamera 189
360Vision 190
ParkAssist 192
Under-inationdetection 200
Driving
Eco-driving
background
Contents
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap00a_sommaire_ed01-2016
Hazardwarninglamps 224
Horn 224
Emergencyorassistancecall 224
Electronic stability
control (ESC) 225
Seat belts 228
Airbags 233
Childseats 238
Deactivatingthepassenger's
frontairbag 240
ISOFIXmountings 249
Childlock 256
Safety
Fuel 257
Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 258
Snow chains 260
Very cold climate screen(s) 261
Towbarwithquickly
detachable towball 262
Towingatrailer 264
Energyeconomymode 265
Accessories 266
Changingawiperblade 268
Roof bars 269
Bonnet 271
Petrolengines 272
Dieselengines 273
Checkinglevels 274
Checks 277
AdBlue
®
additive and SCR system
(BlueHDi Diesel) 279
Practical information
Warningtriangle 283
Temporary puncture
repairkit 284
Spare wheel 291
Changingabulb 301
Changingafuse 310
12Vbattery 315
Towing 319
Runningoutoffuel(Diesel) 321
Intheeventofabreakdown
Petrolengines 322
Petrolweights 324
Dieselengines 326
Dieselweights 328
Dimensions 330
Identicationmarkings 331
Technical data
Emergencyorassistance 332
Audio and telematics
Mirrors 203
Lightingcontrols 206
Automatic illumination of headlamps 211
Automatic headlamps 212
Daytimerunninglamps 214
Direction indicators 215
Adjustingtheheadlampbeamheight 215
Directionallighting 217
Wipercontrolstalk 218
Screenwash 220
Automatic rain sensitive wipers 221
Panoramicsunroof 223
Lightingandvisibility
Alphabeticalindex
For the audio and touch screen
telematic systems, refer to the
supplementtothehandbookorgoto
thefollowinginternetaddress:
http://service.citroen.com/ddb/
background
4
Overview
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016
Exterior
Fueltank,misfuel
prevention 257-259
Wipers, screenwash 218-222
Changingawiperblade 268
Exteriorwelcomelighting 214-215
Door mirror spotlamps 214
Corneringlighting 216
Directionallighting 217
Headlampbeamheightadjustment 215
Changingbulbs 301-305
- front lamps
- foglamps
- direction indicator repeaters
Very cold climate screen(s) 261
Doormirrors 203-204
Panoramicsunroof 223
Roof bars 269
Accessories 266-267
ESC:ABS,EBA,ASR,DSC 225-227
Tyre under-inflation detection 200-202
Tyrepressures 331
Temporary puncture
repairkit 284-290
Changingawheel 291-300
- tools
- spare wheel
- removing/refitting
Snow chains 260
Changingbulbs 305-309
- rear lamps
- 3rdbrakelamp
- number plate lamps
- foglamps
Parkingsensors 187-188
Reversingcamera 189
360Vision 190-191
ParkAssist 192-199
Towbar 124, 264
Towing(advice) 319-320
Towbarwithquickly
detachabletowball 262-263
Boot 63-69
- opening/closing
- emergencyrelease
Motorisedtailgate 64-67
Hands-freetailgateaccess 68-69
Electronickey/"KeylessEntryand
Starting"system 51-59
- opening/closing
- anti-theft protection
- back-upcontrol
- battery
Doors 61-62
- opening/closing
- emergencycontrol
Centrallocking 60
Alarm 70-72
Electricwindows 73-74
background
.
5
Overview
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016
Interior
3
rd
row rear seats 87-88
Seatmodularity/
configurations 89-90
Front seats 75-81
- manual
- electric
Interiorfittings 111-112
Side blinds 112
Seatbelts 228-232
Airbags 233-237
Deactivatingthepassenger's
frontairbag 234
Frontfittings 105-111
Mats 110
C4 Picasso boot
fittings 115-116
- rings,hooks
- boot lamp
Grand C4 Picasso
bootfittings 117-120
- rings
- boot lamp
- concertina boards
Luggagecoverroller 118-119
Warningtriangle 283
Topping-upAdBlue
®
280-282
2
nd
rowrearseats 82-83
Childseats 238-248,255
ISOFIX child seats 249-254
Childlock 256
Rearmultimedia 113-114
background
6
Overview
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016
Instruments and controls
Touchscreentablet(satellitenavigation,
multimedia audio system, Bluetooth
telephone) 11-16
Equipmentsettings 13-16
Ventilation 92-93
Heating 94
Dual-zonemanualairconditioning 95-96
Dual-zone automatic air
conditioning 97-101
Demisting/defrosting 102
Doormirrors 203-204
Electricwindows,deactivating 73-74
5/6-speedmanualgearbox 139
Automaticgearbox 140-144
Openingthebonnet 271
Courtesy lamps 121
Rear view mirror 204
Child surveillance mirror 205
Panoramicsunroof 223
Emergencyorassistance
call 224,332-333
Instrument panels 17-20
Gear shift indicator 145
Lightingdimmer 46
Warninglamps 21-36
Indicators 37-45
- service indicator
- oil level indicator
- AdBlue
®
fluidrangeindicator
Electricparkingbrake 131-137
Dashboardfuses 310-313
background
.
7
Overview
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016
Hazardwarninglamps 224
Headlampbeamheightadjustment 215
Steeringwheeladjustment 91
Horn 224
START/STOPbutton 125-130
Wiper and screenwash control
stalk 218-222
Trip computer 48-50
Lightingcontrolstalk 206-215
Direction indicators 215
Instrumentsandcontrols(cont.)
Memorisingspeeds 149
Speedlimitrecognition 150-153
Speed limiter 154-156
Cruise control 157-159
Dynamic cruise control 160-166
Dynamic cruise control
with Stop function 167-175
Inter-vehicle distance 168, 171
Blackpanel 47
Modes 19-20
background
8
Overview
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016
Maintenance - Technical data
Petrolweights 324-325
Dieselweights 328-329
Runningoutoffuel,Diesel
(primingpump) 321
Checkinglevels 274-276
- oil
- brakefluid
- coolant
- screenwash/headlampwashfluid
Checkingcomponents 277-278
- air filter
- passengercompartmentfilter
- oil filter
- electricparkingbrake
- brakepads/discs
Changingbulbs 301-309
- front
- rear
Openingthebonnet 271
Under the bonnet, petrol 272
Underthebonnet,Diesel 273
Petrolengines 322-323
Dieselengines 326-327
Identificationmarkings 331
Dimensions 330
12Vbattery 315-318
Load reduction, economy mode 265
Enginecompartment
fuses 310-311,314
background
.
9
Eco-driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap00c_eco-conduite_ed01-2016
Optimise the use of your gearbox
Withamanualgearbox,moveoffgentlyandchangeupwithoutwaiting.
Duringaccelerationchangeupearly.
Withanautomaticgearbox,givepreferencetoautomaticmodeand
avoidpressingtheacceleratorpedalheavilyorsuddenly.
Control the use of your electrical
equipment
Beforemovingoff,ifthepassengercompartmentistoowarm,
ventilateitbyopeningthewindowsandairventsbeforeusingtheair
conditioning.
Above30mph(50km/h),closethewindowsandleavetheairvents
open.
Remembertomakeuseofequipmentthatcanhelpkeepthetemperature
inthepassengercompartmentdown(sunroofandwindowblinds...).
Switchofftheairconditioning,unlessithasautomaticregulation,as
soonasthedesiredtemperatureisattained.
Switchoffthedemistinganddefrostingcontrols,ifnotautomatic.
Switchofftheheatedseatassoonaspossible.
Switchofftheheadlampsandfrontfoglampswhentheambientlight
leveldoesnotrequiretheiruse.
Avoidrunningtheenginebeforemovingoff,particularlyinwinter;your
vehiclewillwarmupmuchfasterwhiledriving.
Asapassenger,ifyouavoidconnectingyourmultimediadevices
(film,music,videogame...),youwillcontributetowardslimitingthe
consumptionofelectricalenergy,andsooffuel.
Disconnectyourportabledevicesbeforeleavingthevehicle.
Eco-driving
Eco-drivingisarangeofeverydaypracticesthatallowthemotoristtooptimisetheirfuelconsumptionandCO
2
emissions.
Drive smoothly
Maintainasafedistancebetweenvehicles,useenginebrakingrather
thanthebrakepedal,andpresstheacceleratorprogressively.These
practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and CO
2
emissionsandalsohelpsreducethebackgroundtrafficnoise.
Ifyourvehiclehascruisecontrol,makeuseofthesystematspeeds
above25mph(40km/h)whenthetrafficisflowingwell.
Thegearshiftindicatorinvitesyouengagethemostsuitablegear:as
soon as the indication is displayed in the instrument panel, follow it
straightaway.
Forvehiclesfittedwithanautomaticgearbox,thisindicatorappears
onlyinmanualmode.
background
10
Eco-driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap00c_eco-conduite_ed01-2016
Limit the causes of excess consumption
Spreadloadsthroughoutthevehicle;placetheheaviestitemsinthe
bottomoftheboot,ascloseaspossibletotherearseats.
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof
bars,roofrack,bicyclecarrier,trailer...).Usearoofboxinpreference.
Removeroofbarsandroofracksafteruse.
Attheendofwinter,removesnowtyresandrefityoursummertyres.
Observe the recommendations
on maintenance
Checkthetyrepressuresregularly,whencold,referringtothelabelin
thedooraperture,driver'sside.
Carryoutthischeckinparticular:
- beforealongjourney,
- ateachchangeofseason,
- afteralongperiodoutofuse.
Don'tforgetthesparewheelandthetyresonanytrailerorcaravan.
Haveyourvehicleservicedregularly(engineoil,oilfilter,airfilter,
passengercompartmentfilter...)andobservethescheduleof
operationsrecommendedinthemanufacturer'sserviceschedule.
WithaBlueHDiDieselengine,iftheSCRsystemisfaultyyourvehicle
becomespolluting;gotoaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop
withoutdelaytohavetheemissionsofnitrousoxidesbroughtbackto
thelegallevel.
Whenrefuelling,donotcontinueafterthethirdcut-offofthenozzleto
avoidanyoverflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the first 1 800 miles
(3000kilometres)thatyouwillseethefuelconsumptionsettledownto
aconsistentaverage.
background
1
11
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Touch screen tablet
The7-inchtouchscreentabletgivesaccessto:
- theheating/airconditioningcontrols,
- menusforadjustingsettingsforvehicle
functions and systems,
- audio system and telephone controls and
the display of associated information,
and,dependingonequipment,allows:
- thedisplayofalertmessagesandthe
visualparkingsensorsinformation,
- the permanent display of the time and the
ambienttemperature(abluewarninglamp
appearswhenthereisariskofice),
- accesstothecontrolsforthenavigation
system and Internet services, and the
displayofassociatedinformation.
For reasons of safety, the driver
should only carry out operations
that require close attention, with the
vehicle stationary.
Some functions are not accessible
whendriving.
General operation
Recommendations
Useispossibleinalltemperatures.
Donotusepointedobjectsonthetouchscreen
tablet.
Donottouchthetabletscreenwithwethands.
Uses a soft clean cloth to clean the tablet touch
screen.
Use this button to return to the
previouspage.
Usethisbuttontoconfirm.
Principles
Use the buttons on either side of the screen
for access to the menus, then press the virtual
buttonsinthetouchscreen.
Certain functions may be displayed over 1 or
2pages.
Todeactivate/activateafunction,pressOFF/ON.
Tomodifyasetting(lightingduration,...)or
access additional information, press the symbol
forthefunction.
After a few moments with no action on
thesecondarypage,theprimarypage
isdisplayedautomatically.
background
12
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Menus
Upper bar
Certain information is always present in the
upperbarofthetouchscreentablet:
- Repeatoftheairconditioninginformation,
anddirectaccesstothecorresponding
menu.
- Repeat of information from the Radio
Media, Telephonemenusandnavigation
instructions*.
*Dependingonequipment.
Air conditioning.
Allowscontrolofthesettingsfor
temperature,airflow...
Connected navigation or Mirror
Screen*.
Seemorein"Audioandtelematics".
Radio Media.
Seemorein"Audioandtelematics".
Telephone.
Seemorein"Audioandtelematics".
Driving.
Allows the activation, deactivation and
adjustmentofsettingsforcertainfunctions.
Applications.
Allows the display of the trip
computer, with the type 1 instrument
panel.
Seemorein"Audioandtelematics".
Volume/mute.
Seemorein"Audioandtelematics".
- Access to Configuration.
For more information on Heating, Manual
air conditioning and Automatic air
conditioning,refertothecorresponding
sections.
The functions accessible from this menu are
arrangedundertwotabs:"Settings" and
"Driving assistance".
background
1
13
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Driving menu
Settings tab
Thefunctionsaregroupedinto4families:
- Lighting.
- Vehicle access.
- Comfort.
- Driving assistance.
Button Comments
Lighting - "Directionalheadlamps":activation/deactivationofcorneringlighting/
directionallighting.
- "LEDdaytimerunninglamps"(dependingonthecountryofsale).
Vehicle
access
- "Driverplipaction":activation/deactivationofselectiveunlockingofthe
driver'sdoor.
- "Unlockbootonly":activation/deactivationofunlockingatthetailgate.
- "Motorizedtailgate":activation/deactivationofmotorizedoperationofthe
tailgate.
- "Hands-FreeTailgateAccess":activation/deactivationofthehands-free
tailgateaccesssystem.
Comfort - "Rearwiperinreverse":activation/deactivationoftherearwipercoupled
withreversegear.
- "Guide-me-homelighting":activation/deactivationofautomaticguide-me-
homelighting.
- "Welcomelighting":activation/deactivationofexteriorwelcomelighting.
- "Moodlighting":activation/deactivationofmoodlighting.
- "Automirrordippinginreverse":activation/deactivationofautomaticdipping
ofdoormirrorsinreversegear.
Driving
assistance
- "Collisionriskalertandautomaticbraking":activation/deactivationof
collisionriskalert.
- "Recommendedspeeddisplay":activation/deactivationofthespeedlimit
recognitionsystem.
- "FatigueDetectionSystem":activation/deactivationofthedriverfatigue
detectionsystem.
For more information on one of these
functions,refertothecorresponding
section.
background
14
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Driving assistance tab
Corresponding function Comments
Speed settings Memorisationofspeedsettingsforthespeedlimiter,cruisecontrol,dynamiccruisecontrolordynamic
cruisecontrolwithstopfunction.
Under-inflation initialization Reinitializationoftheunder-inflationsystem.
Diagnostic Listofcurrentalerts.
Lane departure warning Activation/deactivationofthefunction.
Parking sensors Activation/deactivationofthefunction.
Automatic illumination
of headlamps activated
Activation/deactivationofthefunction.
Stop & Start Activation/deactivationofthefunction.
Blind spot monitoring Activation/deactivationofthefunction.
Panoramic visual aid Activation/deactivationofthefunctionthenchoiceofoptions.
Dynamic cruise control Choiceofthestandardcruisecontrolorthedynamiccruisecontrol.
Wheel anti-slip regulation Activation/Deactivationofthefunction
Formoreinformationononeofthesefunctions,refertothecorrespondingsection.
background
1
15
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Button Comments
Turnoffthescreen.
Adjustmentofbrightness.
Choiceandsettingsforthreeprofiles.
Settingsforthetouchscreentabletandinstrumentpanel...
ActivationandadjustmentofWi-Fisettings.
Conguration
Thefunctionsavailablethroughthismenuaredetailedinthetablebelow.
background
16
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Button Corresponding function Comments
Screen configuration Adjustmentofthedisplaysettings(scrollingoftext,animations...)andbrightness.
Ambience Selectacolourschemeforthetype2instrumentpanel.
Instrument panel perso Selectthetypeofinformationdisplayedinthetype2instrumentpanel.
System configuration Choiceofunits:
- temperature (°Celsius or °Fahrenheit)
- distanceandfuelconsumption(l/100km,mpgorkm/l).
Languages Choiceoflanguageusedforthetouchscreentabletandthetype2instrumentpanel.
Time/Date Settingthedateandtime.
background
1
17
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Monochromedigitalinstrumentpanel(type1)
1. Revcounter(x1000rpmortr/min),
graduationaccordingtoengine(petrolor
Diesel).
2. Gear shift indicator, selector position and
gearforanautomaticgearbox.
3. Digitalspeedometer(mphorkm/h).
4. Cruisecontrolorspeedlimitersettings.
Dials and screens
5. Fuelgauge.
6. Serviceindicator,thentotalmileage
recorder(milesorkm).
These functions are displayed in turn when
theignitionisswitchedon.
7. Tripmileagerecorder(milesorkm).
8. Repeatofairconditioningsettings.
A. Mainlightingdimmerbuttons.
B. Recallservicinginformation.
Reset the function selected to zero (service
indicatorortriprecorder).
Control buttons
background
18
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Thisinstrumentpanelcanbepersonalised.Dependingonthedisplaymodeselected,someinformationcanbehidden.
12-inch HD colour instrument panel (type 2)
1. Revcounter(x1000tr/minorrpm)("Dials"
mode).
2. Gear efficiency indicator, position of
theselectorleverandthegearwithan
automaticgearbox.
3. Digitalspeedometer(mphorkm/h).
4. Cruisecontrolorspeedlimitersetting.
A. Recallservicinginformation.
Recalltheremainingdrivingrangewiththe
SCR system and the AdBlue
®
.
Reset the function selected to zero (service
indicatorortriprecorder).
Control buttonDials and screens
5. Fuelgauge.
6. Totaldistancerecorder(milesorkm).
7. Tripdistancerecorder(milesorkm).
8. Repeat of the current media or telephone
information.
9. Repeatofthetripcomputerinformation.
10. Ambient temperature (a blue symbol
comesonifthereisariskofice).
background
1
19
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
You can modify the appearance of the
instrumentpanel,bychoosing:
- a colour scheme,
- adisplaymode.
Choosing the language
Thisdependsonthesettinginthetouchscreen
tablet.
Certainlanguagesarenotavailableforthetype2
instrumentpanel;Englishisselectedbydefault.
Each mode corresponds to the type of
informationdisplayedintheconfigurablearea.
Personalisation of the type 2 instrument panel
Choice of display mode
- "Dials":permanentdisplayofthetrip
computerandrevcounter.
Display zones
Whatever the display mode or colour scheme
chosen,theinstrumentpanelcontains:
- afixeddisplayzoneAwith:
● thespeedometer,
● thewarninglamps,
● thefuelgauge,
● thevariousrepeatedinformationand
alertmessages.
- aconfigurabledisplayzoneB.
Mostofthewarninglampsdonothaveafixed
position.
Thewarningandindicatorlampsaredisplayed
fromlefttorightinorderofimportance.
For certain functions that have indicator lamps
forbothonandoff,thereisjustonededicated
location.
Choosing the colour scheme
Tomodifyit,withthevehiclestationary:
F select the "Configuration" menu of the
touch screen tablet,
F select "Instrument panel perso",
F choose a colour scheme,
F confirm.
Thesystemrestartstotakeaccountofthe
modifications to the touch screen tablet and the
instrumentpanel.
background
20
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
- "Driving":displayoftherevcounterand
informationrelatedtodriving(inter-vehicle
time...).
- "Navigation":displayofinformationrelated
tothenavigationinprogress(mapand
instructions).
- "Minimal":noinformationdisplayed.
- "Personal":choiceofinformationtobe
displayed in each of the 2 display zones
(centre1/3andrighthand1/3)from:
● tripcomputer,
● media,
● navigation,
● drivingassistance,
● revcounter,
● coolanttemperatureindicator,
● noinformation(empty).
To modify the display mode of the instrument
panel:
F turn the thumbwheel on the left of the
steeringwheel,orpresstheendofthe
lightingcontrolstalktodisplayandrun
throughthedifferentmodesintheright
hand part of the instrument panel,
F once the selected display mode appears in
the central window, it is applied after a few
moments.
background
1
21
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Indicatorandwarninglamps
Certainwarninglampsmaycomeonin
oneoftwomodes:fixed(continuous)or
flashing.
Onlybyrelatingthetypeofillumination
to the operation of the vehicle can it
be determined whether the situation is
normalorafaulthasoccurred.Inthe
event of a fault, the illumination of the
warninglampmaybeaccompaniedby
amessage.
Refertothetablesonthefollowing
pagesformoreinformation.
Visualindicatorsinformingthedriverofthestatusofasystem(operationordeactivationindicator
lamp)ortheexistenceofafault(warninglamp).
When the ignition is switched on
Certainwarninglampscomeonforafew
seconds in the instrument panel when the
vehicle'signitionisswitchedon.
Whentheengineisstarted,thesesame
warninglampsshouldgooff.
Iftheyremainon,beforemovingoff,refertothe
informationonthewarninglampconcerned.
Associated warnings
Theilluminationofcertainwarninglampsmay
beaccompaniedbyanaudiblesignalanda
message.
Thewarninglampsmaycomeoncontinuously
(fixed)orflash.
background
22
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Operation indicator lamps
Ifoneofthefollowingindicatorlampscomesonintheinstrumentpanel,thisconfirmsthatthecorrespondingsystemhascomeintooperation.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Left-hand
direction indicator
flashingwithbuzzer. Thelightingstalkispusheddown.
Right-hand
direction indicator
flashingwithbuzzer. Thelightingstalkispushedup.
Sidelamps fixed. Thelightingstalkisinthe
"Sidelamps"position.
Dipped beam
headlamps
fixed. Thelightingstalkisinthe"Dipped
beamheadlamps"position.
Main beam
headlamps
fixed. Thelightingstalkispulledtowards
you.
Pullthestalktoreturntodippedbeamheadlamps.
background
1
23
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Automatic
headlamp
dipping
fixed. Thelightingcontrolstalkisinthe
"AUTO" position, pulled towards you,
and the function is activated (Driving
menu).
The system is in dipped beam mode
asthereissufficientambientlight
and/orthetrafficconditionsdonot
allowilluminationofmainbeam.
The camera, located at the top of the windscreen,
managestheoperationofmainbeam,dependingon
theambientlightinganddrivingconditions.
Pullingthelightingstalkagaintodeactivate.
For more information on Automatic headlamp
dipping,refertothecorrespondingsection.
fixed. Thelightingcontrolstalkisinthe
"AUTO" position, pulled towards you,
and the function is activated (Driving
menu).
The system is in main beam mode
astheambientlightingandtraffic
conditionsallowit.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Rear foglamps fixed. Therearfoglampsareon. Turntheringonthestalkrearwardtoswitchoffthe
rearfoglamps.
Front foglamps fixed. Thefrontfoglampsareswitchedon
usingtheringonthelightingcontrol
stalk.
Turntheringonthelightingcontrolstalkrearward
oncetoswitchoffthefrontfoglamps.
For more information on the Lighting control stalk,refertothecorrespondingsection.
background
24
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Electric parking
brake
fixed. Theelectricparkingbrakeisapplied. Releasetheelectricparkingbraketoswitchoffthe
warninglamp:withyourfootonthebrakepedal,
brieflypushtheelectricparkingbrakecontrollever.
Observethesafetyrecommendations.
For more information on the Electric parking brake,
refertothecorrespondingsection.
Diesel engine
pre-heating
fixed. The "START/STOP" switch has been
pressed(ignitionon).
Waituntiltheindicatorlampgoesoffbeforestarting.
Onceitgoesoff,startingisimmediate,oncondition
thatyoumaintainpressureonthebrakepedalforan
automaticgearbox,ortheclutchpedalispressedfully
downforamanualgearbox.
The period of illumination of the indicator lamp is
determined by the ambient conditions (up to about
thirtysecondsinextremeconditions).
Iftheenginedoesnotstart,switchtheignitionoffand
thenon,waituntiltheindicatorlampgoesoffagain,
thenstarttheengine.
Blind spot
monitoring
system
fixed. Theblindspotmonitoringsystemhas
beenactivated.
For more information on the Blind spot monitoring
system,refertothecorrespondingsection.
Park Assist fixed. TheParkAssistfunctionhasbeen
activated.
For more information on Park Assist, refer to the
correspondingsection.
background
1
25
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Automatic
wiping
fixed. The wiper control is pushed
downwards.
Automaticfrontwipingisactivated.
Todeactivateautomaticwiping,operatethecontrol
stalkdownwardsorputthestalkintoanotherposition.
Passenger
airbag system
fixed.
The control switch, located at the
passenger'sendofthedashboard,isin
the "ON"position.
Thepassenger'sfrontairbagisactivated.
In this case, do not install a rearward
facingchildseatonthefrontpassenger
seat.
Turn the control switch to the "OFF" position to
deactivatethepassenger'sfrontairbag.
Youcaninstallarearwardfacingchildseat,unlessthere
isafaultwiththeairbags(airbagwarninglampon).
Stop & Start fixed. Whenthevehiclestops(redlights,
trafficjams,...)theStop&Startsystem
hasputtheengineintoSTOPmode.
Thewarninglampgoesoffandtheenginerestarts
automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to
moveoff.
flashes for a few
seconds,thengoesoff.
STOP mode is temporarily
unavailable,
or
STARTmodeisinvoked
automatically.
For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the
correspondingsection.
background
26
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Passenger's
airbag system
fixed. The control switch, located at the
righthandendofthedashboardis
set to the OFFposition.
Thepassenger'sfrontairbagis
deactivated.
Youcaninstallarearwardfacing
child seat, unless there is an
operatingfaultwiththeairbags
(Airbagwarninglampon).
Turn the control switch to the "ON" position to activate
thepassenger'sfrontairbag.
In this case, do not fit a child seat in the rearward
facingpositiononthefrontpassengerseat.
Wheel anti-slip fixed,accompanied
by the display of a
message.
Thewheelanti-slipregulation(ASR)
isdeactivated.
Theanti-slipregulationisautomaticallyreactivated
fromaround30mph(50km/h)oratthenextengine
start.
Reactivatethesystemmanuallybypressingthe
buttonagain.
For more information on the Electronic stability
programmeandwheelanti-slipregulation,referto
thecorrespondingsection.
Stop & Start fixed. The Stop & Start has been
deactivated.
Reactivate the function in the Drivingmenu.
Deactivation indicator lamps
Ifoneofthefollowingindicatorlampscomeson,thisconfirmsthatthecorrespondingsystemhasbeenswitchedoffintentionally.
Thisismaybeaccompaniedbyanaudiblesignalandthedisplayofamessage.
background
1
27
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Warning lamps
Whentheengineisrunningorthevehicleisbeingdriven,illuminationofoneofthefollowingwarninglampsindicatesafaultwhichrequiresactionon
thepartofthedriver.
Anyfaultresultingintheilluminationofawarninglampmustbeinvestigatedfurtherusingtheassociatedmessage.
Ifyouencounteranyproblems,contactaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
STOP fixed,associatedwith
anotherwarninglamp,
accompanied by an
audiblesignalanda
message.
Illuminationofthiswarninglampis
related to a serious fault detected
withtheengine,thebrakingsystem,
thepowersteering,etc.,oramajor
electricalfault.
Youmuststopassoonasitissafetodoso.
Park,switchofftheignitionandcallaCITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
background
28
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Assisted lane
departure
warning system
fixed. The system is not available The system has been deactivated or is on automatic
standby.
For more information on the Assisted lane departure
warning system,refertothecorrespondingsection.
flashing. You are about to cross a solid lane
markingwithoutoperatingthe
directionindicators.
Thesystemisactivated,thencorrectsthetrajectory
onthesideofthelanemarkingdetected.
For more information on the Assisted lane departure
warning system,refertothecorrespondingsection.
+ fixed,accompanied
by the display of a
message,anaudible
signalandtheService
warninglamp.
Thesystemhasafault. Bevigilantanddrivecarefully.
HavethesystemcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
For more information on the Assisted lane departure
warning system,refertothecorrespondingsection.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
background
1
29
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Service temporarily,
accompanied by a
message.
One or more minor faults for which
thereisnospecificwarninglamp
havebeendetected.
Identifythecauseofthefaultusingthemessage
displayedinthescreen.
You can deal with some problems yourself, such as a
door open or the start of saturation of the particle filter
(assoonasthetrafficconditionsallow,regenerate
thefilterbydrivingataspeedofatleast40mph
(60km/h),untilthewarninglampgoesoff).
For any other problems, such as a fault with the tyre
under inflation detection system, contact a CITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
fixed,accompaniedby
amessage.
Oneormoremajorfaultsforwhich
thereisnospecificwarninglamp
havebeendetected.
Identifythecauseofthefaultusingthemessage
displayedinthescreen;youmustthencontacta
CITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
fixed,associated
withtheflashingand
thenfixeddisplayof
the service indicator
spanner.
Theservicingintervalhasbeen
exceeded.
OnlyonBlueHDiDieselversions.
Yourvehiclemustbeservicedassoonaspossible.
background
30
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Deactivation of
the automatic
functions of the
electric parking
brake
fixed. The "automatic application" (on
switchingofftheengine)and
"automatic release" functions are
deactivatedorfaulty.
In the event of a fault, illumination of
thiswarninglampisaccompaniedby
amessage.
ContactaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop
ifautomaticapplication/releaseisnotpossible.
Theparkingbrakecanbereleasedmanually.
For more information on the Electric parking brake
and the reactivation of the automatic functions, refer
tothecorrespondingsection.
Electric parking
brake
flashing. Whendriving:theelectricparking
brakeisnotfullyreleased.
Fullyreleasetheparkingbrakebyaquickpresson
thecontrollever.Ifthewarningpersist,stopassoon
asitissafetodoso.
ContactaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Whenstationary:parkingbrake
applied, the system does not
guaranteeimmobilisationofthe
vehicle(whenparkingonavery
steepslope,forexample).
Securetheimmobilisationofthevehiclebyengaging
agearwithamanualgearbox,byplacingthegear
selector in position Pwithanautomaticgearbox,orby
fittingachocktooneofthewheels.
Electric parking
brake fault
fixed. Theelectricparkingbrakehasafault. ContactaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop
withoutdelay.
Theparkingbrakecanbereleasedmanually.
For more information on the Electric parking brake,
refertothecorrespondingsection.
background
1
31
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Braking fixed. Thebrakefluidlevelhasdropped
significantly.
Youmuststopassoonasitissafetodoso.
Top-upwithbrakefluidlistedbyCITROËN.
Iftheproblempersists,havethesystemcheckedby
aCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
+ fixed,associated
withtheABSwarning
lamp.
Theelectronicbrakeforcedistribution
(EBFD)systemhasafault.
Youmuststopassoonasitissafetodoso.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Anti-lock
Braking System
(ABS)
fixed. Theanti-lockbrakingsystemhasa
fault.
Thevehicleretainsconventionalbraking.
Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a
CITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshopwithout
delay.
Dynamic
stability control
(DSC/ASR)
flashing. TheDSC/ASRregulationis
operating.
The system optimises traction and improves the
directional stability of the vehicle in the event of loss of
griportrajectory.
fixed. TheDSC/ASRsystemhasafault. HavethesystemcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Engine
autodiagnosis
system
flashing. Theenginemanagementsystemhas
afault.
Riskofdestructionofthecatalyticconverter.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
fixed. The emission control system has a
fault.
Thewarninglampshouldgooffwhentheengineisstarted.
Ifitdoesnotgooff,contactaCITROËNdealerorqualified
workshopwithoutdelay.
background
32
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Low fuel level fixed,accompaniedby
anaudiblesignaland
amessage.
When it first comes on there remains
approximately 6 litres of fuel in the
tank.
Youarethenusingthefuelreserve.
Youmustrefuelassoonaspossibletoavoidrunning
outoffuel.
Untilsufficientfuelisadded,thiswarninglampwill
comeoneverytimetheignitionisswitchedon,
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignalandamessage.
Thisaudiblesignalandmessagearerepeatedwith
increasingfrequencyasthefuelleveldropstowards"0".
Fueltankcapacity:approximately57litres(petrol)or
55litres(Diesel).
Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel as
thiscoulddamagetheemissioncontrolandinjection
systems.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Seat belt(s)
not fastened /
unfastened
fixed
orflashing
accompanied by an
audiblesignal.
A seat belt has not been fastened or
hasbeenunfastened.
Pullthestraptheninsertthetongueinthebuckle.
Airbags ontemporarily. Thiswarninglampcomesonfora
few seconds when you turn on the
ignition,thengoesoff.
Thiswarninglampshouldgooffwhentheengineisstarted.
Ifitdoesnotgooff,contactaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
fixed. Oneoftheairbagorseatbelt
pretensionersystemshasafault.
HavethemcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Passenger
airbag system
flashing. Thepassengerairbagsystemhasa
fault.
Donothaveapassengerseatedinthefront
passengerseat.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
background
1
33
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Battery charge fixed. Thebatterychargingcircuithasa
fault(dirtyorlooseterminals,slackor
cutalternatorbelt,...).
Thewarninglampshouldgooffwhentheengineis
started.
Ifitdoesnotgooff,contactaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Maximum
coolant
temperature
fixed. Thetemperatureofthecooling
systemistoohigh.
Stopassoonasitissafetodoso.
Waituntiltheenginehascooleddownbeforetopping-
upthelevel,ifnecessary.
If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN dealer or
qualifiedworkshop.
Directional
headlamps
flashing. The directional headlamps system
hasafault.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
Door(s) open* fixed,associatedwith
amessageidentifying
the door, if the speed is
below6mph(10km/h).
Adoororthebootisstillopen. Closethedoororboot.
fixed,associatedwitha
messageidentifyingthe
door, and accompanied
byanaudiblesignal
if the speed is above
6mph(10km/h).
*Onlywiththetype1instrumentpanel.
Engine oil
pressure
fixed. Thereisafaultwiththeengine
lubricationsystem.
Youmuststopassoonitissafetodoso.
Park,switchofftheignitionandcontactaCITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
background
34
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Under-inflation fixed,accompaniedby
anaudiblesignaland
amessage.
The pressure in one or more tyres is
toolow.
Checkthetyrepressuresassoonaspossible.
Thischeckshouldpreferablybecarriedoutwhenthe
tyresarecold.
Youmustreinitialisethesystemaftertheadjustment
ofoneormoretyrepressuresandafterchangingone
ormorewheels.
For more information on Under-inflation detection,
refertothecorrespondingsection.
+
flashingthenfixed,
accompanied by the
Servicewarninglamp.
Thesystemhasafault:thetyre
pressuresarenolongermonitored.
Checkthetyrepressuresassoonaspossible.
HavethesystemcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Foot on the
brake pedal*
fixed. Thebrakepedalisnotpressed. Withanautomaticgearbox,pressthebrakepedalto
movethegearselectoroutofpositionP.
Foot on the
clutch*
fixed. In the STOP mode of Stop & Start,
changingtoSTARTmodeisdenied
because the clutch pedal is not fully
down.
Youmustdeclutchfullytoallowthechangetoengine
STARTmode.
*Onlywiththetype1instrumentpanel.
background
1
35
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
AdBlue
®
(BlueHDi Diesel)
fixed,onswitching
ontheignition,
accompanied by an
audiblesignalanda
messageindicatingthe
remainingdrivingrange.
Theremainingdrivingrangeis
between350miles(600km)and
1500miles(2400km).
Top-up the AdBlue
®
assoonaspossibleorgotoa
CITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
+ flashing,associated
with the SERVICE
warninglamp,
accompanied by an
audiblesignalanda
messageindicatingthe
remainingdrivingrange.
Theremainingdrivingrangeis
between0and350miles(600km).
You must top-up the AdBlue
®
to avoid a breakdown
orgotoaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
flashing,associated
with the SERVICE
warninglamp,
accompanied by an
audiblesignalanda
messageindicatingthat
startingisprevented.
The AdBlue
®
tankisempty:the
startinginhibitionsystemrequired
bylegislationpreventsstartingofthe
engine.
Tobeabletostarttheengine,youmusttop-up the
AdBlue
®
or call on a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
It is essentialtoaddatleast3.8litresofAdBlue
®
to
thefluidtank
Fortopping-uporformoreinformationonAdBlue
®
and the SCR system,refertothecorrespondingsection.
background
36
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
+
+
SCR emissions
control system
(BlueHDi Diesel)
fixed,onswitchingontheignition,
associated with the SERVICE and
enginediagnosticwarninglamps,
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignaland
amessage.
A fault with the SCR emissions control
systemhasbeendetected.
This alert disappears once the
exhaustemissionsreturntonormal
levels.
flashing,onswitchingontheignition,
associated with the SERVICE and
enginediagnosticwarninglamps,
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignaland
amessageindicatingtheremaining
drivingrange.
After confirmation of the fault with the
emissions control system, you can
driveforupto650miles(1100km)
beforetheenginestartinginhibition
systemistriggered.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshopwithout delay,
to avoid a breakdown.
flashing,onswitchingontheignition,
associated with the SERVICE and
enginediagnosticwarninglamps,
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignaland
amessage.
Youhaveexceededtheauthorised
drivinglimitfollowingconfirmation
of a fault with the emissions control
system:theenginestartinginhibition
systempreventsstartingofthe
engine.
Tobeabletostarttheengine,you
must call on a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshop.
background
1
37
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Service indicator
System which informs the driver when the
nextserviceisdue,inaccordancewiththe
manufacturer'sserviceschedule.
The point at which the service is due is
calculated from the last indicator zero reset,
accordingtothemileagecoveredandthetime
elapsedsincethelastservice.
ForBlueHDiDieselversions,dependingonthe
countryofsale,thedegreeofdeteriorationof
theengineoilmayalsobetakenintoaccount.
More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
Whentheignitionisswitchedon,noservice
informationappearsinthescreen.
Less than 600 miles (1 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
Example:560miles(900km)remainbefore
thenextserviceisdue.
For5secondsaftertheignitionisswitchedon,
thescreenindicates:
Between 600 miles (1 000 km)
and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain
before the next service is due
For5secondsaftertheignitionisswitchedon,the
spannersymbolisingtheserviceoperationscomes
on.Thedistancerecorderdisplaylineindicatesthe
distanceremainingbeforethenextserviceisdue.
Example:1700miles(2800km)remainbefore
thenextserviceisdue.
For5secondsaftertheignitionisswitchedon,the
screenindicates:
5secondsaftertheignitionisswitchedon,
the spanner goes off;thedistancerecorder
resumesitsnormaloperation.Thescreenthen
indicatesthetotalandtripdistances.
5secondsaftertheignitionisswitchedon,
the distance recorder resumes its normal
operation.The spanner remains on to
indicate that a service must be carried out
soon.
Gaugesandindicators
background
38
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Service overdue
For5secondsaftertheignitionisswitched
on, the spanner flashes to indicate that
the service must be carried out as soon as
possible.
Example: the service is overdue by 180 miles
(300km).
For5secondsaftertheignitionisswitchedon,
thescreenindicates:
Therefore, the spanner may come on
ifyouhaveexceededtheperiodsince
the last service, as indicated in the
manufacturer'sserviceschedule.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the
spanner may also come on early,
accordingtothelevelofdeterioration
oftheengineoil,whichdependsonthe
drivingconditionsinwhichthevehicle
isused.
5secondsaftertheignitionisswitchedon,
the distance recorder resumes its normal
operation.The spanner remains on.
With BlueHDi Diesel versions, the Service
warninglampalsocomesonwhentheignition
isswitchedon.
background
1
39
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Resetting the service indicator
If you have to disconnect the battery
followingthisoperation,lockthevehicle
and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset
toberegistered.
After each service, the service indicator must
beresettozero.
If you have carried out the service on your
vehicleyourself:
F switchofftheignition,
F press and hold the trip distance recorder
reset button,
F switchontheignition;thedistancerecorder
displaybeginsacountdown,
F when the display indicates "=0", release
thebutton;thespannerdisappears.
Retrieving the service
information
You can access the service information at any
time.
F Press the trip distance recorder reset
button.
The service information is displayed for a
fewseconds,thendisappears.
background
40
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
*Onlywiththetype2instrumentpanel.
Coolant temperature gauge*
Afterdrivingforafewminutes,thetemperature
andpressureinthecoolingsystemincrease.
Totop-upthelevel:
F waitfortheenginetocool,
F unscrewthecapslightlytoallowthe
pressure to drop,
F when the pressure has dropped, remove
the cap,
F top-uptheleveltothe"MAX"mark.
Withtheenginerunning,whentheneedleis:
- in zone A, the temperature is correct,
- in zone B,thetemperatureistoohigh;
themaximumtemperatureandthe
central STOPwarninglampscomeon,
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignalanda
warningmessage.
Beawareoftheriskofburnswhen
topping-upthecoolingsystem.Donot
fillabovethemaximumlevel(indicated
ontheheadertank).
You MUST stop as soon as it is safe
to do so.
Waitafewminutesbeforeswitchingoffthe
engine.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
background
1
41
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Engine oil level indicator*
On versions fitted with an electric oil level
indicator,thestateoftheengineoillevelis
displayed in the instrument panel for a few
seconds,aftertheservicinginformation.
The level read will only be correct if
thevehicleisonlevelgroundandthe
enginehasbeenoffformorethan
30minutes.
Oil level correct
Oil level incorrect
Thisisindicatedbythedisplayofthemessage
"Oil level incorrect" in the instrument panel
screen,accompaniedbytheservicewarning
lampandanaudiblesignal.
Ifthelowoillevelisconfirmedbyacheckusing
thedipstick,thelevelmustbetoppedupto
avoiddamagetotheengine.
For more information on Checking levels,
refertothecorrespondingsection.
Oil level indicator fault
Thisissignalledbythedisplayofthemessage
"Oil level measurement invalid" in the
instrumentpanel.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
In the event of a fault with the electric indicator,
theoillevelisnolongermonitored.
Ifthesystemisfaulty,youmustcheckthe
engineoillevelusingthemanualdipstick
locatedunderthebonnet.
For more information on Checking levels,
refertothecorrespondingsection.
*Dependingonversion.
background
42
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
AdBlue
®
fluid range indicators
Once the AdBlue
®
tankisonreserveorafter
detection of a fault with the SCR emissions
controlsystem,whentheignitionisswitched
on, an indicator displays an estimate of the
distancethatcanbecovered,therange,before
enginestartingisprevented.
In the event of simultaneous system fault and
low AdBlue
®
level,theshortestrangefigureis
theonedisplayed.
Range greater than 1 500 miles (2 400 km)
Whentheignitionisswitchedon,no
informationonrangeisdisplayedautomatically
intheinstrumentpanel.
Withthetype2instrumentpanel,pressingthis
buttontemporarilydisplaysthedrivingrange.
In the event of the risk of non-starting related to a lack of AdBlue
®
Theenginestartpreventionsystem
requiredbyregulationsisactivated
automatically once the AdBlue
®
tankis
empty.
background
1
43
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Remaining range between 350 and 1500 miles
(600 and 2 400 km)
Whenswitchingontheignition,theAdBlue
warninglampcomesonforafewseconds,
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignalandthe
displayofamessage(e.g.:"Top-upAdBlue:
Startingimpossiblein900miles")indicating
theremainingrangeexpressedinmilesor
kilometres.
Whendriving,themessageisdisplayedevery
200miles(300km)untilthefluidlevelhasbeen
topped-up.
Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshoptohavetheAdBlue
®
fluidtopped-up.
Youcanalsotop-upthefluidyourself.
For more information on AdBlue
®
and the SCR
system,andinparticularontopping-up,refer
tothecorrespondingsection.
Remaining range between 0 and 350 miles
(0 and 600 km)
Whenswitchingontheignition,theSERVICE
warninglampcomesonandtheAdBlue
warninglampflashes,accompaniedbyan
audiblesignalandthedisplayofamessage
(e.g."Top-upAdBlue:Startingimpossiblein
350miles")indicatingtheremainingrange
expressedinmilesorkilometres.
Whendriving,themessageisdisplayedevery
30secondsuntilthefluidlevelhasbeen
topped-up.
Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshoptohavetheAdBlue
®
fluidtopped-up.
Youcanalsotop-upthefluidyourself.
Otherwise you will not be able to restart your
engine.
Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue
®
Whenswitchingontheignition,theSERVICE
warninglampcomesonandtheAdBlue
warninglampflashes,accompaniedbyan
audiblesignalandthedisplayofamessage
(e.g."Top-upAdBlue:Startingimpossible").
The AdBlue
®
tankisempty:thesystemrequired
byregulationspreventsenginestarting.
Tobeabletostarttheengine,
we recommend that you call on
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshopforthetop-uprequired.
If you carry out the top-up yourself, it
isessentialtoaddatleast3.8litresof
AdBlue
®
tothetank.
For more information on AdBlue
®
and the SCR
system,andinparticularontopping-up,refer
tothecorrespondingsection.
background
44
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
In the event of a fault with the SCR emissions control system
In the event of the detection of a fault
TheAdBlue,SERVICEanddiagnostic
warninglampscomeon,accompaniedbyan
audiblesignalandthedisplayofthemessage
"Emissionsfault".
Thealertistriggeredwhendrivingwhenthe
fault is detected for the first time, then when
switchingontheignitionforsubsequent
journeys,whilethefaultpersists.
During an authorised driving phase (between
650 miles and 0 miles) (1 100 km and 0 km)
If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed
(after30miles(50km)coveredwiththe
permanentdisplayofthemessagesignalling
afault),theSERVICEandenginediagnostic
warninglampscomeonandtheAdBlue
warninglampflashes,accompaniedbyan
audiblesignalandthedisplayofamessage
(e.g."Emissionsfault:Startingpreventedin
150miles")indicatingtheremainingrange
expressedinmilesorkilometres.
Whiledriving,themessageisdisplayedevery
30secondswhilethefaultwiththeSCRsystem
persists.
Thealertisrepeatedwhenswitchingontheignition.
YoushouldgotoaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshopassoonaspossible.
Otherwise, you will not be able to restart your
engine.
Asystemthatpreventsenginestartingisactivatedautomaticallyfrom650miles(1100km)afterconfirmationofafaultwiththeSCRemissions
controlsystem.HavethesystemcheckedbyaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshopassoonaspossible.
If it is a temporary fault, the alert
disappearsduringthenextjourney,
afterself-diagnosisoftheSCRsystem.
Starting prevented
Everytimetheignitionisswitchedon,the
SERVICEandenginediagnosticwarning
lampscomeonandtheAdBluewarninglamp
flashes,accompaniedbyanaudiblesignaland
thedisplayofthemessage"Emissionsfault:
Startingprevented".
Youhaveexceededtheauthorised
drivinglimit:thestartingprevention
systeminhibitsenginestarting.
Tobeabletostarttheengine,youmust
call on a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
background
1
45
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Distance recorders
The total and trip distances are displayed for
thirtysecondswhentheignitionisswitchedoff,
whenthedriver'sdoorisopenedandwhenthe
vehicleislockedorunlocked.
Whentravellingabroad,youmay
havetochangetheunitsofdistance:
the display of road speed must be in
theofficialunits(milesorkm)forthe
country.Thechangeofunitsisdonevia
thescreenconfigurationmenu,withthe
vehiclestationary.
Trip distance recorder
It measures the distance travelled since it was
resettozerobythedriver.
F Withtheignitionon,pressthebuttonuntil
zerosappear.
Total distance recorder
It measures the total distance travelled by the
vehiclesinceitsfirstregistration.
background
46
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Lighting dimmer control
Allowsthemanualadjustmentofthebrightnessoftheinstrumentpanelandtouchscreentabletto
suittheambientlightlevel.
Operatesonlywhenthevehiclelightingison,withtheexceptionofthedaytimerunninglamps.
Two buttons
Withtheexteriorlightingon,pressbuttonA
toincreasethebrightnessoftheinstruments
andcontrolsandtheinteriormoodlightingor
button Btoreduceit.
Assoonasthelightingreachestherequired
levelofbrightness,releasethebutton.
Touch screen tablet
F In the Configuration menu, select
"Brightness".
F Adjustthebrightnessusingthearrowsor
bymovingthecursor.
background
1
47
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Whendrivingatnight,thisfunctionallows
certain displays in the instrument panel to be
switchedofftoavoidvisualfatigueforthedriver.
The essential information, such as the speed of
the vehicle or the cruise control or speed limiter
indications remains displayed in the instrument
panel.
Using the steering mounted
control
F Withthevehiclelightingon,pressthis
buttonagaintoactivatetheblackpanel.
F Pressthisbuttonagaintodeactivateit.
Black screen (touch screen
tablet)
Black panel (comfortable
night driving display)
F In the Configuration menu, select "Dark".
Thescreenofthetouchscreentabletgoes
off.
F Pressthescreenagain(anywhereonits
surface)toswitchitonagain.
background
48
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Trip computer
Type 1 instrument panel
Systemthatgivesyouinformationonthejourneyinprogress(range,fuelconsumption…).
Information display in the touch screen tablet
Permanentdisplay:
F Select the "Trip computer" in the
Applicationsmenu.
The trip computer information is displayed in
tabs.
F Press one of the buttons to display the
desiredtab.
Thecurrentfuelconsumptiontabwith:
- therange,
- the current fuel consumption,
- theStop&Starttimecounter.
The trip "1"tabwith:
- the distance travelled,
- theaveragefuelconsumption,
- theaveragespeed,
forthefirsttrip.
The trip "2"tabwith:
- the distance travelled,
- theaveragefuelconsumption,
- theaveragespeed,
forthesecondtrip.
Trip reset
F When the desired trip is displayed, press
the reset button or on the end of the wiper
controlstalk.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
isidentical.
Forexample,trip"1" can be used for daily
figures,andtrip"2"formonthlyfigures.
The information is accessible in the Drivingmenu.
Temporarydisplayinanewwindow:
F Presstheendofthewipercontrolstalkfor
access to the information and display the
differenttabs.
background
1
49
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Trip computer
Type 2 instrument panel
Information display in the instrument panel
F Press the button on the end of the wiper
control stalk to display the various tabs in
succession.
- Thecurrentinformationtabwith:
● therange,
● thecurrentfuelconsumption,
● theStop&Starttimecounter.
- Trip "1"with:
● theaveragespeed,
● theaveragefuelconsumption,
● thedistancetravelled,
forthefirsttrip.
- Trip "2"with:
● theaveragespeed,
● theaveragefuelconsumption,
● thedistancetravelled,
forthesecondtrip.
Trip reset
F When the trip required is displayed, press
the control for more than two seconds
or use the left hand thumbwheel of the
steeringmountedcontrols.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
isidentical.
Forexample,trip"1" can be used for daily
figures,andtrip"2"formonthlyfigures.
Forallotherdisplaymodes,pressingtheend
ofthewiperstalkdisplaysthisinformationina
newwindow.
The display of trip computer information is
permanent when you select the "Dials" or
"Personal"displaymode.
background
50
Instruments
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap01_instruments-bord_ed01-2016
Trip computer
Range
(milesorkm)
The distance which can still be
travelledwiththefuelremainingin
thetank(relatedtotheaveragefuel
consumption over the last few miles
(kilometres)travelled).
Thisvaluemayvaryfollowingachange
inthestyleofdrivingortherelief,
resultinginasignificantchangeinthe
currentfuelconsumption.
Whentherangefallsbelow20miles(30km),
dashesaredisplayed.Afterfillingwithatleast
5litresoffuel,therangeisrecalculatedandis
displayedwhenitexceeds60miles(100km).
If dashes are displayed continuously
whiledrivinginplaceofthedigits,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshop.
This function is only displayed from
20mph(30km/h).
Current fuel consumption
(mpgorl/100kmorkm/l)
Calculatedoverthelastfewseconds.
Average fuel consumption
(mpgorl/100kmorkm/l)
Calculatedsincethelasttripreset.
Average speed
(mphorkm/h)
Calculatedsincethelasttripreset.
Distance travelled
(milesorkm)
Calculatedsincethelasttripreset.
Stop & Start time counter
(minutes/secondsorhours/minutes)
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time
counter calculates the time spent in STOP
modeduringajourney.
Itresetstozeroeverytimetheignitionis
switchedon.
A few definitions
background
51
2
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Electronickey-remotecontrol
Systemwhichpermitsremotelockingorunlocking
ofthevehicleaswellasopeningthebootand,
dependingonversion,operationofthealarm.
Italsoallowsthelocationandstartingofthe
vehicleaswellasprovidingprotectionagainst
theft.
Unlocking the vehicle
F Pressthisbutton.
Unlocking the vehicle and
opening the boot
The direction indicators flash for a few
seconds.Thedoormirrorspotlamps
comeon.Dependingonversion,the
door mirrors unfold, the welcome
lightingcomesonandthealarmis
deactivated.
F Makealongpressonthis
buttontounlockthevehicle
and,dependingonversion,
releasethetailgateoropenthe
motorisedtailgate.
F Tounlocktheotherdoorsandtheboot,
pressthisbuttonagain.
Thesettingofselectiveunlockingisdonein
the Drivingmenu.
Select "Driver plip action".
Completeunlockingisactivatedbydefault.
Complete unlocking
F Tounlockonlythedriver'sdoor,
pressthisbuttononce.
Selective unlocking
Settingsforthemotorisedtailgatecanbe
adjustedintheDrivingmenu.
Motorisedoperationisactivatedbydefault.
A. Unlockingthevehicle.
B. Centrallockingthevehicle.
C. Unlockingthevehicleand,dependingon
version,releaseofthetailgateoropening
themotorisedtailgate.
Theelectronickeyincludesanintegralback-up
emergencykey.
background
52
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Deadlockingrenderstheinteriordoor
controlsinoperative.
It also deactivates the manual central
lockingbutton.
Therefore, never leave anyone inside
thevehiclewhenitisdeadlocked.
Deadlocking
F Withthevehicleunlocked,press
thisbutton.
F Within five seconds, press this button
againtodeadlockthevehicle.
This function allows you to identify your vehicle
fromadistance,particularlyinpoorlight.Your
vehiclemustbelocked.
Locating your vehicle
F Pressthisbutton.
This will switch on the courtesy lamps and
the direction indicators will flash for about
10seconds.
F Pressthisbutton.
Holdingthebuttonallowsthe
windows to be raised to the
desiredposition.
Normal locking
If one of the doors or the boot is not
properlyclosed,lockingdoesnottake
place.
Nevertheless, the alarm (if fitted) will be
fullyactivatedafteraround45seconds.
Ifthevehicleisunlockedbymistake
andnoactionistakenonthedoorsor
boot,thevehiclewilllockitselfagain
automaticallyafteraboutthirtyseconds.
If fitted to your vehicle and the alarm is
reactivatedautomatically.
The direction indicators come on for a
fewseconds.
Dependingonyourversion,thedoor
mirrorsfold,thealarmisactivated.
Locking the vehicle
Ensurethatnothingcouldpreventthe
correctclosingofthewindows.
Beawareofchildrenwhenoperating
thewindows.
Theautomaticfoldingandunfolding
of the door mirrors can be deactivated
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
background
53
2
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Systemthatallowstheunlocking,locking
andstartingofthevehiclewhilekeepingthe
electronickeyonyourperson.
For reasons of safety and theft protection,
donotleaveyourelectronickeyinthe
vehicle,evenwhenyouareclosetoit.
Itisrecommendedthatyoukeepiton
yourperson.
Theelectronickeycanalsobeusedas
aremotecontrol.
For more information on the Electronic
key - remote control, refer to the
correspondingsection.
KeylessEntryandStarting
Unlocking the vehicle
Complete unlocking
F Withtheelectronickeyonyourpersonand
intherecognitionzoneA, pass your hand
behind the door handle of one of the front
doorstounlockthevehicleorpressthe
tailgateopeningcontrol(locatedcentrally).
Selective unlocking
F Tounlockonlythedriver'sdoor,withthe
electronickeyonyourperson,passyour
handbehindthedriver'sdoorhandle.
F Tounlockthecompletevehicle,passyour
handbehindthefrontpassengerdoor
handlewiththeelectronickeycloseto
thepassengerdoor,orpressthetailgate
openingcontrolwiththeelectronickey
closetotherearofthevehicle.
Activationordeactivationofselectiveunlocking
is done in the Drivingmenu.
Select "Driver plip action".
Bydefault,completeunlockingisactivated.
The direction indicators flash for a
fewseconds.
Dependingonversion,thedoormirrors
unfold, the alarm is deactivated and the
welcomelightingcomeson.
background
54
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Ensurethatnothingcouldpreventthe
correctoperationofthewindows.
Beawareofchildrenwhenoperating
thewindows.
Locking the vehicle
F Withtheelectronickeyintherecognition
zone A,presswithafingerorthumb
on one of the front door handles (at the
markings)tolockthevehicleororpress
thelockingbuttonontherightofthe
tailgate.
Maintainingpressureallowsthewindowstobe
raisedtothedesiredposition.
Itisnotpossibletolockthevehicleifoneofthe
keysisleftinsidethevehicle.
The direction indicators come on for a
fewseconds.
Dependingonyourversion,thedoor
mirrorsfoldandthealarmisactivated.
Normal locking
background
55
2
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Deadlocking
Bythedoors:
F Withtheelectronickeyintherecognition
zone A,pressafingerorthumbononeof
thefrontdoorhandles(atthemarkings)or
thelockingcontrollocatedlocatedonthe
rightofthetailgatetolockthevehicle.
F Within five seconds, press the door handle
orthelockingcontrollocatedontherightof
thetailgateagaintodeadlockthevehicle.
Deadlockingrenderstheinteriordoor
controlsinoperative.
It also deactivates the manual central
controlbutton.
Therefore, never leave anyone inside
thevehiclewhenitisdeadlocked.
background
56
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
As a safety measure (children on
board), never leave the vehicle without
takingtheelectronickeyfortheKeyless
EntryandStartingsystemwithyou,
evenforashortperiod.
Beawareoftheriskoftheftwhenthe
electronickeyfortheKeylessEntryand
Startingsystemisinoneofthedefined
zoneswiththevehicleunlocked.
If one of the doors or the boot is still
openoriftheelectronickeyforthe
KeylessEntryandStartingsystemhas
been left inside the vehicle, the central
lockingdoesnottakeplace.
However, the alarm (if fitted) will be fully
activatedafterabout45seconds.
In order to preserve the battery in the
electronickeyandthevehicle'sbattery,
the "hands-free" functions are put into
long-termstandbyafter21dayswithout
use.Torestorethesefunctions,press
one of the remote control buttons or
starttheenginewiththeelectronickey
inthereader.
Formoreinformationonstartingwith
Keyless Entry and Starting, refer to
thecorrespondingsection.
Ifthevehicleisunlockedbymistake
and with no action on the doors or boot,
thevehiclewilllockagainautomatically
afterabout30seconds.
If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm will
alsobereactivatedautomatically.
Theautomaticfoldingandunfolding
of the door mirrors can be deactivated
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Accumulations(water,dust,grime,
salt...)ontheinnersurfaceofthedoor
handlemayaffectdetection.
Ifcleaningtheinnersurfaceofthedoor
handleusingaclothdoesnotrestore
detection, contact a CITROËN dealer or
aqualifiedworkshop.
A sudden splash of water (stream of
water,highpressurejetwasher,…)
may be identified by the system as the
desiretoopenthevehicle.
background
57
2
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Normal locking
F Turnthekeytowardstherearofthevehicle
tolockthevehiclecompletely.
Deadlocking
F Turnthekeytowardstherearinthedriver's
doorlocktolockthevehiclecompletely.
F Turnthekeytowardstherearagainwithin
fivesecondstodeadlockthevehicle.
Dependingonversion,thedirection
indicators flash for a few seconds, the
doormirrorsfold.
Forversionswithalarm:itisnotdeactivated/activatedwhenunlocking/lockingthevehicle
withtheintegralkey.
Thesirenwillsoundonopeningthedoorwiththekey(integralwiththeremotecontrol).It
stopswhentheignitionisswitchedon.
Emergencyprocedure
Theintegralkeyisusedtolockandunlockthe
vehiclewhentheelectronickeycannotoperate
and in the event of a fault with the Keyless
EntryandStartingsystem:
- cellbatteryflat,vehiclebatterydischarged
ordisconnected,...
- vehiclelocatedinanareawithstrong
electromagneticsignals.
F Toextracttheemergencymechanicalkey
fromtheelectronickey,pressbutton1 and
guidethekey2out.
Theintegralkeyisalsousedtodeactivate/
reactivatethepassenger'sairbag.
Itprovidesabackupmeansoflockingthe
passengerdoors.
Italsoallowslockingofthevehiclewithout
activationofthealarm.
Emergency unlocking/locking
using the integral key
Unlocking
F Turnthekeytowardsthefrontofthe
vehicletounlockthevehicle.
Dependingonversion,thedirection
indicators flash for a few seconds, the
door mirrors unfold and the welcome
lightingcomeson.
Forversionswithalarm:thesirenwill
soundonopeningthedoorwiththekey
(intheremotecontrol).Itstopswhen
theignitionisswitchedon.
background
58
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Remote control problem -
reinitialisation
Changing the battery
Followingdisconnectionofthevehiclebattery,
replacement of the remote control battery or
in the event of a remote control malfunction,
youcannolongerunlock,lockorlocate
yourvehicle.
F Placethemechanicalkey(integralwith
theremotecontrol)inthelocktounlock
yourvehicle.
F Placetheelectronickeyinthereader.
F SwitchontheignitionbypressingSTART/
STOP.
Theelectronickeyisfullyoperationalagain.
If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshopassoonas
possible.
Do not throw the remote control
batteries away, they contain metals
whichareharmfultotheenvironment.
Takethemtoanapprovedcollection
point.
Batteryref.:CR2032/3volts.
Batteryreplacementissignalledbythedisplay
ofamessage.
F Unclipthecoverusingasmallscrewdriver
atthecut-out.
F Liftoffthecover.
F Removetheflatbatteryfromitslocation.
F Fit the new battery into its location
observingtheoriginaldirectionoffitment.
F Clipthecoverontothecasing.
background
59
2
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Lost electronic key
VisitaCITROËNdealerwiththevehicle'sregistrationcertificate,yourpersonalidentificationdocumentsandifpossiblethekeycodelabel.
TheCITROËNdealerwillbeabletoretrievethekeycodeandthetranspondercoderequiredtoorderanewkey.
Electronic key
Theelectronickeyisasensitivesystem;donotoperateitwhileitisinyourpocketasthereisapossibilitythatitmayunlockthevehicle,without
youbeingawareofit.
Donotrepeatedlypressthebuttonsofyourelectronickeyoutofrangeandoutofsightofyourvehicle.Youruntheriskofstoppingitfrom
workingandtheremotecontrolwouldhavetobereinitialised.
Theelectronickeycannotoperateasaremotecontrolwhenitisinthereaderorevenwhentheignitionisswitchedon.
Locking the vehicle
Drivingwiththedoorslockedmaymakeaccesstothepassengercompartmentbytheemergencyservicesmoredifficultinanemergency.
Asasafetyprecaution(withchildrenonboard),taketheelectronickeywithyouwhenyouleavethevehicle,evenforashorttime.
Electrical interference
Theelectronickeymaynotoperateifclosetocertainelectronicdevices:telephone,laptopcomputer,strongmagneticfields,...
Anti-theft protection
Donotmakeanymodificationstotheelectronicengineimmobilisersystem;thiscouldcausemalfunctions.
Don'tforgettoturnthewheeltolockthesteeringcolumn.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle
HaveallofthekeysinyourpossessionpairedbyaCITROËNdealer,toensurethatonlyyourkeysallowyourvehicletobeunlockedand
started.
background
60
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Manual central locking
Centrallocking
F Press this button to operate the central
lockingofthevehicle(doorsandboot)from
insidethevehicle.
F Pressingthebuttonagainunlocksthe
vehiclecompletely.
Automatic central locking
of doors (anti-intrusion
security)
Thedoorsandbootlockautomaticallywhen
driving,assoonasthespeedexceeds6mph
(10km/h).
To activate or deactivate this function (activated
bydefault):
F withtheignitionon,pressthisbuttonuntila
messageappearsintheinstrumentpanel.
When locking / deadlocking from the
outside
Ifthevehicleislockedordeadlocked
from the outside, the button is not
active.
F Afternormallocking,pulloneof
theinteriordoorhandlestounlock
thevehicle.
F Afterdeadlocking,youhavetouse
the remote control, the Keyless Entry
andStartingsystemortheintegral
keytounlockthevehicle.
If one of the doors or the boot is
open,automaticcentrallockingdoes
notcomplete:thesoundofthelocks
reboundingcanbeheard.
Transporting long or voluminous
objects
If you want to drive with the boot open
butthevehicle'ssidedoorslocked,
pressthecentrallockingcontrolbutton
tolockthedoors.
Drivingwiththedoorslockedmaymake
accesstothepassengercompartment
bytheemergencyservicesmore
difficultinanemergency.
background
61
2
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Doors
Opening
From outside
F Afterunlockingthevehicleusingthe
remote control or the Keyless Entry and
Startingsystem,pullthedoorhandle.
From inside
F Pull the front or rear door lever to open
thedoor.
Ifadoorisnotproperlyclosed:
- with the engine running, this
warninglampandamessage
appear in the instrument panel
(type 1) for a few seconds,
- when driving (speed above
6mph(10km/h)),this
warninglampandamessage,
accompanied by an audible
signal,appearintheinstrument
panel (type 1 and type 2) for a
fewseconds.
Closing
background
62
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Back-up control
Driver's door (locking /
unlocking)
F Insertthekeyintothelockbarreltolock/
unlockthedoor.
You can also apply this procedure for the
passengerdoors.
Locking the passenger doors
F Openthedoors.
F Forthereardoors,checkthatthechildlock
isnoton.
F Insertthekeyinthelatchlocatedonthe
edgeofthedoorandturnitaneighthofa
turntotherightfortherighthanddoor,and
totheleftforthelefthanddoor.
Lockingiseffectivewhentheslotis
horizontal.
F Closethedoorsandcheckthatthevehicle
haslockedcorrectlyfromtheoutside.
Unlocking the passenger
doors
F Pulltheinteriordooropeningcontrol.
For more information on the Child lock, refer
tothecorrespondingsection.
Tomanuallylockandunlockthedoorsintheeventofacentrallockingorbatteryfailure.
Toensurecompletelockingofthe
vehicle,onlydisconnectingthebattery
inhibitsopeningofthetailgatefromthe
outside.
background
63
2
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Boot
Opening the tailgate
With the electronic key /
remote control
With the tailgate opening
control
F Withthevehicleunlockedorwiththe
electronickeyoftheKeylessEntryand
Startingsysteminthezonecovered,press
thetailgatecontrolA.
F Raisethetailgate.
F Makealongpressonthisbutton
toreleasethetailgate.Ifthe
vehiclewaslocked,thisaction
firstunlocksthevehicle.
F Raisethetailgate.
Whenselectiveunlockingisactivated,
theelectronickeymustbeclosetothe
rearofthevehicle.
Closing the tailgate
F Lowerthetailgateusingtheinteriorgrips.
F Releasethegripsandpressdownonthe
outsideofthetailgatetocloseit.
Ifthetailgateisnotproperlyclosed:
Thetailgateisnotdesignedtotakea
bicyclecarrier.
- engine running,thiswarning
lampandamessageappearin
the instrument panel (type 1) for
a few seconds,
- vehicle running (speed above
6mph(10km/h)),thiswarning
lampandamessageappear
in the instrument panel (type 1
and type 2) for a few seconds,
accompanied by an audible
signal.
background
64
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Motorisedtailgate
General points
Neverplaceafingerinthelocking
mechanismofthemotorisedtailgate-
Riskofseriousinjury!
Anti-pinch
Themotorisedtailgateincludesasystem
fordetectingobstacles,whichautomatically
interrupts and reverses the movement by a few
degrees,toallowtheobstacletobecleared.
Note that this anti-pinch system does not
operateattheendoftheclosingmovement
(around1cmbeforecompleteclosure).
Themotorisedoperationofthetailgatecan
beactivatedordeactivatedbyselecting
"Motorised tailgate" in the Driving menu of
thetouchscreentablet.
Bicycle carrier / Towbar
Thetailgateisnotdesignedtobefittedwitha
bicyclecarrier.
If a bicycle carrier is fitted to a towbar with a
wiringharnessconnectedtoatowbarsocket,
themotorisedoperationofthetailgateis
automaticallydeactivated.
Ifusingatowbarorbicyclecarriernotapproved
by CITROËN, it is essential to deactivate the
motorisedoperationofthetailgate.
Tailgateoperationcommandsmustbemade
withthevehiclestationary.
Ensurethatthereisenoughfreespacetoallow
themotorisedtailgatetoopen.
Toavoidtheriskofinjurythrough
pinchingortrapping,beforeandduring
operationofthetailgate:
- ensure that there is no person close
to the rear of the vehicle,
- watch the behaviour of rear
passengers,particularlychildren.
background
65
2
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
or
Opening the tailgate with the
electronic key / remote control (A)
Opening the tailgate with the
"Keyless Entry and Starting"
system "B"
Opening the tailgate
F Makealongpressontheremote
controlbutton.
F Press button Bonthetailgate,withthe
electronickeyinthezonecovered.
Whenselectivelockingisactivated,the
electronickeymustbeneartherearof
thevehicle.
Bydefault,thetailgateopens
completely or alternatively to the
memorisedposition.
F Aftercompleteunlockingofthevehicle,
press control Bonthetailgate.
The instruction is confirmed by an audible
signal.
Motorised closing
Therearetwopossibilities:
F PressandreleasetheexteriorcontrolB.
or
Themotorisedtailgatehasananti-
pinchsystemthatinterruptsclosingifit
encountersanobstacle.
F Press and then release button C.
Thereareseveralwaysofoperatingthe
motorisedtailgate:
- usingtheKeylessEntryandStarting
electronickey(A),
- usingtheexteriorcontrolonthe
tailgate(B),
- usingtheinteriorcontrolonthetailgate(C),
- by a movement of your foot, if your vehicle
hasthehands-freetailgateaccess
function.
Motorised opening
For more information on Hands-free tailgate
access,refertothecorrespondingsection.
Operation
Operationofthetailgatecanbe
interruptedatanytime:
- bypressing
one of these
two buttons,
or
- bypressingtheexteriorcontrolB.
After interruption of an operation,
another press on one of the controls
resumes the movement, with the
exceptionofapressontheremote
control button, which only allows
opening.
background
66
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Memorising an
opening position
Whereheightisrestricted(garagewithalow
ceiling,...)itispossibletolimitandmemorise
theopeningangleofthemotorisedtailgate.
Thismemorisationisdoneasfollows:
- openthetailgatetothedesiredposition,
- press button CortheexteriorcontrolB for
morethan3seconds.
Memorisationofthemaximumopeningposition
ofthetailgateisconfirmedbyanaudiblesignal.
Tocancelthememorisedposition:
- stopthetailgateinanintermediate
position,
- press button CortheexteriorcontrolB for
morethan3seconds.
Cancellation of the memorised position is
confirmedbyanaudiblesignal.
Manual operation
Themotorisedtailgatecanbeopenedand
closed manually, even if motorised operation is
activated.
However, any manual intervention must be
donewiththetailgatestopped.
Repeatedopeningandclosingofthe
tailgatecancauseoverheatingofits
electricmotor,afterwhichopeningand
closingwillnotbepossible.
Allow 10 minutes for the motor to cool
downbeforeoperatingthetailgate
again.
If you are not able to wait, operate it
manually.
Detection of obstacles
Shouldanobstacle(personorobject)be
encountered, the anti-pinch system interrupts
theclosingmovementandraisesthetailgatea
fewcentimetrestocleartheobstacle.
Whenopeningandclosingamotorisedtailgate
manually,thereisnoassistancefromgas-filled
struts.Resistancetoopeningandclosingis
thereforeentirelynormal.
background
67
2
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Reinitialising the motorised
tailgate
This operation is necessary where there is
no movement - after detection of an obstacle,
connectingorrechargingthebattery,...
F Openthetailgatemanually,ifnecessary.
F Manuallyclosethetailgatefully.
If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Precautions in use
In wintry conditions
In the event of an accumulation of snow
onthetailgate,clearthesnowbefore
commandingamotorisedopeningof
thetailgate.
Theformationoficecanblockthe
tailgateandpreventitsopening:wait
untiltheicemeltswiththeheatingof
thepassengercompartment.
When washing the vehicle
Whenwashingthevehicleinan
automaticcarwash,don'tforgetto
lockyourvehicletoavoidtheriskof
unexpectedopening.
Back-up release
Unlocking
F Foldbacktherearseatstogainaccessto
thelockfrominsidetheboot.
F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the
locktounlockthetailgate.
F Movethelatchtotheleft.
Locking after closing
Ifthefaultpersistsafterclosingagain,theboot
willremainlocked.
Tomanuallyunlockthebootintheeventofa
batteryorcentrallockingfailure.
background
68
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Hands-freetailgateaccess
Thetailgatemybeequippedwithahands-freefunction,toallowyoutoopenorclosethetailgate
whenyourhandsarefull.
For more information on the Motorised tailgate,refertothecorrespondingsection.
"Hands-free" opening
F With your hands full and the remote control
onyourpersonintherecognitionzoneA,
pass your foot rapidly below the rear
bumper.
Theinstructionisconfirmedbyflashingofthe
directionindicatorsandanaudiblesignal.
Thetailgateopenstothememorisedposition.
Passingyourfootbelowthebumperagainwhile
thetailgateisopeningstopsthemovement.
Passingyourfootbelowthebumperforathird
timereversesthedirectionofmovement.
"Hands-free" closing
F With your hands full and the remote control
onyourpersonintherecognitionzoneA,
pass your foot rapidly below the rear
bumper.
Theinstructionisconfirmedbyflashingofthe
directionindicatorsandanaudiblesignal.
Deactivation
Hands-freetailgateaccessisactivatedbydefault.
This function can be activated or deactivated
byselecting"Hands-free failgate access" in
the Drivingmenuofthetouchscreentablet.
Ensure that you are steady on your feet
beforepassingafootrapidlybelowthe
rearbumper.
Takecarenottotouchtheexhaust
system,whichmaybehot-Riskof
burns!
Ifthevehicleislocked,itisunlocked
beforeopeningthetailgate.
Automatic locking
Tohavethevehiclelockitselfafterclosingthe
tailgatebypassingafootbelowthebumper,
activate "Hands-free tailgate access self-
locking" in the Driving menu of the touch
screentablet.
Passingyourfootbelowthebumperagainwhile
thetailgateisclosingstopsthemovement.
Passingyourfootbelowthebumperforathird
timereversesthedirectionofmovement.
background
69
2
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Operating faults
If several foot movements below the rear
bumperfailtoopenthetailgate,waita
fewsecondsbeforestartingagain.
The function is automatically deactivated in the
eventofheavyrainoraccumulationofsnow.
Ifthefunctionfailstooperate,check
thattheelectronickeyisnotexposedto
strongelectromagneticinterference(a
smartphone,...).
Thefunctionmaynotworkcorrectlywitha
prostheticleg.
Thefunctionmaynotworkcorrectlyifyour
vehicleisfittedwithatowbar.
Insomecircumstances,thetailgatemayonly
openorclose,particularlyif:
- your vehicle is fitted with a towbar,
- you hitch or unhitch a trailer,
- you fit or remove a bicycle carrier,
- you load or unload bicycles from a bicycle
carrier,
- youplaceorliftsomethingbehindthe
vehicle,
- an animal approaches the bumper,
- youarewashingyourvehicle,
- aserviceisbeingcarriedoutonyour
vehicle,
- youareaccessingthesparewheel
(dependingonversion).
Toavoidsuchoperatingproblems,keepthe
electronickeyawayfromtherecognitionzone
ordeactivate"Hands-FreeTailgateAccess".
Ensurethatnoobjectorpersonmightprevent
thecorrectopeningorclosingofthetailgate.
Be particularly aware of children when
operatingthetailgate.
background
70
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Forallworkonthealarmsystem,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshop.
Alarm
Systemwhichprotectsandprovidesadeterrentagainsttheftandbreak-ins.Itprovidesthefollowingtypesofmonitoring:
- Exterior perimeter
Thesystemchecksforopeningofthevehicle.
Thealarmistriggeredifanyonetriestoopena
door,thebootorthebonnet...
- Interior volumetric
Thesystemchecksforanyvariationinthe
volumeinthepassengercompartment.
Thealarmistriggeredifanyonebreaksa
window,entersthepassengercompartmentor
movesinsidethevehicle.
Self-protection function
Thesystemchecksforthe
disconnectionofanyofitscomponents.
Thealarmistriggeredifthebattery,
thebuttonorthesirenwiringis
disconnectedordamaged.
Locking the vehicle with full
alarm system
Activation
Ifanopening(door,boot,bonnet...)isnot
closedfully,thevehicleisnotlockedbutthe
exteriorperimetermonitoringwillbeactivated
after a delay of 45 seconds, at the same time
astheinteriorvolumetricmonitoring.
F Lockthevehicleusingthe
remotecontrol.
F
Switchofftheignitionandgetoutofthevehicle.
or
F Lockthevehicleusingthe"KeylessEntry
andStarting"system.
Themonitoringsystemisactive:theindicator
lamp in the button flashes once per second
and the direction indicators come on for about
2seconds.
Afteracommandtolockthevehicleusing
the remote control or the Keyless Entry
andStartingsystem,theexteriorperimeter
monitoringisactivatedafteradelayof
5seconds,theinteriorvolumetricmonitoring
after45seconds.
background
71
2
OFF
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Locking the vehicle with exterior perimeter
monitoring only
Deactivatetheinteriorvolumetricmonitoring
toavoidunwantedtriggeringofthealarmin
certaincasessuchas:
- leavingawindowpartiallyopen,
- washingyourvehicle,
- changingawheel,
- towingyourvehicle,
- transportonaferry.
Deactivating the volumetric
monitoring
F Switchofftheignitionandwithin
ten seconds press this button
untilitsindicatorlampisonfixed.
F Getoutofthevehicle.
F Immediatelylockthevehicleusingthe
remote control or the "Keyless Entry and
Starting"system.
Onlytheexteriorperimeterprotectionsystemis
active:theindicatorlampinthebuttonflashes
oncepersecond.
To be effective, this deactivation must be done
everytimetheignitionisswitchedoff.
Inthecaseofautomaticlockingofthe
vehicle (which occurs after a period
of30secondsifadoororthebootis
notopened),themonitoringsystemis
reactivatedautomatically.
Deactivation
F Pressoneoftheunlockingbuttonsonthe
remotecontrol:
short press
longpress
or
F Unlockthevehicleusingthe"KeylessEntry
andStarting"system.
Themonitoringsystemisdeactivated:the
indicator lamp in the button is off and the
directionindicatorsflashforabout2seconds.
Reactivating the interior
volumetric monitoring
F Deactivatetheexteriorperimeter
monitoringbyunlockingthevehicleusing
the remote control or the Keyless Entry and
Startingsystem.
Theindicatorlampinthebuttongoesoff.
F Reactivatethefullalarmsystembylocking
thevehicleusingtheremotecontrolorthe
"KeylessEntryandStarting"system.
The indicator lamp in the button flashes once
persecondagain.
background
72
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Triggering of the alarm
Thisisindicatedbysoundingofthesiren
andflashingofthedirectionindicatorsfor
thirtyseconds.
Themonitoringfunctionsremainactiveuntil
thealarmhasbeentriggeredeleventimesin
succession.
Whenthevehicleisunlockedusingtheremote
controlortheKeylessEntryandStarting
system,rapidflashingoftheindicatorlamp
in the button informs you that the alarm was
triggeredduringyourabsence.Whenthe
ignitionisswitchedon,thisflashingstops
immediately.
Failure of the remote control
Todeactivatethemonitoringfunctions:
F Unlockthevehicleusingthekey(integral
withtheremotecontrol)inthedriver'sdoor
lock.
F Openthedoor;thealarmistriggered.
F Switchontheignition;thealarmstops.The
indicatorlampinthebuttongoesoff.
Locking the vehicle without
activating the alarm
F Lockordeadlockthevehicleusingthekey
(integralwiththeremotecontrol)inthe
driver'sdoorlock.
Operating fault
Whentheignitionisswitchedon,fixed
illumination of the indicator lamp in the button
indicatesafaultinthesystem.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Automatic activation*
2 minutes after the last door or the boot is
closed,thesystemisactivatedautomatically.
F Toavoidtriggeringthealarmonentering
thevehicle,firstpresstheunlockingbutton
ontheremotecontrolorunlockthevehicle
usingtheKeylessEntryandStarting
system.
*Dependingonthecountryofsale.
background
73
2
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Electric windows
Manual operation
To open or close the window, press or pull the
switchgently.Thewindowstopsassoonasthe
switchisreleased.
To open or close the window, press or pull
theswitchfully:thewindowopensorcloses
completelywhentheswitchisreleased.
Pressingtheswitchagainstopsthemovement
ofthewindow.
1. Left-handfront.
2. Right-handfront.
3. Right-handrear.
4. Left-handrear.
5. Deactivate the electric window switches
locatedattherearseats.
Automatic operation
Safety anti-pinch
When the window rises and meets an obstacle,
itstopsandimmediatelypartiallylowersagain.
Intheeventofunwantedopeningofthe
windowonclosing,presstheswitchuntilthe
window opens completely, then pull the switch
immediatelyuntilthewindowcloses.Continue
toholdtheswitchforapproximatelyonesecond
afterthewindowhasclosed.
The safety anti-pinch function is not active
duringthisoperation.
The electric window switches remain
operationalforapproximately45secondsafter
switchingofftheignition.
Once this time has elapsed, the electric
windowswillnotoperate.Toreactivatethem,
switchtheignitiononagain.
background
74
Acc ess
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016
Reinitialising the electric
windows
Deactivating the rear
controls for the rear
windows
Intheeventofcontactduringoperation
of the windows, you must reverse the
movementofthewindow.Todothis,
presstheswitchconcerned.
Whenoperatingthepassengerelectric
window switches, the driver must
ensurethatnothingispreventing
correctclosingofthewindows.
The driver must ensure that the
passengersusetheelectricwindows
correctly.
Be particularly aware of children when
operatingthewindows.
Beawareofpassengersorother
personspresentwhenclosingthe
windowsusingtheelectronickeyorthe
"KeylessEntryandStarting"system.
Followingreconnectionofthebattery,the
safetyanti-pinchfunctionmustbereinitialised.
The safety anti-pinch function is not active
duringtheseoperations.
For the safety of your children, press
switch 5 to prevent operation of the
rear windows irrespective of their
positions.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on,
accompaniedbyamessageconfirming
activation.Itremainson,aslongasthechild
lockisoff(deactivated).
Use of the rear electric windows from the
driver'scontrolsremainspossible.
Foreachwindow:
- lower the window completely, then raise it,
it will rise in steps of a few centimetres with
eachaction.Repeattheoperationuntilthe
window closes completely,
- continue to pull the switch for at least
onesecondafterreachingthisposition,
windowclosed.
background
75
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Front seats
Manual adjustments
Forwards-backwards
F Raise the control bar and slide the seat
forwardsorbackwards.
When the seat is in the desired position, push
itforwardsandbackwardswithoutraisingthe
controlbartocheckthatithaslatched.
Driver's seat backrest angle
F Turntheknobtoadjusttheseatbackrest.
Asasafetymeasure,seatadjustmentsshouldonlybedonewhenstationary.
Driver's seat height
F Pull the control upwards to raise or push
it downwards to lower, as many times as
necessary,toobtainthedesiredposition.
Seatconsistingofaseatcushion,aseatbackrestandaheadrestraintwhichcanallbeadjustedtoadaptyourpositionforeaseofdrivingandcomfort.
Beforemovingtheseatbackwards,ensurethatthereisnothingthatmightpreventthefulltraveloftheseat,soastoavoidtheriskofjamming
theseatcausedbythepresenceofobjectsonthefloorbehindtheseatorrearpassengers.Iftheseatjams,stopthemovementimmediately.
background
76
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Passenger's seat backrest angle
F Pullthecontrolupwardsorturntheknobto
adjustthebackrest.
Whenthebackrestisatthedesiredangle,
releasethecontrol.
Table position for the
passenger's seat backrest
This position, associated with the position of
therearseats,allowsyoutocarrylongobjects
insidethevehicle.
Whenthebackrestisatthedesiredangle,
releasethecontrollever.Toensurethatthe
backrestdoesnotsuddenlyfoldforwards
andhurtyou,restrainitwithyourbackor
yourhandwhileoperatingthecontrol.
Checkthatthereisnoobjectthatcould
interfere with the movement of the seat,
bothaboveandbelow.
F Place the head restraint in the low position,
raisethearmrestandfoldthefixedtable
ontothebackoftheseat.
F Pullthecontrolfullyupandtipthebackrest
forwards.
Toreturntothenormalposition,guidethe
backrestbackwardsuntilitlocks.
background
77
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Front seats
Electric adjustments
Forwards-backwards
(driver's seat)
F Push the control forwards or rearwards to
slidetheseat.
Seat backrest angle
F Tilt the control forwards or rearwards to
adjusttheangleoftheseatbackrest.
Seat cushion height and angle
F Operate the rear part of the control
upwards or downwards to obtain the
desiredheight.
F Operate the front part of the control
upwards or downwards to obtain the
desiredangle.
Toavoiddischargingthebattery,carryout
theseadjustmentswiththeenginerunning.
Beforemovingtheseatbackwards,ensurethatthereisnothingthatmightpreventthefulltraveloftheseat,soastoavoidtheriskofjamming
theseatcausedbythepresenceofobjectsonthefloorbehindtheseatorrearpassengers.Iftheseatjams,stopthemovementimmediately.
background
78
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Systemwhichregisterstheelectricalsettings
ofthedriver'sseatanddoormirrors.Itenables
youtostoreandrecalltwopositionsusingthe
buttonsonthesideofthedriver'sseat.
Storing driving positions
Storing a position
Using buttons M / 1 / 2
F Switchontheignition.
F Adjustyourseatandthedoormirrors.
F Press button M, then press button 1 or 2
withinfourseconds.
Anaudiblesignalindicatesthatthepositionhas
beenstored.
Storinganewpositioncancelstheprevious
position.
Recalling a stored position
Ignition on or engine running
F Press button 1 or 2 to recall the
correspondingposition.
Anaudiblesignalconfirmsthatadjustmentis
complete.
You can interrupt the current movement by
pressingbuttonM, 1 or 2orbyusingoneofthe
seatcontrols.
A stored position cannot be recalled while
driving.
Recallingstoredpositionsisdeactivated
45secondsafterswitchingofftheignition.
background
79
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Additional adjustments
Head restraint height and angle
(depending on version)
The head restraint is fitted with a frame with
notcheswhichpreventsitfromlowering;thisis
asafetydeviceincaseofimpact.
The adjustment is correct when the upper
edge of the head restraint is level with the
top of the head.
Never drive with the head restraints
removed;theymustbeinplaceand
adjustedcorrectly.
F Toraiseaheadrestraint,pullitupwards.
F
Tolowertheheadrestraint,pressthelugA and the
pushtheheadrestraintdownatthesametime.
F Toadjusttheangleoftheheadrestraint,tilt
itslowerpartforwardsorbackwards.
Removing a head restraint
F To remove the head restraint, press the
lugAandpulltheheadrestraintupwards.
F
Toputtheheadrestraintbackinplace,engage
theheadrestraintstemsintheopenings
keepingtheminlinewiththeseatbackrestand
pressthelugAatthesametime.
Relax head restraints
Dependingonversion,youcanfoldthesidesto
obtainamorecomfortableposition.
F Press the control to obtain the desired
lumbarsupport.
Electric lumbar adjustment
background
80
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Electric leg rest
Manual passenger seat
F Press the front or rear part of the control to
unfoldorfoldawaythelegrest.
The movement stops when you release the
control.
Youcandeactivatethemassage
functionatanytimebypressingthis
button,itsindicatorlampgoesoff.
DeactivationActivation
Massage function
This function provides the front occupants
withalumbarmassage.Itonlyoperateswhen
theengineisrunningorinSTOPmodeofthe
Stop&Startsystem.
F Pressthisbutton.
Adjustment of intensity
Press this button to select one of
thetwolevelsofmassageintensity
offered.
Itsindicatorlampcomesonandthemassage
functionisactivatedforaperiodof1hour.
Duringthistime,massageisperformedin
6cyclesof10minutes(6minutesofmassage
followedby4minutesbreak).
After one hour, the function is deactivated, the
indicatorlampgoesoff.
background
81
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Heated seats control
F Usetheadjustmentwheeltoswitchonand
selectthelevelofheatingrequired:
0:Off.
1:Low.
2:Medium.
3:High.
Withtheenginerunning,thefrontseatscanbe
heatedseparately.
Beforeoperatingthelegrest,ensure
thatnothingcouldinterferewithits
movement.
Electric passenger seat
F Pushthecontrolforwardsorbackwardsto
unfoldorfoldawaythelegrest.
The movement stops when you release the
control.
Front armrest
Height adjustment
F Fullylowerthearmrest.
F Raise it to the required position (low,
intermediateorhigh).
F Onceinthehighposition,lifttoreleaseit
andreturnittothelowposition.
Comfort system for the driver and front
passenger.
background
82
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Second-row seats
Forwards-backwards adjustment
F Raise the lever A, located at the front of
theseatcushion,andadjusttheseattothe
desiredposition.
The3seatsinthe2
nd
rowareindependentofeachotherandareallthesamewidth.Theirbackrestscanbefoldedtovarytheloadspaceintheboot.
A. Forwardsandbackwardsadjustment:raise
thelever.
B. Backrestangleadjustment:pullthestrap
andguidetheseattotherear.
C. Foldingtheseat:pullthestrapupto
releasetheseat.
D. Foldingtheseatfromtherear:pullthe
strapthenpushtheseatforward.
background
83
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
F Pull the strap Bandguidetheseattothe
rear.
Thebackrestreclinesandtheseatbasepivots
slightly.
"Comfort" position
Returning the seat to the initial
position
F Pull the strap Bandguidetheseatforward.
Supervise any movements of seats
when made by children.
Toremoveit:
- movetheheadrestrainttothehighposition,
- presslugApullingtheheadrestraint
upwardsatthesametime.
The rear head restraints can be removed and
havetwopositions:
- high,positionforuse,
- low,stowedposition.
Toraiseaheadrestraint,pullitupwards.
Tolowerit,presslugAthentheheadrestraint.
Rear head restraints
Never drive with the head restraints
removed;theymustbeinplaceand
correctlyadjusted.
Torefitit:
- engagetheheadrestraintrodsinthe
apertures,keepingtheminlinewiththe
seatbackrest.
Relax head restraints
Dependingonversion,thesidescanbefolded
toobtainamorecomfortableposition.
background
84
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Flat floor
Folding a seat
From the outside
F Pull firmly upwards on strap C, as indicated
bythearrow,toreleasetheseat;keep
pullinguntiltheseatisfullyfolded.
Pushtheseatbackrestgentlyforwards
sothatthebackrestfoldsontotheseat
cushion.Theassemblylowersontothe
floor.
From the boot, when loading
for example
You can fold the second-row seats from the
boot,afterfirstfoldingthethird-rowseats.
F Pull on the strap D to release the seat in
questionthenpushforwardslightlyonthe
backrest.
Toavoidanydamagetothemechanism,
the strap D unclips if too much force is
applied.Simplyclipitinplaceagainforthe
systemtobeoperationalagain.
F Placetheseatsinthefullybackposition.
Each seat can be folded onto the floor to vary
thespaceavailableintheboot.
background
85
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Repositioning a seat
Beforeoperatingtherearseats,check
that the outer rear seat belts are not
loose,toavoiddamagingthem.The
centrebeltmustbestowed.Fixthe
tonguesofthethreebeltstotheir
anchoragepoints.
Continuity panels
These continuity panels are not
designedtosupportaweightgreater
than30kg.
Releasing / locking the continuity panels
F Beforeunfoldingthecontinuitypanels,
checkthattheseatsinthe2
nd
row are fully
back.
F Slide the continuity panel latch upwards to
release.
F Straightenthecontinuitypanel,thenslide
thelatchdownwardstolockit.
F Ifnecessary,straightenthecontinuity
panels for the seats in the 2
nd
rowandlock
theminplace.
F Raisethebackrestandpushitrearwards
untilitlocksinposition
Each seat has a continuity panel at the bottom
ofthebackrest,thatonceunfolded:
- provides a continuous load surface in the
boot, whatever the position of the seats,
- avoidsobjectsslidingundertheseatsin
the 2
nd
row.
background
86
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Access to the third-row
seats
Access to the third-row seats is via the outer
second-rowseats.
F Pull the lever E.Theseatisreleasedand
theseatcushioncomesupagainstthe
backrest.
F Hold the lever E in the raised position,
pushingforwards.Thewholeseatslides
towardsthefrontseat.
Space becomes free behind the seat, the
third-rowpassengerscangettotheirseats.
Leaving the vehicle from
the third-row seats
Repositioning a seat, from
the outside, with the door
open
In the event of a failure of this system
(lever E),thepassengersinthethird
row can also leave the vehicle after first
foldingthebackrestsofthesecond-row
seatsusingthestrapD.
Do not allow children to operate the
seatswithoutsupervision.
F Lift the lever E.Theseatisreleasedand
theseatcushioncomesupagainstthe
backrest.
F Pushtheseatbackrest,stillholdingthe
lever Eintheraisedposition.
Iftherearepassengersseatedinthethirdrow:
F manually return the assembly as far
aspossiblerearwards;theseatdoes
notreturntothefullybackposition,so
astoretainlegroomforthethird-row
passengers,
F foldtheseatcushionuntilitlocks.
Ensurethatthereisnoobjectonorunderthe
seatthatyouwanttomove.
Beforeoperatingtheseats,ensurethat
thetablesonthebackofthefirst-row
seatsarefoldedaway.
background
87
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Third-row seats
Concertina boards
Folding the concertina boards
F Removetheluggagenet.
 Formoreinformationontheluggagenet
and the Interior fittings, refer to the
correspondingsection.
F Return the second-row continuity panels to
theirinitialpositionandlocktheminplace.
F Fold the concertina boards and position
themvertically.
F Pull on the strap F located behind the seat
backrest.Thebackrestpivotsrearwards,
pullingtheseatbasewithit.Theseatlocks
intheopenposition.
Each of the two floor panels can
supportaloadof100kg.
Pullonthecontrol,the3sectionsoftheboard
willfoldlikeaconcertina.
Whenthethird-rowseatsareupright,these
concertinaboardscanbelefteither:
- flat behind the seats,
- in the vertical position,
therebyleavingastorageareaavailable.
Repositioning the
seats
Tworigidconcertinaboards,whichcannot
be separated from the vehicle, cover the
2 third-row seats, when these are in the folded
position.
background
88
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
F Return the second-row continuity panels to
theirinitialpositionandlockthem.
F Lowertheheadrestraints.
F Correctly position the concertina board
verticallybehindtheseat.
F Checkthattheseatbeltsforthe3
rd
row
seatsarecorrectlyfixedtotheloopsand
arenotfolded.
F Pull the strap G, located at the bottom of
theseatbackrest.Theseatunlocks.
Beforemovingthethird-rowseats,
returntherigidfloorplatesofthe
second-rowseatstotheuprightposition
andlocktheminplace.
Do not try to fold a third-row seat that
hasnotfirsthadthebackrestfully
lockedinplace.
Donotleaveobjectseitheronor
underneath the seat bases of the third-
rowseatswhenyouarefoldingthem.
Do not leave your hand on the control G
asyoufoldtheseats,asyourisk
trappingyourfingers.
Do not allow children to operate the
seatswithoutsupervision.
F Nextpushthebackrestgentlyforwards.
Thebackrestpivots,foldingontotheseat
base.Theseatbasethenfoldsintothe
stowageareaprovidedforthatpurpose.
F Reposition the concertina boards over the
foldedseats.
Folding the seats
background
89
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Seatmodularityandcongurations
Examples of configurations
5 seats
4 seats
3 seats
Maximum loadspace
background
90
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Examples of seat configurations
7 seats
6 seats
Maximum loadspace
5 seats
4 seats
For easy modification of your
interior vehicle space, all the rear seats
canbeindividuallyfolded:ontothe
second-row floor, and under the third-
rowfloor.Youcanthenhaveaload
floor that is continuous up to the front
seatbackrests.
The seats must only be folded and
unfoldedwiththevehiclestationary.
background
91
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Steeringwheeladjustment
F When stationary, pull the control lever to
releasetheadjustmentmechanism.
F Adjusttheheightandreachtosuityour
drivingposition.
F Pushthecontrollevertolockthe
adjustmentmechanism.
As a safety measure, these operations
should only be carried out with the
vehiclestationary.
background
92
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Ventilation
Air intake
Theaircirculatinginthepassenger
compartmentisfilteredandoriginateseither
fromtheoutsideviathegrillelocatedatthe
base of the windscreen or from the inside in air
recirculationmode.
Air treatment
Theincomingairfollowsvariousroutes
dependingonthecontrolsselectedbythe
driver:
- directarrivalinthepassenger
compartment(airintake),
- passagethroughaheatingcircuit(heating),
- passagethroughacoolingcircuit(air
conditioning).
Control panel
The controls of this system are accessible in
the Air conditioning menu of the touch screen
tablet A.
Thedemisting/defrostingcontrolsforthe
windscreen and rear screen are located on the
leftofthetouchscreentablet.
1. Windscreendemisting-defrostingvents.
2. Frontquarterlightdemisting-defrosting
vents.
3. Frontsidewindowdemisting-defrosting
vents.
Adjustablesideairvents.
4. Centraladjustableairvents.
5. Airoutletsforthefrontfootwells.
6. Side vents for the 2
nd
row.
7. Air outlets for 2
nd
rowfootwells.
8. Sunshinesensor.
Air distribution
background
93
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance
guidelinesbelow:
F Toobtainanevenairdistribution,takecarenottoobstructtheexteriorairintakegrilles
located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well
astheairextractorlocatedintheboot.
F Donotcoverthesunshinesensor,locatedonthedashboard;thisisusedforregulation
oftheairconditioningsystem.
F Operatetheairconditioningsystemforatleast5to10minutes,onceortwiceamonth
tokeepitinperfectworkingorder.
F Ensurethatthepassengercompartmentfilterisingoodconditionandhavethefilter
elementsreplacedregularly.
Werecommendtheuseofacombinedpassengercompartmentfilter.Thankstoits
special active additive, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the
occupantsandthecleanlinessofthepassengercompartment(reductionofallergic
symptoms,badodoursandgreasydeposits).
F Toensurecorrectoperationoftheairconditioningsystem,youarealsoadvisedtohave
itcheckedregularlyasrecommendedinthemaintenanceandwarrantyguide.
F If the system does not produce cold air, switch it off and contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshop.
Recommendationsforventilationandairconditioning
Ifafteranextendedstopinsunshine,
theinteriortemperatureisveryhigh,first
ventilatethepassengercompartmentfor
afewmoments.
Puttheairflowcontrolatasettinghigh
enoughtoquicklychangetheairinthe
passengercompartment.
Theairconditioningsystemdoesnot
contain chlorine and does not present
anydangertotheozonelayer.
The condensation created by the air
conditioningresultsinadischarge
of water under the vehicle which is
perfectlynormal.
Whentowingthemaximumloadonasteepgradientinhightemperatures,switchingoffthe
airconditioningincreasestheavailableenginepowerandsoimprovesthetowingability.
Stop & Start
Theheatingandairconditioning
systemsonlyworkwhentheengineis
running.
To maintain a comfortable temperature
inthepassengercompartment,youcan
temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start
system.
For more information on Stop & Start,
refertothecorrespondingsection.
background
94
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Heating
Temperature adjustment
F Press one of the arrows, or move
the cursor from blue (cold) to red
(hot)toadjustthetemperatureto
yourwishes.
Air flow adjustment
F Press one of these buttons to
increase or decrease the speed
oftheboosterfan.
Air distribution adjustment
Therecirculationofinteriorairpreventsexterior
odoursandsmokeenteringthepassenger
compartment.
This function also allows the air in the
passengercompartmenttobeheatedorcooled
morequickly.
Windscreen.
Centreandsidevents.
Footwells.
Theairdistributioncanbevariedbyusing
morethanonebutton:illuminationofthe
button indicates that air is distributed in that
direction;noilluminationindicatesthatairisnot
distributedinthatdirection.
Pressingallthreebuttonsgivesaneven
distributioninthepassengercompartment.
Air intake / Air recirculation
F Press this button to select the
exteriorairintakemodetothe
passengercompartment.
Avoiddrivingfortoolongwithout
ventilation(riskofmistingand
deteriorationofairquality).
Theheatingsystemworksonlywhenthe
engineisrunning.
Press the button for the Air conditioning
menutodisplaythepageforthesystem
controls.
Thesymbolforairflow(afan)fillsprogressively
accordingtotheairflowsettingmade.
Byreducingtheairflowtotheminimum,you
arestoppingventilationofthepassenger
compartment.
Theairdistributioninthepassenger
compartmentcanbeadjustedbycombiningthe
useofseveralvents.
Whentheindicatorlampisoff,airistakenfrom
outsidethevehicle.Whentheindicatorlampis
on,theairinsidethepassengercompartment
isrecirculatedandtheintakeofairfromoutside
thevehicleisinhibited.
background
95
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Dual-zonemanualairconditioningwithtemperatureregulation
Theairconditioningsystemonlyworkswiththe
enginerunning.
The temperature at the nozzles and vents
isregulatedbythesystemaccordingtothe
temperatureinthepassengercompartment
andthetemperaturesetting.
Press the button for the Air conditioning
menutodisplaythesystemcontrolspage.
Temperature adjustment
F Press one of these buttons
to reduce (blue) or increase
(red)thevalue.
Air flow adjustment
Press one of these buttons to
increase or decrease the speed of
theairboosterfan.
Thedriverandfrontpassengercaneachadjust
thetemperatureindependently.
The value indicated corresponds to a level of
comfortandnottoatemperatureindegreesCelsius
orFahrenheit(dependingontheunitselected).
Asettingofaround21providesoptimumcomfort.
Dependingonyourrequirements,asettingbetween
18and24isnormal.
In addition, it is recommended that a difference
betweenleftandrightofmorethan3shouldbe
avoided.
Theairflowsymbol(afan)fillsprogressively
accordingtothequantityofairwanted.
Byreducingtheairflowtominimum,youare
stoppingventilation.
Avoiddrivingfortoolongwithout
ventilation(riskofmistingand
deteriorationofairquality).
background
96
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Air intake / Air recirculation
Theintakeofexteriorairpreventstheformation
ofmistonthewindscreenandsidewindows.
The recirculation of interior air isolates the
passengercompartmentfromexteriorodours
andsmoke.
F Press the button to choose
howairentersthepassenger
compartment.
Air conditioning On / Off
Switching on
Switching off
Theairconditioningdoesnotoperate
whentheairflowadjustmentisset
tooff.
F Press this button to activate the
airconditioningsystem.
Avoiddrivingfortoolongwithout
recirculationofinteriorair(riskof
mistinganddeteriorationofairquality).
This function allows hot or cold air to be
deliveredselectivelyandmorequickly.
Theairconditioningisdesignedtooperate
effectivelyinallseasons,withthewindowsclosed.
Itenablesyouto:
- lower the temperature, in summer,
- increasetheeffectivenessofthedemistingin
winter,above3°C.
F Pressthisbuttonagainto
deactivatetheairconditioning
system.
Air distribution
adjustment
Thesebuttonsareusedtoarrange
thedistributionofairinthepassenger
compartmentbycombiningseveralairoutlets.
Windscreen.
Theairdistributioncanbeadaptedbyusing
severalbuttons:illuminationofthebutton
confirms the presence of fan boosted air in the
direction indicated, the button illumination off
indicates the absence of fan boosted air in the
directionindicated.
For a uniform distribution of air in the
passengercompartment,thethreebuttonscan
beusedsimultaneously.
Footwells.
Centralandsidevents.
Whentheindicatorlampisoff,airistakenfrom
outsidethevehicle.Whentheindicatorlampis
on, air is recirculated from inside the vehicle,
theintakeforairoutsidethevehicleisinhibited.
When the indicator lamp is on, the air
conditioningfunctionisactivated.
When the indicator lamp is off, the air
conditioningfunctionisdeactivated.
background
97
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Dual-zoneautomaticairconditioning
Thisairconditioningsystemoperateswith
theenginerunning,buttheventilationandits
controlsareavailablewiththeignitionon.
Operationoftheairconditioningandregulation
of temperature, air flow and air distribution in
thepassengercompartmentareautomatic.
Temperature adjustment
1. Driver/passengersidetemperature
adjustment.
2. Airdistributionadjustment.
3. Airflowadjustment.
4. Airintake/airrecirculation.
5. AirconditioningOn/Off.
6. Automaticmode.
7. Accesstothesecondarypage.
Thedriverandfrontpassengercaneachset
thetemperatureindependently.
F Press one of these buttons
to increase or decrease the
value.
The value indicated corresponds to a level of
comfortandnottoaprecisetemperature.
Itisrecommendedthatyouavoidaleft/right
settingdifferenceofmorethan3.
Press the button for the Air conditioning
menu to display the controls for the air
conditioningsystem.
Air flow adjustment
Avoiddrivingfortoolongwiththe
ventilationoff(riskofmistingand
deteriorationofairquality).
F Press one of these buttons to
increase or decrease the speed
oftheboosterfan.
The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in
progressivelyinrelationtothequantityofair
wanted.
Byreducingtheairflowtominimum,youare
stoppingventilation.
"- - -"isdisplayed.
background
98
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Theairdistributioninthepassenger
compartmentcanbeadjustedbycombiningthe
useofseveralvents.
Air distribution adjustment
Windscreen.
Footwells.
Centreandsidevents.
Theairdistributioncanbevariedbyusing
morethanonebutton:illuminationofthe
button indicates that air is distributed in that
direction;noilluminationindicatesthatairisnot
distributedinthatdirection.
InAUTOmode,allthreebuttonsareoff.
Switching off
Switching on
Air conditioning On/Off
Theairconditioningisdesignedtooperate
efficiently in all seasons, with the windows
closed.
Itallowsyou:
- in summer, to lower the temperature,
- inwinter,above3°C,toimprovedemisting.
Avoidprolongedoperationoftheair
recirculationfunction(riskofmisting
andofdeteriorationoftheairquality).
Whentheindicatorlampisoff,theintakeof
exteriorairisactive.
When the indicator lamp is on, air recirculation
isactivated,theintakeofexteriorairis
inhibited.
F Press this button to choose
the mode for air entry to the
passengercompartment.
Theintakeofexteriorairavoidsmistingofthe
windscreenandsidewindows.
Airrecirculationpreventsexteriorodours
andsmokefromenteringthepassenger
compartment.
Thisfunctionalsoallowsfasterheating
orcoolingoftheairinthepassenger
compartment.
Air intake/Air recirculation
F Pressthisbuttonagaintoswitch
offtheairconditioning.
When the indicator lamp is off, the air
conditioningsystemisoff.
F Press this button to switch on the
airconditioning.
When the indicator lamp is on, the air
conditioningsystemison.
Theairconditioningcannotoperatewhenthe
airflowissettooff.
background
99
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Incoldweatherwiththeenginecold,
theairflowisincreasedgraduallyuntil
the system has warmed up, in order
to limit the delivery of cold air into the
passengercompartment.
Onenteringthevehicle,iftheinterior
temperature is much colder or warmer
thanthecomfortvaluesetting,there
is no need to alter the value displayed
inordertoreachmorequicklythe
requiredlevelofcomfort.Thesystem
compensates automatically and
corrects the temperature difference as
quicklyaspossible.
ThissettingisassociatedwithAUTOmode
only.However,ondeactivationofAUTOmode,
thelastsettingremainson.
ChangingthesettingdoesnotreactivateAUTO
modeifdeactivated.
When the indicator lamp in the button is on, the
airconditioningsystemoperatesautomatically:
thesystemmanagesthetemperature,air
flowandairdistributioninthepassenger
compartmentinanoptimumwayaccordingto
thecomfortlevelyouhaveselected.
Youcanalwayschoosetomodifyasetting
manually.Inthiscasetheindicatorlampinthe
buttonisoff.
F Pressthisbuttonagaintoactivatethe
automaticcomfortprogrammeagain.
F Press this button to activate or
deactivate the automatic mode of
theairconditioningsystem.
Automatic comfort
programme
Tochangethecurrentsetting,pressthebutton
todisplaythedifferentmodesinturn:
"SOFT":providessoftandquietoperationby
limitingairflow.
"NORMAL":offersthebestcompromise
between a comfortable temperature and quiet
operation(defaultsetting).
"FAST":providesstrongandeffectiveairflow.
It is possible to modulate the intensity of the
automaticcomfortprogrammebychoosingone
ofthreemodesettingsofferedinasecondary
pageoftheAir conditioningmenu.
F Pressthisbuttontogotothe
secondarypage.
background
100
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
"Rear" function
F Pressthisbuttontoactivate/
deactivatethe"Rear"function.
FromthesecondarypageoftheAir
conditioningmenu:
Thisfunctiongivesrearpassengersaccessto
theadjustmentcontrolsandallows.
- the distribution of air conditioned air to the
vents for the 2
nd
row of seats,
- the distribution of ambient air to the vents
forthe3
rd
rowofseats.
F Turn the upper wheel to open or close the
rearvent.
F Turnthelowerknobtoreduce(totheleft)
orincrease(totheright)theairflow.
Settings for passengers in
the 2
nd
row of seats
"Mono" function
Thecomfortsettingforthepassenger'sside
canbeindexedtothedriver'scomfortsetting
(mono-zone).
FromthesecondarypageoftheAir
conditioningmenu:
F Pressthisbuttontoactivate/
deactivatethe"Mono"function.
The function is deactivated automatically when
thepassengerusestheirtemperaturesetting
buttons.
background
101
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Settings for
passengers in
the 3
rd
row of seats
F Presstheventcover.
F Adjusttheflowofairtothetwoventsusing
the four-position wheel (off, low, medium,
high).
F Directtheventbyturningthecover.
Ventilation with ignition on
function
Withtheignitionon,youcanusethe
ventilation system and have access to the Air
conditioningmenutoadjusttheairflowand
airdistributioninthepassengercompartment.
This function is available for a few minutes,
dependingonthestateofchargeofthebattery
ofyourvehicle.
This function does not activate the air
conditioning.
Youcanmakeuseoftheresidualheatinthe
enginetowarmthepassengercompartment
usingthetemperaturesettingbuttons.
background
102
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Front demist -
defrost
F Press this button to demist or
defrost the windscreen and side
windowsasquicklyaspossible.
The indicator lamp in the button
comeson.
WithStop&Start,whendemistinghas
been activated, the STOP mode is not
available.
Thesystemautomaticallymanagestheair
conditioning(dependingonversion),air
flowandairintake,andprovidesoptimum
distribution towards the windscreen and side
windows.
F Toswitchitoffpressthisbuttonagainor
adjustthesettingforairflowordistribution.
Theindicatorlampgoesoff.
Rear screen demist -
defrost
Switching on
Switching off
F Pressthisbuttontodemist/
defrost the rear screen and
(dependingonversion)thedoor
mirrors.
Thedemisting/defrostingswitchesoffautomatically
topreventanexcessiveconsumptionofcurrent.
The rear screen demist - defrost
canonlyoperatewhentheengineis
running.
Switchofftheheatingoftherearscreen
anddoormirrorsassoonasyoujudgeit
possible,asreducingtheconsumption
of electrical current reduces fuel
consumption.
F It is possible to stop the
demisting/defrostingoperation
before it is switched off
automaticallybypressingthe
buttonagain.
The indicator lamp associated with the button
goesoff.
Theindicatorlampassociatedwiththebuttoncomeson.
background
103
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Scented air freshener
Allowsafragrancetobedistributedinthepassengercompartmentviathecentralairvents.
F Rotate the button Atoadjust(totheleft
toreduce,totherighttoincrease)or
stop(maximumtotheleft)theflowof
scentedair.
Thecentralairventshavetobeopen.
F Press the button A,rotatingitaquarter
turntotheleftasfarasitwillgo.
F Remove the air freshener from the
dashboard.
F Replacethecartridge(see"Replacinga
cartridge").
To remove the air freshener
Adjustment of flow
Afterfittingorchangingacartridge:
F placetheairfreshenerbackinitshousing.
F rotateitaquarterturntotheright.
To insert the air freshener
Acartridgelastsonaverage3months,
basedononehour’susageperday.
The air freshener contains an empty
cartridgewhenyourvehicleis
delivered.Youthereforeneedtoinsert
acartridgeinordertousetheair
freshener.
background
104
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Therechargefortheairfreshenerconsistsofa
cartridgeB and its sealed container C.
F Remove the protective film D.
F PlacetheheadofthecartridgeB on the
button Aoftheairfreshener.
F Rotateitaquarterturntolockitonthe
buttonandremovethecontainer.
F Inserttheairfreshenerintoitshousing.
Youcanchangecartridgesatanytime,keeping
theusedcartridgesintheiroriginalcontainers.
Replacing a cartridge
The air freshener button A is independent of
thecartridge.Cartridgesaresuppliedwithout
the air freshener button A.
The button of the air freshener A can only be
fitted to the centre of the dashboard with a
cartridgeattached.
Thereforealwayskeeptheairfreshener
button Aandonecartridge.
Replacementcartridgesareavailable,
dependingoncountry,eitherontheInternet
site or from a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Locationsareprovidedinthegloveboxfor
storingcartridgesandcontainers.
Air freshener button
Forsafety,useonlycartridgesthatare
providedforthispurpose.
Retainthecontainersforstoringused
cartridges.
Donotrechargeordismantlethe
cartridges.
Keep them out of reach of children and
animals.
Avoidallcontactwiththeskinandwith
theeyes.
Intheeventofingestion,consulta
doctor and show them the product
packagingorlabel.
Donotinstallorremoveacartridge
whileyouaredriving.
background
105
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Frontttings
1. Sunvisor.
2. Cardholder.
3. Glovebox.
4. Centralstorage.
Itcontainsthepowerandaudiosockets.
5. Raisedconsolewithclosedstorage,low
consoleorremovableconsole.
6. Cupholder.
7. Doorpockets.
8. Storagebelowthesteeringwheel.
(Handbookpack).
background
106
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Slidingsunvisor
Slidingblindsareprovidedforyourprotection
againstbrightsunlight.Theycanbeadjusted
manually.
F Slide the blind to the desired position by
pushingatA.
Sun visor rails
Glovebox
Dependingonequipment,itmaycontainaCD
player.
F Toopentheglovebox,raisethehandle.
Itisilluminatedwhenthelidisopened.
It is cooled by a manual directional ventilation
nozzle.
Itisconnecteddirectlytoyourvehicle'sair
conditioningsystemandissuppliedwithcool
airwhateverthetemperaturesettingforthe
passengercompartment.
Therefrigerationofyourgloveboxoperates
onlywiththeenginerunningandtheair
conditioningon.
Theblindsareextendedonthesunvisorrails.
Foldthevisordownwards,toprotectagainst
dazzletotheface.
Ifdazzleiscomingfromthesidewindows,
detachthevisorfromitshousingabovethe
centreofthewindscreenandpivotittotheside.
Thevisorsarefittedwithalockingsystemon
theircentralhousingwhentheblindisreeled
in.Todetachthevisorortorepositionit,itmust
beinaverticalposition.
Sliding blinds
Donotattachorsuspendheavyobjects
onthesliderailofthesunblind.
background
107
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Removable console
Theremovableconsoleisaportablestoragespacesecuredtothelowercentreconsole.
Ithasaslidinglid,anopenstoragespaceandtwocupholders.
F Raisethelockingcontrollocatedatthe
frontoftheconsole.
F With one hand, lift the front part of the
console.
F Withtheotherhand,grasptherearpartto
releasetheremovableconsole.
F Carry out these operations in reverse
order.Ensurethattheconsolehaslocked
intoplace.
Whennotfixedtoitscarrier,the
removable console should be stowed
intheboot.Itcouldbecomeaprojectile
in the event of a sudden stop or violent
impact.
Releasing the removable
console
Refitting the removable
console
background
108
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Centralstoragecompartment
F Toopenthecentralstoragecompartment,
pullthegripandlowerthecover.
Itisilluminatedonopening.
Abuttonontheupperpartallowsthelightingto
bedeactivated.
230 V / 50 Hz power socket
A230V/50Hzsocket(maximumpower:120W)
isfittedinthecentralstoragebox.
Tousethesocket:
F openthecentralstoragebox,
F checkthatthewarninglampisongreen,
F connect your multimedia or other electrical
device(telephonecharger,laptop
computer, CD-DVD player, baby food
warmer...).
Thissocketworkswiththeenginerunning,as
wellasinSTOPmodewithStop&Start.
Dependingonequipment,itmaycontain:
- one230Vsocket,
- one12Vsocket,
- one USB port,
- oneauxiliarysocket
Intheeventofafaultwiththesocket,thegreen
warninglampflashes.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Connect only one device at a time to
thesocket(noextensionormulti-way
connector).
Connect only devices with class II
insulation(shownonthedevice).
As a safety measure, when electrical
consumptionishighandwhenrequired
bythevehicle'selectricalsystem
(particular weather conditions, electrical
overload...),thecurrentsupplytothe
socketwillbecutoff;thegreenwarning
lampgoesoff.
background
109
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
When the USB port is used, the
portabledevicechargesautomatically.
Amessageisdisplayedifthepower
consumption of the portable device
exceedsthecurrentsuppliedbythe
vehicle.
12 V socket
Theauxiliarysocketislocatedinthecentral
storagebox.
It permits the connection of a portable device,
suchasadigitalaudioplayeroftheiPod
®
type,
tolistentoyourmusicfilesusingthevehicle's
speakers.
Themanagementofthefilesisdoneusingyour
portabledevice.
TheUSBportislocatedinthecentralstorage
compartment.
It allows the connection of a portable device or
aUSBmemorystick.
It plays the audio files transmitted to your audio
systemandheardviathevehicle'sspeakers.
Youcanmanagethesefilesusingthesteering
mountedortouchscreentabletcontrols.
Auxiliary socket USB port
For more information on the use of this
equipment, refer to the "Audio and telematics"
supplement.
F Toconnecta12Vaccessory(maximum
power:120Watts),liftthecoverand
connectasuitableadaptor.
Donotexceedthemaximumpower
ratingofthesocket(otherwisethereisa
riskofdamagingyourportabledevice).
The connection of an electrical device
not approved by CITROËN, such as a
USBcharger,mayadverselyaffectthe
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causingfaultssuchaspoortelephone
reception or interference with displays
inthescreens.
background
110
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Toremovethematonthedriver'sside:
F movetheseatasfarbackaspossible,
F unclipthefixings,
F removethemat.
Mats
Whenfittingthematforthefirsttime,onthe
driver'ssideuseonlythefixingsprovidedinthe
walletattached.
The other mats are simply placed on the
carpet.
Toavoidanyriskofjammingofthe
pedals:
- only use mats which are suited to
thefixingsalreadypresentinthe
vehicle;thesefixingsmustbeused,
- neverfitonematontopofanother.
The use of mats not approved by
CITROËN may interfere with access to
the pedals and hinder the operation of
thecruisecontrol/speedlimiter.
The mats approved by CITROËN have
twofixingslocatedbelowtheseat.
Torefitthematonthedriver'sside:
F position the mat correctly,
F refitthefixingsbypressing,
F checkthatthematissecuredcorrectly.
Fitting Removal
Retting
Storageboxes
F Raisethegripandlowerthestoragebox
cover.
Opening
Donotplaceheavyobjectsinthe
boxes.
Dependingonequipment,storageboxesare
locatedunderthefrontseats.
background
111
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Storagebelow
thesteeringwheel
Thisstoragecompartmentbelowthesteering
wheelisintendedforstowingyourvehicle's
handbookpack.
Rearttings
Aircraft-style rear tables
Thesetables,fittedtothebacksofthefront
seats, incorporate a cup-holder recess A and a
retainingstrapB.
F Pullthetabledownwardstoopen.
F To stow the table, raise it until the latch
locks.
For safety reasons, these tables collapse
downwardsifexcessivepressureisexertedon
them.
ReadinglampsC may be fitted in the front seat
backrests,behindthetables.Theyilluminate
thesurfaceofthetableswithoutdisturbingthe
otherpassengers.
Theycanbeusedonlywhilethetableisdown.
F Pressthe"on/off"buttontoturnthelamp
onoroff.
Individual reading lamps
Rear table stowed
Rear table opened
background
112
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Side blinds Storage wells
Therearetwostoragewellsundertherear
passengers'feet.
Toopenthem,liftthecoveratthecut-out.
Fitted to the windows for the 2
nd
row seats, they protect
thepassengercompartmentfromthesun'srays.
F Pull the tab A and anchor the blind on the
hookB.
12 V socket
F Toconnecta12Vaccessory(maximum
power:120Watts),liftthecoverand
connectasuitableadaptor.
Donotexceedthemaximumpower
ratingofthesocket(otherwisethereisa
riskofdamagingyourportabledevice).
The connection of an electrical device
not approved by CITROËN, such as a
USBcharger,mayadverselyaffectthe
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causingfaultssuchaspoortelephone
reception or interference with displays
inthescreens.
background
113
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Rear multimedia
Thismultimediasystemallowsrearpassengers
toconnectoneortwoexternalportable
systems(audioorvideoplayer,games
consoles,DVDplayer...).Thesoundisplayed
throughtwoBluetooth
®
wireless headphone
sets, while the video content is displayed in
two7-inchscreensbuiltintothebacksofthe
frontseatheadrestraints.
Description
This system operates only with the
enginerunning.
Thepackincludes:
- the connection and control panel fitted on
the rear face of the centre console,
- two 7-inch screens built into the front head
restraints (with protective covers),
- twowirelessBluetoothtechnology
headphonesetswithrechargeable
batteries,
- a12Vchargerwithtwooutletsallowingthe
simultaneouschargingoftwoheadphones.
1. Power switch
2. AV1videoinput(yellowRCAsocket)
3. Stereo audio input A (red and white
RCAsockets)
4. AV2videoinput(yellowRCAsocket)
5. Stereo audio input B (red and white
RCAsockets)
6. Selection of display in the left-hand screen
(AV1 or AV2)
7. Selectionofdisplayintheright-hand
screen (AV1 or AV2)
8. Connection indicator lamps for the
Bluetooth audio headphones (blue)
background
114
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
1. Screen power switch
2. Displayadjustmentbuttons
Each headphone set has a switch,
a connection indicator lamp (blue)
andachannelselector(AorB).
F Withtheenginerunning,connectyour
portable system to the RCA connectors
(e.g.withAV1ontheleft).
F Press the switch on the control panel, the
indicator lamp comes on and
theAV1indicatorlampscomeon.
F Makealongpressontheswitch,its
indicatorlampflashesinblue.
F Makealongpressonthecontrolpanel
switch,thepairingwiththeheadphoneset
is complete when the blue indicator lamps
on the headphones and on the system are
oncontinuously.
F Repeat the operation for the other
headphoneset.
F Press the screen switch if you have a video
source.
F Startplayingyourportablesystem.
Operation
The Multimedia system allows the
connection of a third Bluetooth
headphoneset,notsupplied.
If your seat is in the table position,
positionacovertoavoiddamagingthe
screen.
These covers also conceal each
screen.
F It is possible at any time to modify the
sourceforthevideodisplay(usingbutton6
or 7onthecontrolpanel:theindicatorlamp
for the source selected comes on) as well
astheaudiochannel(usingtheselectoron
theheadphones).
background
115
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Bootttings
1. Rear parcel shelf
(seedetailsonafollowingpage)
2. Hooks
(seedetailsonafollowingpage)
3. Torch
(seedetailsonafollowingpage)
4. Storagenet
5. Lashingeyes
6. 12Vsocket(maximumpower:120Watts)
background
116
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Toremovetheshelf:
F unhookthetwocords,
F raisetheshelfslightly,thenremoveit.
Rear parcel shelf
Thereareseveraloptionsforstoringtheshelf:
- eitheruprightbehindthefrontseats,
- orflatatthebaseoftheboot.
Thehookscanbeusedtosecureshopping
bags.
Hooks
background
117
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Bootttings
1. Luggagecoverblind
(seedetailsonafollowingpage)
2. Torch
(seedetailsonafollowingpage)
3. Concertina boards
4. 12Vsocket(maximumpower:120Watts)
5. Armrestwithcupholderandstoragespace
6. Locationforstowingtheluggagecover
blind
7. Openstorage
8. Lowerlashingeyes
background
118
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Luggagecoverroller
Inthe5-seatconfiguration,itisinstalledbehind
the second-row seats, with the third-row seats
foldedaway.
Inthe7-seatconfiguration,itisstowedbehind
thethirdrowseats.
Installation
F Positiontheleftandrighthandendsofthe
roller in cut-out A, with the mobile flap at
thefront.
F Pull out the blind until it reaches the boot
pillars.
F Inserttheguidesoftheblindintotherails
on the pillars B.
Removal
F Disengagetherollerguidesfromtherails
in the pillars B.
F Guidetheblindasitisreeledin.
F Unlocktherollerbypressingoneof
thegripslocatedattheendsofthereel
support.
Themobileflapallowspassengersin
the second row to place their seats in
the"comfort"position.
background
119
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Stowing behind the 3
rd
row seats
Tofoldthe3
rd
row seats with the roller
stowed at the rear, it is necessary to raise the
concertina boards in order to allow access to
theseatlockingcontrols(redstraps).
F Ensurethatthe3
rd
rowseatsarefolded.
F Foldthefirsttwoconcertinaboards.
F Install the roller in the space above the arm
rest,onesideaftertheother,incliningit
slightly.
F Slidetherollerasfarasitwillgo,uptothe
cut-outsprovidedatthebackoftheboot,
withthetwoflapsdirecteddownwards.
F Unfoldthethirdrowseats.
The folded concertina boards can be
positionedhorizontallyorvertically.
background
120
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Torch
This is a removable lamp, fitted in the side of
the boot, which can be used to illuminate the
bootorasatorch.
Operation
This torch operates with NiMH type
rechargeablebatteries.
Ithasabatterylifeofapproximately45minutes
andchargeswhileyouaredriving.
Use
F Extractthetorchfromitslocationbypulling
itfromthefront.
F Presstheswitch,locatedontheback,to
switchthetorchonoroff.
F Unfoldthesupport,locatedontheback,to
setdownandraisethetorch;forexample,
whenchangingawheel.
Storing
F Putthetorchbackinplaceinitslocation
startingwiththerear.
Ifyouhaveforgottentoswitchoffthetorch,
thisswitchesitoffautomatically.
Ifthetorchisnotengagedcorrectly,it
maynotchargeandmaynotcomeon
whenthebootisopened.
Observethepolaritieswhenfittingthe
batteries.
Neverreplacetherechargeable
batterieswithsingle-usebatteries.
background
121
3
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Courtesy lamps
1. Front courtesy lamp
2. Frontmapreadinglamps
3. Rear courtesy lamp
4. Rearmapreadinglamps
Front - rear courtesy lamps
F Withtheignitionon,pressthe
correspondingswitch.
Front - rear map reading
lamps
Withthe"permanentlighting"mode,
thelightingtimevariesaccordingtothe
circumstances:
- withtheignitionoff,approximately
ten minutes,
- inenergyeconomymode,
approximatelythirtyseconds,
- withtheenginerunning,unlimited.
In this position, the courtesy lamp
comesongradually:
Permanentlyoff.
Permanentlighting.
- whenthevehicleisunlocked,
- whentheelectronickeyisremovedfrom
the reader,
- whenopeningadoor,
- whentheremotecontrollockingbuttonis
used,inordertolocateyourvehicle.
Illumination of the door mirror spot lamps is
only possible if the courtesy lamp is in this
position.
Itswitchesoffgradually:
- whenthevehicleislocked,
- whentheignitionisswitchedon,
- 30secondsafterthelastdoorisclosed.
Takecaretoavoidleavinganythingin
contactwiththecourtesylamps.
background
122
Ease of use and comfort
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap03_ergonomie-confort_ed01-2016
Interior mood
lighting
Thedimmedpassengercompartmentlighting
improvesvisibilityinthevehiclewhenthelight
ispoor.
Theinteriormoodlightingcanbeactivatedor
deactivated in the Drivingmenu,byselecting
the "Settings" tab, then "Comfort" and "Mood
lighting".
Thesoftlightingprovidedbythefootwelllamps
improvesvisibilityinthevehiclewhenthelight
ispoor.
Atnight,theilluminationofthedashboard,
centre console and courtesy lamp comes on
automatically when the sidelamps are switched
on.
Theinteriormoodlightingswitchesoff
automatically when the sidelamps are
switchedoff.
Switching on
Footwelllighting
Switching on
Its operation is identical to that of the courtesy
lamps.Thelampscomeonwhenoneofthe
doorsisopened.
background
123
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Drivingrecommendations
Observethedrivingregulationsandremain
vigilantwhateverthetrafficconditions.
Paycloseattentiontothetrafficandkeepyour
hands on the wheel so that you are ready to
reactatanytimetoanyeventuality.
Onalongjourney,abreakeverytwohoursis
stronglyrecommended.
In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate
theneedtobrakeandincreasethedistance
fromothervehicles.
Driving on flooded roads
Westronglyadviseagainstdrivingonflooded
roads,asthiscouldcauseseriousdamage
totheengineorgearbox,aswellastothe
electricalsystemsofyourvehicle.
Ifyouareobligedtodrivethroughwater:
- checkthatthedepthofwaterdoesnot
exceed15cm,takingaccountofwaves
thatmightbegeneratedbyotherusers,
- deactivate the Stop & Start system,
- drive as slowly as possible without
stalling.Inallcases,donotexceed6mph
(10km/h),
- do not stop and do not switch off the
engine.
Onleavingthefloodedroad,assoonas
circumstancesallow,makeseverallightbrake
applicationstodrythebrakediscsandpads.
If in doubt on the state of your vehicle, contact
aCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Important!
Neverdrivewiththeparkingbrake
applied-Riskofoverheatingand
damagetothebrakingsystem!
Riskoffire!
Astheexhaustsystemofyourvehicle
is very hot, even several minutes after
switchingofftheengine,donotpark
orruntheengineoverareaswhere
inflammable substances and materials
arepresent:grass,leaves,etc...
Never leave a vehicle unsupervised
withtheenginerunning.Ifyouhave
toleaveyourvehiclewiththeengine
running,applytheparkingbrake
andputthegearboxintoneutralor
position N or P,dependingonthetype
ofgearbox.
background
124
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
When towing
Distribution of loads
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
heaviest items are as close as possible to
theaxleandthenoseweightapproachesthe
maximumpermittedwithoutexceedingit.
Air density decreases with altitude, thus
reducingengineperformance.Above
1000metres,themaximumtowedloadmust
be reduced by 10 % for every 1 000 metres of
altitude.
Side wind
F Takeintoaccounttheincreasedsensitivity
tosidewind.
For more information on Weights, refer
tothecorrespondingsection.
Therearparkingsensorswillbe
deactivated automatically to avoid the
audiblesignalifagenuineCITROËN
towbarisused.
Cooling
Towingatraileronaslopeincreasesthe
temperatureofthecoolant.
Asthefaniselectricallycontrolled,itscooling
capacityisnotdependentontheenginespeed.
F Tolowertheenginespeed,reduceyour
speed.
Themaximumtowedloadonalongincline
dependsonthegradientandtheambient
temperature.
Inallcases,keepacheckonthecoolant
temperature.
F Ifthewarninglampandthe
STOPwarninglampcomeon,
stop the vehicle and switch off
theengineassoonaspossible.
Braking
Towingatrailerincreasesthebrakingdistance.
Toavoidoverheatingofthebrakes,theuseof
enginebrakingisrecommended.
Tyres
F Checkthetyrepressuresofthetowing
vehicleandofthetrailer,observingthe
recommendedpressures.
Lighting
F Checktheelectricallightingandsignalling
on the trailer and the headlamp beam
heightofyourvehicle.
For more information on Adjusting the
headlamp beam height, refer to the
correspondingsection.
background
125
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Starting-switchingofftheenginewiththeelectronickey
F PlacethegearselectorleveratP or N
forvehicleswithanautomaticgearboxor
neutralwithamanualgearbox.
F Inserttheelectronickeyinthereader.
F Pressthebrakepedalforvehicleswithan
automaticgearbox,orfullydeclutchfor
vehicleswithamanualgearbox.
Starting the engine
For Diesel vehicles, in
temperatures below zero the
enginewillnotstartuntilthe
preheaterwarninglamphas
goneoff.
Ifoneofthestartingconditionsisnot
met,aremindermessageappearsin
theinstrumentpanelscreen.Insome
circumstances, it is necessary to
turnthesteeringwheelslightlywhile
pressingthe"START/STOP"button
toassistunlockingofthesteering;
amessagewarnsyouwhenthisis
needed.
F Briefly press the "START/STOP"
button.
Thesteeringcolumnunlocksand
theenginestartsmoreorless
immediately (see the advice for
Dieselversions).
Ifthiswarninglampcomesonafter
pressing"START/STOP",youshould
holdthebrakeorclutchpedaldown
untilthewarninglampgoesoffand
donotpresstheSTART/STOPbutton
again.
background
126
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Electronic key left in the
reader
Iftheelectronickeyisleftinthereader,
onopeningthedriver'sdooramessage
appearstowarnyou.
Intheeventofanemergencyonly,
theenginecanbeswitchedoff
withoutanyconditions.Todothis,
pressthe"START/STOP"buttonfor
aboutthreeseconds.
Inthiscasethesteeringcolumnlocks
assoonasthevehiclestops.
Emergency stop
F Immobilisethevehicle.
F PlacethegearselectorleveratP or N for
vehicleswithanautomaticgearbox,or
neutralwithamanualgearbox.
Switching off the engine
If the vehicle is not immobilised, the
enginewillnotstop.
F Briefly press the "START/STOP"
button.
Theenginestopsandthe
steeringcolumnlocks.
F Removetheelectronickeyfromthereader.
Switchingofftheengineleadstoaloss
ofbrakingassistance.
background
127
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Starting-switchingofftheenginewithKeylessEntryandStarting
F PlacethegearselectorleveratP or N for
vehicleswithanautomaticgearbox,or
neutralwithamanualgearbox.
F Withtheelectronickeyinsidethevehicle,
pressthebrakepedalforvehicleswithan
automaticgearbox,orfullydeclutchfor
vehicleswithamanualgearbox.
Diesel vehicles
In temperatures below zero the
enginewillnotstartuntilthe
preheaterwarninglamphas
goneoff.
Starting the engine
The presence of the "Keyless Entry and
Starting"electronickeyintherecognitionzone
isessential.
Itisnotnecessarytoplacetheelectronickeyin
theback-upreader.
Iftheelectronickeyisnotdetected,
amessageisdisplayed.Movethe
electronickeyintotherecognitionzone
sothattheenginecanbestarted.
In the event of a problem, see "Key not
detected/Back-upstarting".
F Briefly press the "START/
STOP"buttonwhilemaintaining
pressure on the pedal until the
enginestarts.
Ifoneofthestartingconditionsisnot
met,aremindermessageappearsinthe
instrumentpanelscreen.
In some circumstances, it is necessary
toturnthesteeringwheelslightlywhile
pressingthe"START/STOP" button
toassistunlockingofthesteering;a
messagewarnsyouwhenthisisneeded.
As a safety measure, never leave the
vehiclewhiletheengineisrunning.
Thesteeringcolumnunlocksandtheengine
startsmoreorlessinstantly.
SeetheadvicebelowforDieselversions.
Ifthiswarninglampcomesonafter
pressing"START/STOP", you should
holdthebrakeorclutchpedaldown
untilthewarninglampgoesoffanddo
not press the "START/STOP" button
againbeforetheenginestarts.
background
128
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Key not detected
Back-up starting
Whentheelectronickeyisintherecognition
zoneand,afterpressingthe"START/STOP"
button,theenginedoesnotstart:
F PlacethegearselectoratP or N for
vehicleswithanautomaticgearboxor
neutralforvehicleswithamanualgearbox.
F Inserttheelectronickeyintheback-up
reader.
F Withtheelectronickeyinside
the vehicle, press the "START/
STOP"button.
Theenginestopsandthesteering
columnlocks.
F Immobilisethevehicle.
F PlacethegearselectoratP or N for
vehicleswithanautomaticgearbox,or
neutralwithamanualgearbox.
Switching off the engine
If the vehicle is not immobilised, the
enginewillnotstop.
Do not leave your vehicle with the
electronickeystillinside.
F Pressthebrakepedalonvehicleswithan
automaticgearbox,orfullydeclutchwitha
manualgearbox.
F Pressthe"START/STOP"button.
Theenginestarts.
Switchingofftheengineleadstoaloss
ofbrakingassistance.
background
129
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Whentheelectronickeyisnotdetectedoris
nolongerintherecognitionzone,amessage
appearsintheinstrumentpanelwhenclosinga
doorortryingtoswitchofftheengine.
Emergency switch-off
Intheeventofanemergencyonly,
theenginecanbeswitchedoff
withoutconditions.
Pressthe"START/STOP"buttonfor
about3seconds.
Inthiscasethesteeringcolumnlocksassoon
asthevehiclestops.
F To confirm the instruction to
switchofftheengine,pressthe
"START/STOP"buttonforabout
3seconds.
Back-up switch off
Intheeventofafaultwiththeelectronickey,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
background
130
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Switchingtheignitionon
(withoutstarting)
Withtheignitionon,thesystemgoes
intoenergyeconomymodewhen
necessary to maintain the state of
chargeofthebattery.
Withtheelectronickeyinthereaderorthe
KeylessEntryandStartingkeyinsidethe
vehicle,pressingthe"START/STOP"button,
with no action on the pedals, allows the
ignitiontobeswitchedon.
F Pressthe"START/STOP"button,
the instrument panel comes on
buttheenginedoesnotstart.
F Pressthebuttonagaintoswitchoffthe
ignitionandsoallowthevehicletobe
locked.
Anti-theft protection
Electronic engine immobiliser
Thekeyscontainanelectronicchipwhichhas
asecretcode.Whentheignitionisswitched
on,thiscodemustberecognisedinorderfor
startingtobepossible.
Thiselectronicengineimmobiliserlocksthe
enginemanagementsystemafewminutes
aftertheignitionisswitchedoffandprevents
startingoftheenginebyanyonewhodoesnot
havethekey.
In the event of a malfunction, you are informed
byamessageintheinstrumentpanelscreen.
Inthiscase,yourvehicledoesnotstart;contact
aCITROËNdealerifrequired.
background
131
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Electricparkingbrake
In the event of a battery failure, the
electricparkingbrakenolongerworks.
Asasafetymeasure,iftheparking
brakeisnotapplied,immobilisethe
vehiclebyengagingagear(witha
manualgearbox)orplacingachockat
oneofthewheels.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshop.
Indicator lamp
This indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel and in the control
lever to confirm the application of the
parkingbrake.
The system provides, in automatic operation,
theapplicationoftheparkingbrakeon
switchingofftheengineandreleaseasthe
vehiclemovesoff.
Thedrivercantakeoveratanytimetoapply
orreleasetheparkingbrake,byoperatingthe
controllever:
- by briefly pulling the control lever to apply
thebrake,
- by briefly pushing the control lever, while
pressingthefootbrake,torelease.
Automaticmodeisactivatedbydefault.
Thetechnologyadoptedfortheelectric
parkingbrakedoesnotallowthefitment
ofwheelssmallerthan16inches.
Itgoesofftoconfirmthereleaseoftheparking
brake.
The indicator lamp in the control lever flashes
duringmanualapplicationorrelease.
Aftertheparkingbrakehasbeenapplied,the
simultaneousflashingofthetwoindicator
lamps in the instrument panel and the control
lever alerts you to the need to fully secure your
vehiclebyengagingagear(withamanual
gearbox)orbyplacingthegearselectorin
positionPwithanautomaticgearbox,orby
fittingachocktooneofthewheels.(E.g.
parkingonaverysteepslopeoronaslope
withalowbattery).
background
132
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Label on door panel
Beforeleavingthevehicle,check
thattheparkingbrakeisapplied:the
indicator lamps in the instrument panel
andthecontrollevermustbeonfixed,
notflashing.
Iftheparkingbrakeisnotapplied,there
isanaudiblesignalandamessageis
displayedonopeningthedriver'sdoor.
Never leave a child alone inside the
vehiclewiththeignitionon,asthey
couldreleasetheparkingbrake.
Whentowing,parkingonasteepslope,
or if your vehicle is heavily laden,
turnthewheelstowardsthekerband
engageagear(withamanualgearbox)
orplacethegearselectoratpositionP
withanautomaticgearbox.
Fortowing,yourvehicleisapprovedfor
parkingonslopesofupto12%.
Manual operation
Applicationoftheparkingbrake
is confirmed by illumination of
thebrakeindicatorlampand
the P indicator lamp in the control
lever, accompanied by the display of
themessage"Parkingbrakeapplied".
Manual release
Withtheignitiononortheenginerunning,to
releasetheparkingbrake:
F pressthebrakepedal,
F whilemaintainingpressureonthebrake
pedal,brieflypushthecontrollever.
Thecompletereleaseoftheparkingbrake
isconfirmedbythebrakeindicatorlampand
the Pindicatorlampinthecontrollevergoing
off,accompaniedbythedisplayofthemessage
"Parkingbrakereleased".
If you push the control lever without
pressingthebrakepedal,theparking
brakewillnotbereleasedanda
messageisdisplayed.
Manual application
Withthevehiclestationary:brieflypullthecontrollever.
Confirmationofthecommandissignalledby
flashingoftheindicatorlampinthecontrol
lever.
background
133
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Withthevehiclestationary,theparkingbrake
is automatically applied when the engine
is switched offbypressingtheSTART/STOP
button.
Applicationoftheparkingbrake
is confirmed by illumination of the
brakeindicatorlampandtheP
indicator lamp in the control lever,
accompanied by the display of the
message"Parkingbrakeapplied".
WiththeenginestalledorinSTOP
mode of Stop & Start, automatic
applicationdoesnottakeplace.
In automatic mode, you can manually
applyorreleasetheparkingbrakeusing
thecontrollever.
Automatic operation
Automatic release
Thecompletereleaseoftheparking
brakeisconfirmedbythebrake
indicator lamp and the P indicator
lampinthecontrollevergoingoff,
accompanied by the display of the
message"Parkingbrakereleased".
Whenstationarywiththeenginerunning,donot
depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily,
youriskreleasingtheparkingbrake.
Ensurefirstthattheengineisrunningandthe
driver'sdoorisproperlyclosed.
Theelectricparkingbrakereleases
automatically and progressively when you
presstheaccelerator:
F Manualgearbox:fullydepresstheclutch
pedal,engage1
st
orreversegear;press
the accelerator pedal and let up the clutch
pedal.
F Automaticgearbox:selectpositionD, M or
Rthenpresstheaccelerator.
Automatic application
Withanautomaticgearbox,ifthebrake
doesnotreleaseautomatically,check
thatthefrontdoorsarecorrectlyclosed.
background
134
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Special cases
Applicationoftheparkingbrake
is confirmed by illumination of
thebrakeindicatorlampand
the P indicator lamp in the control
lever, accompanied by the display of
themessage"Parkingbrakeapplied".
Thecompletereleaseoftheparking
brakeisconfirmedbythebrake
indicator lamp and the P indicator
lampinthecontrollevergoingoff,
accompanied by the display of the
message"Parkingbrakereleased".
In some situations, you may need to operate
theparkingbrakemanually.
Immobilisation of the vehicle
with the engine running
Toimmobilisethevehiclewiththeengine
running,brieflypullthecontrollever.
Parking the vehicle with the
brake released
In very cold conditions, it is
recommendedthattheparkingbrake
notbeapplied(riskoffreezing).
Toimmobiliseyourvehicle,engagea
gearorfitachocktooneofthewheels.
Immobilisation of the vehicle with the
parking brake released
F Switchofftheengine.
Illuminationofthewarninglampsinthe
instrument panel and control lever confirm
applicationoftheparkingbrake,
F Switchontheignitionagain,without
startingtheengine.
F Releasetheparkingbrakemanuallyby
pushingthecontrolleverwhilekeeping
yourfootonthebrake.
F Switchofftheignition.
background
135
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Emergency braking
In the event of a failure of the main service
brakeorinanexceptionalsituation(e.g.driver
takenill,underinstruction,etc.)acontinuous
pullonthecontrolleverwillbrakethevehicle.
Brakingtakesplacewhilethecontrolleveris
beingpulled.Itisinterruptedifthecontrollever
isreleased.
The ABS and DSC systems provide stability of
thevehicleduringemergencybraking.
Iftheemergencybrakingmalfunctions,the
message"Parkingbrakecontrolfaulty"willbe
displayed.
If a failure of the ABS and DSC systems occurs,
signalledbytheilluminationofoneorboth
warninglampsintheinstrumentpanel,then
stabilityofthevehicleisnolongerguaranteed.
In this event, stability must be assured by the
driverbyrepeatingalternate"pull-release"
actions on the control lever until the vehicle is
immobilised.
Theemergencybrakingshouldonlybe
usedinanexceptionalsituation.
Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic
operation.
Reactivation of automatic operation is
confirmed by the indicator lamp in the
instrumentpanelgoingoff.
Deactivating automatic operation
In some situations, such as very cold weather
ortowing(caravan,recovery),itmaybe
necessary to deactivate automatic operation of
thesystem.
F Starttheengine.
F Applytheparkingbrakewiththecontrol
lever,ifitisreleased.
F Takeyourfootoffthebrakepedal.
F Push and hold the control lever in the
release direction for at least 10 seconds
andnomorethan15seconds.
F Releasethecontrollever.
F Pressandholdthebrakepedal.
F Pull the control lever in the apply direction
for2seconds.
Deactivation of the automatic functions
is confirmed by illumination of this
indicatorlampintheinstrumentpanel.
F Releasethecontrolleverandthebrake
pedal.
Fromthispointtheparkingbrakecanonly
beappliedandreleasedmanuallyusingthe
controllever.
background
136
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Operating faults
Thevariousalertsituationsaredescribedinthetablebelow.
IntheeventofafaultwiththeelectricparkingbrakeitisrecommendedthatyoucontactaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshopwithoutdelay.
Situations Consequences
Displayofthemessage"Parking brake fault" and this
warninglamp:
- Automaticreleaseisnotavailable.
- Ifyouattemptanautomaticrelease,ahelpmessageisdisplayedonacceleration
whentheparkingbrakeisapplied,promptingyoutousemanualrelease.
Displayofthemessage"Parking brake fault" and these
warninglamps:
- Secondarybrakingdoesnothavefullpower.
- Ifautomaticreleaseisnotavailable,ahelpmessageisdisplayedonacceleration
whentheparkingbrakeisapplied,promptingyoutousemanualrelease.
Displayofthemessage"Parking brake fault" and these
warninglamps:
- Automaticapplicationisnotavailable:usethecontrollever.
- Theelectricparkingbrakecanonlybeusedmanually.
- Ifautomaticreleaseisalsonotavailable,ahelpmessageisdisplayedon
accelerationwhentheparkingbrakeisapplied,promptingyoutousemanual
release.
Displayofthemessage"Parking brake fault" and these
warninglamps:
- Ifmanualapplicationandreleasedonotwork,thecontrolleverisfaulty.
- Theautomaticfunctionsmustbeusedinallcircumstances:theyare
automaticallyreactivatedintheeventoffailureofthecontrollever.
- Youcannolongerimmobilisethevehiclewiththeenginerunning.
background
137
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Situations Consequences
Displayofthemessage"Parking brake fault" and these
warninglamps:
Theparkingbrakeisfaulty,themanualandautomaticfunctionsmaynotoperate.
When stationary,toimmobiliseyourvehicle:
- Pullandholdthecontrolleverforabout7to15seconds,untilthewarninglamp
comesonintheinstrumentpanel.
Ifthisproceduredoesnotwork,youshouldmakeyourvehiclesafe:
- Parkonalevelsurface.
- Engageagearwithamanualgearbox,orplacethegearselectoratpositionP
withanautomaticgearbox.
- Ifpossible,fitawheelchock.
CallonaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Displayofthemessage"Parking brake fault" and these
warninglamps:
- Theparkingbrakedoesnothaveitsfullperformancetosecurelyholdthevehicle
inallsituations.
Youshouldmakeyourvehiclesafe:
- Parkonalevelsurface.
- Engageagearwithamanualgearbox,orplacethegearselectoratpositionP
withanautomaticgearbox.
- Ifpossible,fitawheelchock.
CallonaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
TheflashingofthePwarninglampsonstartingthevehicleindicatesthattheparking
brakeisnotcorrectlyapplied.
Assoonaspossible,stopthevehicleandtrytocompletelyreleasetheparkingbrake,
usingthecontrollever,withyourfootonthebrakepedal.
Displayofthemessage"Battery fault"andthiswarninglamp: - Thestateofchargeofthebatteryisverylowandrequiresimmobilisationofthe
vehicleinasafeplace:engageagearwithamanualgearboxorfitachockto
oneofthewheels.
- Oncethebatteryiscompletelydischarged,thecontrolsdonotoperate:to
releasetheparkingbrake,callonaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
background
138
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Hill start assist
Systemwhichkeepsyourvehicleimmobilised
temporarily(approximately2seconds)when
startingonagradient,thetimeittakesto
moveyourfootfromthebrakepedaltothe
acceleratorpedal.
Thissystemonlyoperateswhen:
- the vehicle is completely stationary, with
yourfootonthebrakepedal,
- certain conditions of slope are met,
- withthedriver’sdoorclosed.
The hill start assist system cannot be
deactivated.
On an ascending slope, with the vehicle
stationary, the vehicle is held momentarily
when you release the brake pedal:
- providedyouareinfirstgearorneutralwith
amanualgearbox,
- provided you are in position D or M with an
automaticgearbox.
Operation
On a descending slope, with the vehicle
stationary and reverse gear engaged, the
vehicle is held momentarily when you
release the brake pedal.
Operating fault
Ifafaultinthesystemoccurs,thesewarning
lamps come on, accompanied by an alert
message.ContactaCITROËNdealeror
aqualifiedworkshoptohavethesystem
checked.
Donotgetoutofthevehiclewhileitis
beingheldinthehillstartassistphase.
Ifyouneedtoexitthevehiclewith
theenginerunning,applytheparking
brakemanuallythenensurethatthe
parkingbrakewarninglamp(andthe
warninglampP in the lever of the
electricparkingbrake)areonfixed(not
flashing).
background
139
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
5-speed manual
gearbox
Engaging reverse gear
F With the clutch pedal fully down, place the
gearleverinneutral.
F Pushthegearlevertotherightthen
backwards.
Onlyengagereversegearwhenthe
vehicleisstationarywiththeengineatidle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
startingoftheengine:
- always select neutral,
- presstheclutchpedal.
6-speed manual
gearbox
Engaging 5
th
or 6
th
gear
F Movetheleverfullytotherighttoengage
5
th
or 6
th
gear.
Onlyengagereversegearwhenthe
vehicleisstationarywiththeengineatidle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
startingoftheengine:
- always select neutral,
- presstheclutchpedal.
Engaging reverse gear
Failure to follow this advice may cause
permanentdamagetothegearbox
(engagementof3
rd
or 4
th
gearby
mistake).
F Raisetheringundertheknobandmove
thegearlevertotheleftthenforwards.
background
140
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Automaticgearbox
Thisgearboxofferstwodrivingmodes.
- automated mode for automatic
managementofthegearsbythegearbox,
without any action on the part of the driver,
- manualmodeforsequentialgearchanging
bythedriverusingthesteeringmounted
paddles.
P. Park.
- Immobilisationofthevehicle,parkingbrake
appliedorreleased.
- Startingtheengine.
R. Reverse.
- Reversing,vehiclestationaryandengineat
idle.
N. Neutral.
- Immobilisationofthevehicle,parkingbrake
applied.
- Startingtheengine.
D. Automaticoperation.
M. Manualoperationwithsequentialchanging
ofthesixgears.
Gear selector lever
To select position P,movethegear
selectortothehighestposition
(towards R), then push it forwards and
thentotheleft.
Onlyengageitwhenthevehicleisata
completestop.Inthisposition,thefront
wheelsarelocked.Ensurethatthegear
selectoriscorrectlypositioned.
Tomovethegearselector,switchon
theignitionorstarttheengine.
Ifthebatteryisnotsufficientlycharged,
itisnotpossibletomovethegear
selector.
To come out of position P, move the
gearselectortotherighttothedesired
position,whilekeepingyourfootonthe
brakepedal.
Itispossibletochangefromonemode
totheotheratanytime.
With the automated mode, you can
temporarilytakecontrolofthegear
changesatanytime.
background
141
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
+. Controlpaddleforchangingup,totheright
ofthesteeringwheel.
F Pull the "+"paddletowardsyoutochangeup.
-. Controlpaddleforchangingdown,tothe
leftofthesteeringwheel.
F Pull the "-"paddletowardsyoutochange
down.
Steering mounted control paddles
Thesteeringmountedcontrolpaddles
cannot be used to select neutral or to
selectorcomeoutofreverse.
Whenyoumovethegearselector,thesymbol
correspondingtoitspositionisdisplayedinthe
instrumentpanel.
P. Park.
R. Reverse.
N. Neutral.
D. Drive(automaticoperation).
1 to 6.Gearsengagedinmanualoperation.
-. Invalidvalueinmanualoperation.
Displays in the instrument panel
Moving off
F Withyourfootonthebrakepedal,select
position P or N.
F Starttheengine.
If P is displayed in the instrument panel,
althoughthegearselectorisinanother
position,placethegearselectorin
position Ptobeabletostarttheengine.
F Withtheenginerunning,pressthebrake
pedal.
F Select automated mode (position D),
manual mode (position M) or reverse
(position R).
If you do not press the
brakepedaltocomeoutof
position P,thiswarninglamp
If these conditions are not met, there
isanaudiblesignalaccompaniedbya
message.
or symbol appears in the instrument
panel,accompaniedbythemessage
"PlaceautomaticgearboxinpositionP",
flashingofP in the instrument panel
andanaudiblesignal.
background
142
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
F Checkthatthesymboldisplayedinthe
instrumentpanelagreeswiththeposition
oftheselector.
F Progressivelyreleasethebrakepedal.
F Iftheparkingbrakeisreleased,thevehicle
movesoff.
Iftheparkingbrakeisappliedand
automatic operation is activated, accelerate
away.
Neverpresstheacceleratorandbrake
pedalsatthesametime.Brakingand
acceleration should be done only with
therightfoot.Pressingbothpedals
togetherrisksdamagingthegearbox.
Ifthebrakedoesnotrelease
automatically,checkthatthefrontdoors
arecorrectlyclosed.
Never leave children unsupervised in
thevehiclewhentheengineisrunning.
Whencarryingoutamaintenance
operationwiththeenginerunning,apply
theparkingbrakeandselectpositionP.
Never select position P or R unless the
vehicle is at a complete stop with the
brakeapplied.
Whenyouwanttoengagereverse,
toavoidjolts,donotaccelerate
immediatelyafterengagingR.
ChangingintopositionR is
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignal.
Never select position Nwhendriving.
If position Nisengagedinerrorwhen
moving,allowtheenginetoidle,then
engagepositionDtoaccelerate.
Whentheengineisrunningatidle,
brakesreleased,ifpositionR, D or M is
selected, the vehicle will move even if
theacceleratorisnotpressed.
background
143
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Invalid value in manual operation
Thissymbolisdisplayedifagearis
notengagedcorrectly(gearselector
betweentwopositions).
Youcantemporarilytakecontrolofgear
changesusingthe"+" and "-"steeringmounted
controlpaddles.Iftheenginespeedallows,the
instructiontochangegearisactedon.
This function allows you to anticipate certain
situationssuchasovertakinganothervehicleor
approachingabend.
After a few moments with no action on the
controlpaddles,thegearboxmanagesthe
gearsautomaticallyagain.
Temporary manual control of the
gears
Manual mode
Dandthegearengagedaredisplayedinthe
instrumentpanel.
Thegearboxoperatesinauto-active
mode,withoutanyactionfromthedriver.It
continuouslyselectsthemostappropriategear
accordingtothefollowingconditions:
- optimisation of fuel consumption,
- drivingstyle,
- relief of the road,
- vehicleload.
Automated mode
F Select position D.
Formaximumacceleration,withouttouching
thegearselector,presstheacceleratorfully
down(kickdown).Thegearboxchangesdown
automaticallyandmaintainsthegearselected
untilthemaximumenginespeedisreached.
Whenbraking,thegearboxchangesdown
automaticallyformoreeffectiveenginebraking.
Whenyoutakeyourfootofftheaccelerator
pedalsuddenly,thegearboxdoesnotchange
up,soastoimprovesafety.
F Select position M.
F Use the "+" and "-"steeringmounted
controlpaddlestochangegear.
Thegearsengagedaredisplayedsuccessively
intheinstrumentpanel.
When stationary or at very low speed, the
gearboxautomaticallyengages1stgear.
In manual mode, it is not necessary to release
theacceleratorpedalwhenchanginggear.
Thechangefromonegeartoanotherisonly
effected if the conditions of vehicle speed and
enginespeedallow;otherwisetheautomatic
lawsofoperationareimposedtemporarily.
Iftheenginespeedistoohighortoolow,
thedisplayofthegearselectedflashesfora
fewseconds,thenthenewgearengagedis
displayed.
Itispossibletochangemodeatany
time,bymovingthegearselector
from D to Mortheotherwayround.
background
144
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Beforeswitchingofftheengine,youcan
changetopositionP or Ntobeinneutral.
Ineithercase,applytheparkingbraketo
immobilisethevehicle,unlessitisprogrammed
inautomaticmode.
If the lever is not in position P,onopeningthe
driver'sdoororapproximately45secondsafter
switchingofftheignitionthereisanaudible
signalandamessageappears:
F movethegearselectortopositionP;the
audiblesignalstopsandthemessage
disappears.
Operating fault
Wheneverparking,youmustapplytheparking
braketoimmobilisethevehicle,ifautomatic
operationhasbeendeactivated.
Parking the vehicle
In all circumstances, ensure that the
gearselectorisinpositionP before
leavingyourvehicle.
In the event of a fault with the
gearbox,theservicewarninglamp
comes on in the instrument panel,
accompaniedbyamessageandan
audiblesignal.
Inthiscasethegearboxgoesintoback-up
modeandstaysin3
rd
gear.Youmaythenfeela
noticeablejoltwhengoingfromP to R and from
N to R.Thisjoltdoesnotpresentanyrisktothe
gearbox.
Donotexceed60mph(100km/h)whilealso
observinglegalspeedlimits.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
In the event of a battery failure, use the
chocktoimmobilisethevehicle.
background
145
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Dependingonthedrivingsituationandyour
vehicle'sequipment,thesystemmayadvise
youtoskiponeormoregears.
Youcanfollowthisinstructionwithoutgoing
throughtheintermediategears..
Gear shift indicator
Systemwhichreducesfuelconsumptionbyrecommendingthemostsuitablegear.
Thesystemadaptsitsgearchange
recommendationaccordingtothe
drivingconditions(gradient,load,...)
and the demands of the driver (power,
acceleration,braking,...).
Thesystemneversuggests:
- engagingfirstgear,
- engagingreversegear.
The information appears in the instrument
panelintheformofanarrow.
Onvehicleswithmanualgearbox,thearrow
may be accompanied by the recommended
gear.
The gear engagement recommendations
must not be considered compulsory.
This is because the configuration of the
road, traffic density and safety remain
important factors in the choice of the best
gear.
Thegearshiftindicatorsystemdoesnot
replacetheneedforvigilanceonthepartofthe
driver.
Withanautomaticgearbox,thesystemisonlyactiveinmanualmode.
OnBlueHDiDiesel135and150versionswith
manualgearbox,incertaindrivingconditions
thesystemmaysuggestchangingintoneutral
sothattheenginecangointostandby(STOP
modewithStop&Start).Inthiscase,N is
displayedintheinstrumentpanel.
Example:
Thisfunctioncannotbedeactivated.
- Youareinthirdgear.
- Youpresstheacceleratorpedal.
- Thesystemmaysuggestthatyouengage
ahighergear.
background
146
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Stop & Start
TheStop&Startsystemputstheenginetemporarilyintostandby-STOPmode-duringstopsinthetraffic(redlights,trafficjams,orother...).The
enginerestartsautomatically-STARTmode-assoonasyouwanttomoveoff.Therestarttakesplaceinstantly,quicklyandsilently.
Operation
Going into engine STOP
mode
This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument
panelandtheenginegoesintostandby
automatically:
- with a manual gearbox, at speeds below
12mph(20km/h),orvehiclestationary
(withPureTech130,THP165and
BlueHDi 100, 115 and 120 versions), when
youplacethegearleverinneutral,andyou
release the clutch pedal,
- with an automatic gearbox, with the
vehicle stationary, when you press the
brakepedalorplacethegearselectorlever
in position N.
NeverrefuelwiththeengineinSTOP
mode;youmustswitchofftheignition
withtheSTART/STOPbutton.
Foryourcomfort,duringparking
manoeuvres, STOP mode is not
available for a few seconds after
comingoutofreversegear.
The Stop & Start system does not affect
the functionality of the vehicle, such as
forexample,braking,powersteering...
Special cases: STOP mode not
available
STOPmodeisnotinvokedwhen:
- thedriver'sdoorisopen,
- thedriver'sseatbeltisnotfastened,
- thevehiclehasnotexceeded6mph
(10km/h)sincethelastenginestartusing
theSTART/STOPbutton,
- theelectricparkingbrakeisappliedor
beingapplied,
- theengineisneededtomaintaina
comfortabletemperatureinthepassenger
compartment,
- demistingisselected,
- somespecialconditions(batterycharge,
enginetemperature,brakingassistance,
ambienttemperature...)wheretheengineis
neededtoassurecontrolofasystem.
In this case, this indicator lamp flashes
forafewsecondsthengoesoff.
This operation is perfectly normal.
Perfectforurbanuse,theStop&Startsystemreducesfuelconsumptionandexhaustemissionsaswellasthenoiselevelwhenstationary.
If your vehicle is fitted with the system, a time
counter calculates the sum of the periods in
STOPmodeduringajourney.Itresetsitselfto
zeroeverytimetheignitionisswitchedonwith
theSTART/STOPbutton.
background
147
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Going into engine START mode
Thisindicatorlampgoesoffandthe
enginestartsautomatically:
- with a manual gearbox, when you fully
depress the clutch pedal,
- with an automatic gearbox:
● gearselectorinpositionD or M, when
youreleasethebrakepedal,
● orgearselectorinpositionNandbrake
pedalreleased,whenyouplacethegear
selector in position D or M,
● orwhenyouengagereverse.
STARTmodeisinvokedautomaticallywhen:
- youopenthedriver'sdoor,
- youunfastenthedriver'sseatbelt,
- thespeedofthevehicleexceeds15mph
(25km/h)withamanualgearbox(2mph
(3km/h)withPureTech130,THP165and
BlueHDi 100, 115 and 120 versions) and
2mph(3km/h)withanautomaticgearbox,
- theelectricparkingbrakeisbeingapplied,
- somespecialconditions(batterycharge,
enginetemperature,brakingassistance,
ambienttemperature...)wheretheengineis
neededforcontrolofasystem.
Special cases: START invoked
automatically
In some circumstances, such as the need to
maintain a comfortable temperature in the
passengercompartment,itmaybenecessary
todeactivatetheStop&Startsystem.
The system can be deactivated at any time,
oncetheignitionison.
IftheengineisinSTOPmode,itthenrestarts.
The Stop & Start system is automatically
reactivatedeverytimetheignitionis
switchedon.
Manual deactivation/
reactivation
In this case this indicator lamp flashes
forafewseconds,thengoesoff.
This operation is perfectly normal.
Select"Stop&Start"todeactivatethesystem.
This is confirmed by the illumination
ofthisindicatorlamp.
Usingthedynamiccruisecontrol
deactivatestheStop&Startsystem.
Deactivation of Stop & Start is done in the
Drivingmenuofthetouchscreentablet.
Select"Stop&Start"againtoreactivatethe
system.
This is confirmed by the illumination
ofthisindicatorlamp.
background
148
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Operating fault
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
In the event of a fault in STOP mode, the vehicle
maystall.
Alloftheinstrumentpanelwarninglampscomeon.
Dependingonversion,analertmessagemay
alsobedisplayed,askingyoutoplacethegear
selector lever at position N and put your foot on
thebrakepedal.
Itisthennecessarytoswitchofftheignitionand
starttheengineagainusingthe"START/STOP"
button.
In the event of a fault with the system,
this indicator lamp flashes for a few
moments then comes on continuously,
accompaniedbyamessage.
Opening the bonnet
Beforedoinganythingunderthe
bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start
systemtoavoidtheriskofinjuryrelated
toanautomaticchangetoSTART
mode.
Driving on flooded roads
Beforedrivingthroughafloodedroad,
itisstronglyrecommendedthatyou
deactivatetheStop&Startsystem.
For more information on Driving
advice, particularly on flooded roads,
refertothecorrespondingsection.
The Stop & Start system requires a
batteryofadvancedtechnologyand
specialcharacteristics.
Allworkonthistypeofbatterymust
only be done by a CITROËN dealer
oraqualifiedworkshop.
For more information on the
12 V battery,refertothecorresponding
section.
background
149
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Memorisingspeeds
Memorising
Thisfunctionallowsspeedstobesaved,whichcanthenbeofferedtosetthetwosystems:thespeedlimiter(tolimitthespeedofthevehicle)orthe
cruisecontrol(foravehiclecruisingspeed).
Youcanmemoriseuptosixspeedsettingsforeachofthetwosystems.Bydefault,somespeedsettingsarealreadymemorised.
F Select the system for which you want to
memorisenewspeedsettings.
This function is accessible in the Driving menu
ofthetouchscreentablet.
F Select the "Driving assistance" tab, then
Speed settings.
F Pressthebuttoncorrespondingtothe
speedsettingyouwanttomodify.
As a safety measure, the driver must
carry out these operations when
stationary.
F Enterthenewvalueusingthenumerical
keypadandconfirm.
background
150
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Speedlimitrecognition
This system allows the speed limit detected by
the camera to be displayed in the instrument
panel.
Specific speed limits, such as those for heavy
goodsvehicles,arenotdisplayed.
The display of the speed limit in the instrument
panelisupdatedasyoupassaspeedlimitsign
intendedforcars(lightvehicles).
The units for the speed limits (mph or
km/h)dependonthecountryyouare
drivingin.
Itshouldbetakenintoaccountsothat
youobservethespeedlimit.
For the system to operate correctly
whenyouchangecountry,theunitsfor
speed in the instrument panel must be
thoseforthecountryyouaredrivingin.
Theautomaticreadingofroadsignsisa
drivingassistancesystemanddoesnot
alwaysdisplayspeedlimitscorrectly.
Thespeedlimitsignspresentonthe
roadalwaystakepriorityoverthe
displaybythesystem.
The system cannot in any
circumstances replace the need for
vigilanceonthepartofthedriver.
Thedrivermustobservethedriving
regulationsandmustadaptthespeed
of the vehicle to suit the weather and
traffic.
It is possible for the system to not
display the speed limit if it does not
detectaspeedlimitsignwithinapreset
period.
Thesystemisdesignedtodetectsigns
that conform to the Vienna Convention
onroadsigns.
To maintain correct operation of the
system:regularlycleantheareainfront
ofthecamera.
Principles
Usingacameraatthetopofthewindscreen,
this system detects and reads speed limit and
endofspeedlimitsigns.
Thesystemalsotakesaccountofinformation
onspeedlimitsfromthenavigationsystem
mapping.
background
151
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Display in the instrument panel
1. Indicationofthespeedlimit.
or
2. Indicationoftheendofthespeedlimit.
Display of the speed
Thesystemisactivebutisnotdetectingspeed
limitinformation.
On detection of speed limit information, the
systemdisplaysthevalue.
Thedrivercan,ifdesired,adjustthe
speedofthevehicleaccordingtothe
informationgivenbythesystem.
The system is activated or deactivated in the
Drivingmenuofthetouchscreentablet.
Select the "Settings" tab, then "Driving aids"
and "Recommended speed display".
Activation / Deactivation
It is necessary to update your
navigationmappingregularlyinorderto
receive accurate information on speed
limitsfromthesystem.
background
152
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Memorising the speed setting
This memorisation is in addition to the display
of Speed limit recognition.
The driver can choose to adapt the speed
settingtothespeedlimitsuggested,by
pressingthememorisationbuttonatthespeed
limiter controls, with the standard cruise
control, the dynamic cruise control or the
dynamiccruisecontrolwithStopfunction.
Thisspeedsettingthenreplacestheprevious
speedsettingforthespeedlimiterand/orcruise
control.
For more information on the Speed
limiter, Cruise control, Dynamic
cruise control or Dynamic cruise
control with Stop function, refer to
thecorrespondingsections.
Steering mounted controls
1. Selectspeedlimiter/cruisecontrolmode.
2. Memoriseaspeedsetting.
Operating limits
Thelegislationonspeedlimitsisspecificto
eachcountry.
Thesystemdoesnottakeaccountofreduced
speedlimitsinthefollowingcases:
- poor weather (rain, snow),
- atmospheric pollution,
- trailer, caravan,
- drivingwithaspace-savertypespare
wheel or snow chains fitted,
- puncturerepairusingthetemporary
repairkit,
- youngdrivers,
- ...
Thesystemmaybedisruptedornotworkatall
inthefollowingsituations:
- poorvisibility(inadequatestreetlighting,
fallingsnow,rain,fog),
- windscreen area ahead of the camera dirty,
misty,frosty,coveredwithsnow,damaged
ormaskedbyasticker,
- fault with the camera,
- obsoleteorincorrectmapping,
- hiddenroadsigns(othervehicles,
vegetation,snow),
- speedlimitsignsthatdonotconformtothe
standard,aredamagedordistorted.
Display in the instrument panel
3. Speedlimiterindication.
4. Memorisethespeed.
5. Currentspeedsetting.
background
153
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
F Makeaninitial press on this
buttontorequestsavingofthe
speedsuggested.
F Press this button again to
confirm and save the new speed
setting.
Memorising the speed
F Switchonthespeedlimiter/cruisecontrol.
Speedlimiter/cruisecontrolinformationis
displayed.
Ondetectionofaspeedlimitsign,thesystem
displays the speed limit value and offers to
makeitanewspeedsetting.
"MEM"flashesinthescreenforafewseconds.
Ifthedifferencebetweenthespeedsetting
andspeeddisplayedbytherecognition
systemislessthan6mph(10km/h),the
MEMsymbolisnotdisplayed.
After a predetermined period, the screen
returnstothecurrentdisplay.
background
154
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Steering mounted controls
6. Speedlimiteron/pauseindication.
7. Speedlimitermodeselectionindication.
8. Speedlimitersetting.
Speed limiter - "LIMIT"
Systemwhichpreventsthevehiclefromexceedingthespeedprogrammedbythedriver.
The speed limiter cannot, in any
circumstances, replace the need to
observe speed limits, nor can it replace the
needforvigilanceonthepartofthedriver.
Oncetheprogrammedspeedlimitisreached,
additional pressure on the accelerator pedal
hasnoeffect.
1. Selectspeedlimitermode.
2. Lowerprogrammedspeed.
3. Raiseprogrammedspeed.
4. Speedlimiteron/pause.
5. Display the list of memorised speeds or,
Displaythelistofmemorisedspeeds.
Displays in the instrument panel
Switching on the speed limiter requires
aprogrammedspeedofatleast20mph
(30km/h).
The speed limiter is paused by operation of the
control.
Theprogrammedspeedcanbeexceeded
temporarilybypressingtheacceleratorfirmly
beyondthepointofresistance.
Toreturntotheprogrammedspeed,simply
release the accelerator pedal until the vehicle
returnstotheprogrammedspeedlimit.
Theprogrammedspeedremainsinthe
memorywhentheignitionisswitchedoff.
For more information on Memorising speeds,
refertothecorrespondingsection.
For more information on Speed limit
recognition and memorisation, refer to the
correspondingsection.
background
155
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Switching on / Pause
F Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "LIMIT"position:
the speed limiter mode is selected but is
notswitchedon(Pause).
F Switchthespeedlimiterbackonby
pressingbutton4, if the speed displayed
is suitable (by default, the last speed
programmed).
F You can temporarily stop the speed limiter
bypressingbutton4again:thedisplay
confirmsthatithasbeenstopped(Pause).
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on
inordertosetthespeed.
Once the function is selected, you can modify
thespeedsettingby:
- usingbuttons2 and 3,raisingorlowering
thespeeddisplayed:
F by successive short presses, to modify
by+or-1mph(km/h),
F by a maintained press, to modify in steps
of+or-5mph(km/h).
Adjusting the speed limiter
setting
- pressingbutton5:
Fthesixspeedsmemorisedaredisplayed
in the touch screen tablet,
Fpressthebuttoncorrespondingtothe
limitspeedchosen.
Thevalueisdisplayedintheinstrumentpanel.
The selection screen closes after a few
moments.
- bypressingbutton5, if your vehicle has
speedlimitrecognition:
F the speed to memorise is displayed in
the instrument panel,
F press button 5 againtosavethespeed.
The value is then displayed in the instrument
panel.
For more information on Speed limit
recognition and memorisation, refer to the
correspondingsection.
background
156
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
On sharp acceleration, as when
descendingasteephill,thespeed
limiter will not be able to prevent
thevehiclefromexceedingthe
programmedspeed.
The limiter is temporarily deactivated
andthedisplayedprogrammedspeed
flashes.
Anaudiblesignalaccompaniesthe
flashingoftheprogrammedspeed
whenexceedingthespeedisnotdueto
anactionbythedriver.
The use of mats not approved by
CITROËN may interfere with the
operationofthespeedlimiter.
Toavoidanyriskofjammingofthe
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is secured
correctly,
- donotfitonematontopofanother.
Flashingofthedashesindicatesafaultwiththe
speedlimiter.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Operating fault
F Press firmly on the accelerator pedal,
goingbeyondthepoint of resistance, to
exceedtheprogrammedspeedlimit.
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily
andthedisplayedprogrammedspeedflashes.
Anaudiblesignalaccompaniestheflashing
oftheprogrammedspeedwhenexceeding
the speed is not due to an action by the driver
(steephill...).
Assoonasthevehicle'sspeedreturnstothe
programmedvalue,thelimiteroperatesagain:
thedisplayoftheprogrammedspeedbecomes
steadyagain.
Switching off
Temporarily exceeding the
programmed speed
F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0"position.
The display of speed limiter information
disappears.
background
157
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Steering mounted controls
6. Cruisecontrolpause/resumeindication.
7. Cruisecontrolmodeselectionindication.
8. Speedsetting.
Cruise control - "CRUISE"
Systemwhichautomaticallymaintainsthespeedofthevehicleatthevalueprogrammedbythedriver,withoutanyactionontheacceleratorpedal.
Thecruisecontrolsystemcannot,inanycircumstances,replacetheneedtoobservespeedlimits,norcanitreplacetheneedforvigilanceonthepartofthedriver.
Youareadvisedtokeepyourfeetnearthepedalsatalltimes.
Switching on the cruise control requires a
minimumvehiclespeedof25mph(40km/h).
Aswellasengagementof:
- fourthgearorhigheronamanualgearbox,
- secondgearorhigherinmanualmodeon
anautomaticgearbox,
- position Donanautomaticgearbox.
Thesystemremainsactiveafterchanginggear
onvehicleswithamanualgearboxand
Stop&Start.
The cruise control is pausedbypressing
button 4orthebrakepedalorontriggeringof
theESCsystemforsafetyreasons.
Itispossibletoexceedtheprogrammedspeed
temporarilybypressingtheacceleratorpedal.
Toreturntotheprogrammedspeed,simply
release the accelerator pedal until the
programmedcruisespeedisreachedagain.
1. Selectcruisecontrolmode.
2. Set the current speed of the vehicle
astheprogrammedspeed/Lowerthe
programmedspeed.
3. Set the current speed of the vehicle
astheprogrammedspeed/Raisethe
programmedspeed.
4. Pause/resumecruisecontrol.
5. Display the list of memorised speeds or,
Acceptthespeedsuggestedbythespeed
limitrecognitionsystem.
Displays in the instrument panel
Switchingofftheignitioncancelsany
programmedspeedvalue.
For more information on Memorising speeds,
refertothecorrespondingsection.
For more information on Speed limit
recognition and memorisation, refer to the
correspondingsection.
background
158
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Exceeding the programmed
speed
Ifthecruisespeedsettingisexceeded,the
displayedspeedflashes.
Thedisplaybecomessteadyagainoncethe
vehiclereturnstothecruisespeedsetting.
Switching off
F Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "0"position.
The display of information related to the
cruisecontroldisappears.
Switching on
Once the cruise control is switched on, you
canmodifythecruisingspeedinoneofthe
followingways:
- usingbuttons2 or 3:
F by successive short presses, to modify
thespeedby+or-1mph(km/h),
Fbyalongpress,tomodifythespeedin
stepsof+or-5mph(km/h),
- bypressingbutton5:
Fthesixmemorisedspeedsaredisplayed
in the touch screen tablet,
Fchooseavalue:itisdisplayedinthe
instrumentpanel.
The selection screen closes after a few
moments.
Themodificationisthenaccepted.
F Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "CRUISE"
position:thecruisecontrolmodeis
selectedbutispaused.
F Press button 2 or 3:yourvehicle'scurrent
speedbecomesthecruisespeed.
Thecruisecontrolisactivated(ON).
Modication of the cruise speed
(speed setting)
- bypressingbutton5, if your vehicle has
speedlimitrecognition:
F the speed to memorise is displayed in
the instrument panel,
F press button 5 againtosavethespeed.
The value is then displayed in the instrument
panel.
For more information on Speed limit
recognition and memorisation, refer to the
correspondingsection.
Pause
You can pause the cruise control at any time
bypressingbutton4:thescreenconfirmsthe
pause.
background
159
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Flashingofthedashesindicatesafaultwiththe
cruisecontrol.
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Operating fault
When the cruise control is switched on,
be careful if you maintain the pressure
ononeoftheprogrammedspeed
changingbuttons:thismayresultina
veryrapidchangeinthespeedofyour
vehicle.
Do not use the cruise control on
slipperyroadsorinheavytraffic.
On a steep descent, the cruise control
will not be able to prevent the vehicle
fromexceedingtheprogrammedspeed.
Onsteepclimbsorwhentowing,the
programmedspeedmaynotbereached
ormaintained.
The use of mats not approved by
CITROËN may interfere with the
operationofthecruisecontrol.
Toavoidanyriskofjammingofthe
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is secured
correctly,
- neverfitonematontopofanother.
background
160
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Dynamic cruise control
Systemthatallows,inadditiontomaintainingyourvehicle'sspeedatavaluethatyouhavedefined,theinter-vehicletimeyouhaveselectedbetween
yourvehicleandtheoneinfronttobemaintained.
Principles of operation
Usingaradarwitharangeofabout100metres,
located at the front of the vehicle, this system
detectsavehiclerunninginfrontofyour
vehicle.
It automatically adapts the speed of the vehicle
tothatofthevehicleinfront.
Ifthevehicleinfrontisrunningmoreslowly,
thesystemprogressivelyreducesthespeedof
yourvehicleusingjustenginebraking(asifthe
driver had pressed the "-"button).
Ifyourvehicleistooclosetoorapproaching
tooquicklythevehicleinfront,thedynamic
cruisecontrolisautomaticallydeactivated.
Thedriveristhenalertedbyanaudiblesignal,
accompaniedbyamessage.
Choice of the type of cruise control
The choice between the "dynamic" and
"standard" cruise control is done in the Driving
menu.
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
assistance" tab, then "Dynamic cruise
control" to activate or deactivate the
dynamiccruisecontrol.
For more information on the Cruise
control,refertothecorresponding
section.
F Place the cruise control
thumbwheelat"CRUISE".
Ifthevehicleinfrontacceleratesorchanges
lane,thedynamiccruisecontrolprogressively
accelerates your vehicle to return to the
programmedspeed.
If the driver operates a direction indicator
totheleft(lefthanddrive)ortheright(right
handdrive),toovertakeaslowervehicle,the
dynamic cruise control allows your vehicle to
temporarily approach the vehicle in front to
assisttheovertakingmanoeuvre,thoughnever
exceedingtheprogrammedspeed.
background
161
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
The dynamic cruise control is switched on
manually:itrequiresthatthespeedofthe
vehicle be between 25 and 90 mph (40 and
150km/h),aswellastheengagementof:
- fourthgearorhigherwithamanual
gearbox,
- secondgearorhigherwithanautomatic
gearboxinmanualmode,
- position Dwithanautomaticgearbox.
Thesystemremainsactiveafterchanginggear
onvehicleswithamanualgearboxand
Stop&Start.
General points
The dynamic cruise control can be paused
manuallyorautomatically:
- bypressingbutton4,
- bypressingthebrakepedal,
- in the event of operation of the ESC, for
safety reasons,
- in the event of operation of the electric
parkingbrakecontrollever,
- when an inter-vehicle time threshold is
reached(calculatedaccordingtothe
relative speeds of your vehicle and the
vehicle in front and the inter-vehicle time
settingchosen),
- when the distance between your vehicle
and the one in front becomes too small,
- when the speed of the vehicle in front is too
low,
- when the speed of your vehicle becomes
toolow.
The dynamic cruise control cannot in any
circumstances replace the observation
ofspeedlimits,northeneedforvigilance
onthepartofthedriver.
Itisrecommendedthatyoualwayskeep
yourfeetclosetothepedals.
Ifthespeedsettingselectedisabove
90mph(150km/h),thesystemswitches
to standard cruise control operation,
withnoadjustmentoftheinter-vehicle
safedistance(amessageappearsin
theinstrumentpanel).
Theinter-vehicletimesettingiskeptin
memoryonswitchingofftheignition.
The dynamic cruise control operates by
dayandatnight,infogorinmoderate
rainfall.
Thesystemdoesnotactonthebraking
system,butworksonlywithenginebraking.
Theregulationrangeislimited:therewill
nolongerbeanyadjustmentofspeedifthe
differencebetweentheprogrammedspeed
settingandthespeedofthevehicleinfront
becomestoohigh(18mph(30km/h)).
If the difference between the
programmedspeedsettingandthe
speed of the vehicle in front is too
great,thespeedcannotbeadjusted:
the cruise control is automatically
deactivated.
background
162
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
1. Selectcruisecontrolmode.
2. Use the current speed of the vehicle as
thecruisespeedsetting/Lowerthespeed
setting.
3. Use the current speed of the vehicle as
thecruisespeedsetting/Raisethespeed
setting.
4. Pause/Resumethecruisecontrol.
5. Display the list of memorised speeds, or
Acceptthespeedsuggestedbythespeed
limitrecognitionsystem.
6. Select the inter-vehicle distance ("Close",
"Normal", "Distant")
For more information on Memorising speeds,
refertothecorrespondingsection.
For more information on Speed limit
recognition and its memorisation, refer to the
correspondingsection.
Steering mounted controls
Switching on
The active cruise control must be selected in
the Drivingmenu.
F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "CRUISE"
position:cruisecontrolmodeisselected,
butispaused.
F Press one of the buttons 2 or 3:thecurrent
speed of your vehicle becomes the cruise
speedsetting.
Thecruisecontrolisactivated(ON).
By default, the inter-vehicle time is set at
2seconds.
Otherwise, the last speed value set will be used
foroperationofthesystem.
Modication of the cruise control
speed
- usingbuttons2or3:
F by successive short presses, to modify
bystepsof+or-1mph(km/h),
F by a maintained press, to modify in steps
of+or-5mph(km/h).
- bypressingbutton5:
Fthesixmemorisedspeedsettingsare
displayed in the touch screen tablet,
Fchooseaspeedsetting:itisdisplayedin
theinstrumentpanel.
The selection screen closes after a few
moments.Themodificationisthentakeninto
account.
- bypressingbutton5, if your vehicle has
speedlimitrecognition:
F the speed to memorise is displayed in
the instrument panel,
F press button 5 againtosavethespeed.
Thespeedsettingisthendisplayedinthe
instrumentpanel.
As a precaution, it is recommended that
youselectaspeedsettingclosetothe
currentspeedofyourvehicle.
Operation
For more information on Speed limit
recognition and its memorisation, refer to the
correspondingsection.
background
163
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
In the event of the presence of a
vehicle detected by the radar, if the
speedselectedismuchhigherthan
the speed of that vehicle, the system
isnotactivatedandthealertmessage
"Activation not possible, conditions
unsuitable"isdisplayeduntildriving
conditions are safe to allow activation of
thesystem.
Exceeding the speed setting
Theinformationisgroupedtogetherinthe
instrumentpanel.
6. Indicationofcruisecontrolpause/resume.
7. Indication of selection of cruise control
mode, or
vehiclespeedadjustmentphase.
8. Cruisespeedsetting,or
adjustedspeedlowerthanthecruise
setting.
Displays in the instrument panel
Modication of the inter-vehicle
distance
Press button 6 to choose a new inter-vehicle
distancesettingfromthe3available("Close",
"Normal", "Distant").
This value remains in memory, whatever the
stateofthesystem.
Itispossibletoexceedthespeedsetting
temporarilybydepressingtheaccelerator
pedal.
Then simply release the accelerator pedal to
returntotheprogrammedspeed.
Ifthespeedsettingisunintentionallyexceeded,
descendingasteephillforexample,thespeed
settingintheinstrumentpanelflashesasa
warning.
background
164
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Symbol
Display in the
instrument panel
Associated message Comments
Novehicledetected:
thesystemoperatesasastandardcruisecontrol.
Detectionofavehicle,atthelimitoftherangeoftheradar:
thesystemoperatesasastandardcruisecontrol.
"SPEED ADJUSTED" Detectionofavehiclethatistoocloseorrunningataspeedlowerthanyour
vehicle'scruisespeedsetting.
Thesystemusesenginebrakingtoslowyourvehicleandthenholditatthespeedof
thevehicleinfrontsoastomaintaintheprogrammedinter-vehicletime.
Theregulationrangeislimitedtoamaximumdifferenceof20mph(30km/h)
betweenthespeedsettingandthespeedofthevehicleahead.
"SPEED ADJUSTED" Whentheadjustedspeedreachesthecontrollimit(speedsetting-20mph
(30km/h)),theadjustedspeedflashestogetherwiththespeedsetting,tosignalthat
automaticdeactivationofthesystemisimminent.
"Cruise control
paused"
Ifthesystemexceedsthelimitofspeedadjustmentpossiblebythesystemand
in the absence of any reaction by the driver (operation of the direction indicator,
changeoflane,reductionofthespeedofthevehicle),thesystemisautomatically
paused.
Thedisplayofthedeactivationmessageisaccompaniedbyanaudiblesignal.
Driving situations and associated alerts
Thetablebelowdescribesthealertsandthemessagesdisplayedforthedifferentdrivingsituations.
Thedisplayofthesealertsisnotsequential.
background
165
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
When the dynamic cruise control is
automatically paused, it can only be
reactivated when safe conditions are
restored.Themessage"Activation
not possible, conditions unsuitable"
is displayed while reactivation is not
possible.
When the conditions allow, it is
recommended that the system be
reactivatedbypressingbutton2 or 3,
whichwillmakethecurrentspeedof
your vehicle the new cruise speed
setting,ratherthanbypressingbutton4
(on/pause)whichreactivatesthesystem
usingtheoldcruisespeedsetting,
which may be very different from the
currentspeedofyourvehicle.
Thedynamiccruisecontrolusesonlyengine
brakingtoslowthevehicle.Consequentlythe
vehiclelosesspeedslowly,aswhenreleasing
theacceleratorpedal.
Thesystemispausedautomatically:
- if the vehicle in front slows down too much
or too suddenly, and the driver does not
brake,
- if a vehicle comes between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front,
- if the system does not slow the vehicle
enoughtocontinuetomaintainasafe
distance,forexamplewhendescendinga
steephill.
Limits of operation
Astheradar'sfieldofviewisquitenarrow,itis
possiblethatthesystemmaynotdetect:
Thecruisecontroldoesnottakeaccountof:
- stationary vehicles,
- vehiclesdrivingintheoppositedirection.
- vehicles of reduced width, such as
motorcycles,forexample,
- vehiclesnotrunninginthemiddleofthe
lane,
- vehiclesenteringacorner,
- vehicleschanginglaneatthelastmoment.
Theregulationrangeislimitedtoamaximum
differenceof20mph(30km/h)betweenthe
speedsettingandthespeedofthevehiclein
front.Abovethis,thesystemgoesintopauseif
asafedistanceisnotmaintained.
Severe weather conditions (very heavy
rain, accumulations of snow in front
of the radar) can interfere with the
operationofthesystem,resultingin
thedisplayofthemessage"SYSTEM
INACTIVE:Visibilityreduced".The
function remains unavailable until the
messagedisappears.
background
166
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
In the event of a fault with the dynamic cruise
control,youarealertedbyanaudiblesignal
andthedisplayofthemessage"Drivingaid
functionsfault".
HavethesystemcheckedbyaCITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Whenthecruisecontrolisworking,take
careifmakingamaintainedpresson
oneofthecruisecontrolprogrammed
speedmodificationbuttons:thiscan
leadtoaveryquickchangeinthe
speedofyourvehicle.
Do not use the dynamic cruise control
onslipperysurfacesorinheavytraffic.
Whendescendingasteephill,the
cruise control may not be able to
preventthevehiclefromexceedingthe
programmedspeed.
Whenascendingasteephillorwhen
towing,itmightnotbepossibletoattain
ormaintaintheprogrammedspeed.
Operating fault
The operation of the radar, located in
the front bumper, may be disturbed by
accumulationsofgrime(dust,mud...)
or in certain weather conditions (snow,
ice...).
Themessage"SYSTEMINACTIVE:
Visibilityreduced"isdisplayedtosignal
that the system has been put into
standby.
Cleanthefrontbumperregularly.
The use of mats not approved by
CITROËN may interfere with the
operationofthecruisecontrol.
Toavoidanyriskofjammingthepedals:
- ensure that mats are secured
correctly,
- neverfitonematontopofanother.
background
167
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Dynamic cruise control with Stop function
Thedynamiccruisecontrolisadriving
aid that cannot in any circumstances
replace the observation of speed limits
and safe distances, nor the need for
vigilanceonthepartofthedriver.
Itisrecommendedthatyoualwayskeep
yourfeetclosetothepedals.
Thedrivermustbereadytotakeback
control of their vehicle at any time,
usingthebrakeoracceleratorpedalas
appropriate.
Thissystemassurestwofunctions:
- automaticregulationofthespeedofthe
vehicletoavalueprogrammedbythe
driver,
- automaticadjustmentofthedistance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead.
Itmanagestheaccelerationanddeceleration
ofthevehiclebyautomaticallyactingonthe
engineandthebrakingsystem.
To do this, the system has a radar, located in
themiddleofthefrontbumper,withamaximum
rangeof150metres.
Principles
Thissystemdetectsavehiclerunninginfrontof
yourvehicle,travellinginthesamedirection.
It automatically adapts the speed of your
vehicle to that of the vehicle in front, to maintain
aconstantdistance.
Ifthevehicleinfrontisrunningmoreslowly,the
systemslows,orevenstopsyourvehicle,using
enginebrakingandthebrakingsystem.
Ifthebrakingsystemisusedtodeceleratethe
vehicle,thebrakelampscomeon.
Ifthevehicleinfrontacceleratesorchanges
lane,thecruisecontrolprogressively
accelerates your vehicle to return to the
programmedspeed.
If the driver operates a direction indicator to
overtakeaslowervehicle,thedynamiccruise
control allows your vehicle to temporarily
approach the vehicle in front to assist the
overtakingmanoeuvre,thoughneverexceeding
theprogrammedspeed.
background
168
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Steering mounted controls
1. Selectcruisecontrolmode.
2. Use the current speed as the speed
setting/Lowerthespeedsetting.
3. Use the current speed as the speed
setting/Raisethespeedsetting.
4. Pause/Resumecruisecontrol.
5. Usethespeedsuggestedbythespeed
limitrecognitionsystem.
6. Displayandadjusttheinter-vehicle
distancesetting.
For more information on Speed limit
recognition and its memorisation, refer to the
correspondingsection.
Displays in the instrument panel
7. Indicationofthepresence/absenceofa
targetvehicle.
8. Indicationofcruisecontrolactivation/
deactivation.
9. Speedsetting.
10. Indicationthatvehicleisheldstationary.
11. Speedsuggestedbythespeedlimit
recognitionsystem.
If a vehicle is detected, the symbol 7 is filled
with the colour associated with the cruise
controlmode.Bydefault,thesymbol7 is
empty.
In cruise control activated mode, the symbol 8
appearsingreen.Bydefault,thesymbol8
appearsingrey.
12. Inter-vehicledistancesetting.
13. Positionofthevehicledetectedbytheradar.
This information is visible in the instrument
panelin"Driving"displaymode.
background
169
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Switching on
The cruise control is switched on manually,
it requires a vehicle speed of between 18 and
112mph(30and180km/h).
AnautomaticgearboxmustbeinpositionD
or M.
Otherwise,thelastsettingmadewillbeused
whenswitchingonthesystem.
Switchingofftheignitioncancelsany
programmedspeedsetting.
Whenthecruisecontrolisoperating,
Stop & Start is automatically
deactivated.
Pause
The dynamic cruise control can be paused
manuallyby:
- actionbythedriver:
● onbutton4,
● onthebrakepedal,
● ontheelectricparkingbrakecontrol,
● whenchangingfromD to N with an
automaticgearbox.
- or automatically, if operation of the ESC
systemistriggeredforreasonsofsafety.
Followingbrakingofthevehicle
bringingittoacompletestop,the
systemholdsthevehiclestationary;
thecruisecontrolispaused.Thedriver
should press the accelerator pedal to
move off, then reactivate the system
byexceeding18mph(30km/h)and
pressingbutton2, 3 or 4.
Ifthedrivertakesnoactionfollowing
thisimmobilisation,theelectricparking
brakeisappliedautomaticallyaftera
fewminutes.
F Withtheignitionon,turnthethumbwheel1
to the "CRUISE"position:cruisecontrol
modeisselected,butnotstarted(grey).
F Vehiclemoving,pressoneofthebuttons2
or 3:thecurrentspeedofyourvehicle
becomesthecruisespeedsetting.
Thecruisecontrolisactivated(green).
By default, the inter-vehicle distance is set at
"Normal"(2dashes).
background
170
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
When the cruise control is paused,
it can only be reactivated when all of
thesafetyconditionsaremet.The
message"Activationnotpossible,
conditions unsuitable" is displayed while
reactivationisnotpossible.
Wait until the speed of the vehicle
isclosetothespeedsettingbefore
reactivatingthesystem-bypressing
button 2 or 3 - in order to set your
currentspeedasthenewspeedsetting.
Modification of the speed setting
Modication from the speed limit
recognition system
F The speed to be memorised is displayed in
theinstrumentpanel.
F Makeaninitialpressonbutton5;a
messageisdisplayedtoconfirmthe
memorisationrequest.
F Press button 5againtosavethesuggested
speed.
The speed is then displayed in the instrument
panelasthenewspeedsetting.
As a precaution, it is recommended that
youselectacruisespeedsettingclose
to the current speed of your vehicle, so
as to avoid any sudden acceleration or
decelerationofthevehicle.
For more information on Speed limit
recognition and its memorisation, refer to the
correspondingsection.
Enginerunningandcruisecontrolon(green),
youcanmodifythespeedsetting.
Modication from the current
speed
F By successive short presses on button 2 or
3,toraiseorlowerthesettinginstepsof+
or-1mph(km/h),
F By a maintained press on button 2 or 3,
toraiseorlowerthesettinginsteps
of+or-5mph(km/h).
Takecare:aprolongedpresson
button 2 or 3willcauseaveryquick
changeinthespeedofyourvehicle.
background
171
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Modification of the inter-vehicle distance setting
Threepredefinedinter-vehicledistancesettings
areoffered:
- "Distant"(3dashes),
- "Normal" (2 dashes),
- "Close"(1dash).
Enginerunningandcruisecontrolselected
(grey),youcanmodifytheinter-vehicle
distancesetting:
F press button 6 to display the selection
screen for inter-vehicle distance,
F press button 6repeatedlytocyclethrough
thepredefinedsettings.
The selection screen closes after a few
seconds.
Themodificationisthentakenintoaccount.
Thissettingremainsinmemory,whateverthe
stateofthesystemandwhentheignitionis
switchedoff.
Itispossibletoexceedthespeedsetting
temporarilybydepressingtheaccelerator
pedal.
Thecruisecontrolnolongermanagesthe
brakingsystemduringthisperiod.
Simply release the accelerator pedal to return
totheprogrammedspeed.
Iftheprogrammedspeedsettingisexceeded,
thedisplayofthespeedsettingdisappears
andamessage"Cruisecontrolsuspended"
is displayed until the accelerator pedal is
released.
Exceeding the programmed
setting
background
172
70
70
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Driving situations and associated alerts
Tobenefitfromalloftheinformationavailableintheinstrumentpanel,youmustfirstselectthe"DRIVING"displaymode.
Thefollowingtabledescribesthealertsandthemessagesdisplayedforthedifferentdrivingsituations.
Thedisplayofthesealertsisnotsequential.
Indicator Display Associated message Comment
accordingtotheinter-vehicle
distance selected
"Cruise control paused" Systempaused.
Novehicledetected.
accordingtotheinter-vehicle
distance selected
"Cruise control paused" Systempaused.
Avehiclehasbeendetected.
accordingtotheinter-vehicle
distance selected
"Cruise control on" Systemactivated.
Novehicledetected.
accordingtotheinter-vehicle
distance selected
"Cruise control on" Systemactivated.
Avehiclehasbeendetected.
or
"Cruise control suspended" Systemactivated.
Thedriverhastemporarilytakencontrolofthevehicleby
accelerating.
background
173
4
70
70
70
70
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Indicator Display Associated message Comment
+
"Takebackcontrolofthe
vehicle"
Thedrivershouldtakecontrolofthevehiclebyacceleratingor
braking,dependingonthecircumstances(sharpcurve).
+
"Takebackcontrolofthe
vehicle"
Thesystemcannotmanagethecriticalsituationalone
(emergencybrakingofthetargetvehicle,rapidinsertionof
anothervehiclebetweenthetwovehicles).
The driver must immediately take back control of the
vehicle.
or
"Activation not possible,
conditions unsuitable"
The system refuses to activate the cruise control (speed outside
theoperatingrange,windingroad).
or
accordingtotheinter-vehicle
distance selected and the actual
distancefromthetargetvehicle
"Cruise control paused"
(for a few seconds)
Thesystemhasbroughtthevehicletoacompletestopandis
holdingitimmobilised.
Thedrivershouldacceleratetomoveoffagain.
The cruise control remains paused until the driver reactivates it
withthespeedofthevehicleabove18mph(30km/h).
background
174
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Limits of operation
Thesystemcannotexceedthelimitsofthe
lawsofphysics.
It is recommended that the system be
deactivated when the "space-saver" spare
wheelisinuse.
The system should not be activated when
towingatrailer.
In certain critical situations, the system will
encouragethedrivertoimmediatelytakeback
control:
- if the vehicle in front slows down too much
or too suddenly, and the driver does not
brake,
- if a vehicle comes between your vehicle
andthevehicleinfront.
Astheradar'sfieldofdetectionisquitenarrow,
itispossiblethatthesystemmaynotdetect:
- vehicles of reduced width (motorcycles,
scooters...),
- vehiclesnotrunninginthemiddleofthe
lane,
- vehiclesenteringacorner,
- vehiclessuddenlypullingout.
Thecruisecontroldoesnottakeaccountof:
- pedestrians, cyclists, animals,
- stationaryvehicles(trafficjam,redlight,
breakdown...),
- vehiclescrossingajunction,
- vehiclesdrivingintheoppositedirection.
background
176
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Collisionriskalert
Systemprovidingawarningtothedriverthattheirvehicleisatriskofcollisionwiththevehicleinfront.
Thecollisionriskalertsystemcanbeactivated
ordeactivatedinthetouchscreentablet.
In the Driving menu, select the "Settings" tab,
then "Driving aid" and "Collision risk alert".
Thissystemhasbeendesignedto
improvedrivingsafety.
It is the responsibility of the driver to
keepaconstantcheckonthestateof
the traffic, to assess the relative speed
anddistanceofothervehicles.
Thecollisionriskalertsystemcannever
replacetheneedforvigilanceonthe
partofthedriver.
This system operates from 20 mph
(30km/h),onlywhenothervehiclesare
runninginthesamedirectionasyour
vehicle;thesystemdoesnotdetect
stationaryobjects.Aradarisfittedat
thefrontofthevehicle.
The alert thresholds determine how you want to
bealertedtothepresenceofavehiclerunning
infrontofyou.
Youcanchoosefromthreethresholds:
- 1:"Distant".
- 2:"Normal".
- 3:"Close".
Setting the thresholds for
the alert
This function can be deactivated
permanently by a CITROËN dealer
oraqualifiedworkshop.
In the Driving menu, select the "Settings" tab,
then "Driving aid" and select the symbol for
the "Collision risk alert"function:
F modifythealertthresholdusingthearrows
orthecursor.
background
177
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Thechangefromonelevelofalert
tothenexttakesplaceifthedriving
conditionsdonotchange(speed
unchanged,nochangeoflane...)
Severe weather conditions (very heavy
rain, accumulation of snow in front
of the radar) may interfere with the
operationofthesystem,resultingin
thedisplayofthemessage"SYSTEM
INACTIVE:Reducedvisibility".The
system remains unavailable until the
messagedisappears.
Ifthespeedofyourvehicleistoohigh
whenapproachinganothervehicle,the
firstlevelofalertmaynotbedisplayed:
the level 2 alert may be displayed
directly.
On the other hand, the level 1 alert
isneverdisplayedwiththetriggering
threshold3(close).
Alerts
Accordingtothecollisionriskdetectedbythe
system and the alert threshold chosen, three
levelsofalertcanbetriggered.
Level 1:visualalertonly(orange)
indicatingthatthevehicleinfrontis
veryclose.Themessage"Vehicle
close"isdisplayed.
Level 2:visual(red)andaudible
alertsindicatingthatacollisionis
imminent.Themessage"Brake!" is
displayed.
This level of alert is based on the inter-vehicle
timebetweenyourvehicleandtheoneinfront.
This level of alert is based on a time before
collision.Ittakesaccountofthevehicle
dynamics, the speed of your vehicle and
thespeedofthevehicleinfront,thedriving
conditions, the situation with your vehicle
(cornering,pedalspressed,etc.)totriggerthe
alertattherightmoment.
Operating fault
In the event of a fault, you are alerted
bythedisplayoftheServicewarning
lamp,accompaniedbyamessage.
Consult a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshop.
The operation of the radar, located in
the front bumper, may be disturbed by
accumulationsofgrime(dust,mud...)
or in certain weather conditions (snow,
ice...).
Themessage"SYSTEMINACTIVE:
Visibilityreduced"isdisplayedtosignal
that the system has been put into
standby.
Cleanthefrontbumperregularly.
background
178
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Assistedlanedeparturewarningsystem
Usingacameraplacedatthetopofthewindscreentoidentifylanemarkingsontheground,thissystemscorrectsthetrajectoryofthevehiclewhile
alertingthedriverifitdetectsariskofinvoluntarycrossingofaline.
Thissystemisparticularlyusefulonmotorwaysandmainroads.
Theassistedlanedeparturewarning
system cannot, in any circumstances,
replacetheneedforvigilanceonthepart
ofthedriver.
The driver remains responsible for the
vehicleinallcircumstances.Thesystem
helpsthedriveronlywhenthereisarisk
ofthevehicleinvoluntarilywandering
fromthelaneitisbeingdrivenon.
Itdoesnotmanagethesafedriving
distance, the speed of the vehicle or the
brakes.
Thedrivermustholdthesteeringwheel
inawaythatallowscontroltobetaken
backincircumstanceswherethesystem
is not able to intervene (where there are
nolanemarkings,forexample).
Itisnecessarytoobservethedriving
regulationsandtakeabreakevery
twohours.
OperationConditions for operation
The speed of the vehicle must be between 40
and112mph(65and180km/h).
Thecarriagewaymusthaveatleastonelane
marking(solidorbroken)ontheground.
The driver must hold the wheel with both
hands.
Thechangeoftrajectoryisnotaccompaniedby
operationofthedirectionindicators.
TheESCsystemmustbeactivated.
Oncethesystemidentifiesariskofthevehicle
involuntarilycrossingoneofthelanemarkings
detected,itmakesthecorrectiontothe
trajectorynecessarytoreturnthevehicletoits
initialpath.
Thedriverwillthennoticeaturningmovement
ofthesteeringwheel.
Thiswarninglampflashesduring
trajectorycorrection.
If the driver wishes to maintain the
trajectoryofthevehicle,theycan
preventthecorrectionbykeepingafirm
griponthewheel(duringanavoiding
manoeuvre,forexample).
The correction is interrupted if the
directionindicatorsareoperated.
background
179
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
However,withthe"Blindspotmonitoring
system"activated,ifthedriverstartschanging
lane and another vehicle is detected in the
vehicle'sblindspot,thesystemwillcorrect
thetrajectoryofthevehicleeventhoughthe
directionindicatorsareon.
For more information on the Blind spot
monitoring system,refertothecorresponding
section.
If the system detects that the driver is
notholdingthewheelfirmlyenough
duringanautomaticcorrectionof
trajectory,itinterruptsthecorrection.
Analertistriggeredtoencourage
thedrivertotakebackcontrolofthe
vehicle.
Activation / Deactivation
Activation/deactivationofthesystemisdone
in the Drivingmenuofthetouchscreentablet.
Select the "Driving assistance" tab then
"Help staying in lane".
The state of the system stays in memory when
theignitionisswitchedoff.
While the direction indicators are on and for
afewsecondsafterswitchingthemoff,the
systemconsidersthatanychangeoftrajectory
isvoluntaryandnocorrectionistriggered
duringthisperiod.
background
180
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Driving situations and associated alerts
Tobenefitfromalloftheinformationneededintheinstrumentpanel,youmustfirstselectthe"Driving"displaymode.
Thetablebelowdescribesthealertsandmessagesdisplayedaccordingtothedrivingsituation.
Thedisplayofthesealertsisnotsequential.
State of
the system
Warning
lamp
Associated display
and message
Comment
OFF Systemdeactivated.
ON Systemactive,conditionsnotmet:
- speedbelow40mph(65km/h),
- nolanemarkingrecognised,
- ESCdeactivatedoroperationtriggered,
- "sporty"driving.
ON Automaticdeactivation/standbyofthesystem(forexample:detectionofatrailer,useofthe
"space-saver"sparewheelprovidedwiththevehicle).
ON Detectionoflanemarkings.
Speedabove40mph(65km/h).
ON Thesystemcorrectsthetrajectoryonthesideofthelanemarkingdetected.
ON
"Takebackthewheel".
- If,duringcorrection,thesystemdetectsthatthedriverhasnotheldthewheelforafew
seconds,itinterruptsthecorrectionandreturnscontroltothedriver.
- Duringcorrectionofthetrajectory,thesystemdeterminesthatthecorrectionwillnotbe
enoughandasolidlineiscrossed:thedriveriswarnedthattheymustcompletethecorrection
oftrajectory.
background
181
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Limits of operation
Thesystemgoesintostandby
automaticallyinthefollowingcases:
- ESC deactivated or operation
triggered,
- speedbelow40mph(65km/h)or
above112mph(180km/h),
- connected electrically to a trailer,
- use of the "space-saver" spare
wheel detected (as detection is
not immediate, deactivation of the
system is recommended),
- dynamicdrivingstyledetected,
pressureonthebrakeor
accelerator pedal,
- drivingwheretherearenolane
markings,
- operation of the direction indicators,
- drivinginatightcorner,
- inactivity by the driver detected
duringcorrection.
The system may not operate correctly
oratallinthefollowingsituations:
- conditions of poor visibility
(inadequatestreetlighting,
snowfall,rain,fog),
- dazzle(headlampsofononcoming
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a
wetroadsurface,leavingatunnel,
alternatinglightandshade),
- area of the windscreen in front of
the camera dirty, misted, frosted,
snow-covered,damagedor
coveredbyasticker,
- roadmarkingsabsent,worn,
hidden (snow, mud) or multiple
(roadworks),
- runningclosetothevehicleinfront
(thelanemarkingsmaynotbe
detected),
- narrow,twistyroads.
Risk of undesirable operation
Deactivation of the system is recommended in
thefollowingsituations:
- drivingonaroadsurfaceinpoorcondition,
- unfavorable weather conditions,
- drivingonslipperysurfaces(blackice).
Thesystemisnotdesignedforthefollowing
drivingsituations:
- drivingonaspeedcircuit,
- drivingwithatrailer,
- drivingonarollingroad,
- drivingonunstablesurfaces.
In the event of a fault with the system, you are
alertedbytheilluminationofthesewarning
lamps in the instrument panel, accompanied by
thedisplayofamessageandanaudiblesignal.
HavethesystemcheckedbyaCITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Operating fault
background
182
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Blindspotmonitoringsystem
Activation / Deactivation
Awarninglampappearsinthedoormirroron
thesideinquestion:
- immediately,whenbeingovertaken,
- after a delay of about one second, when
overtakingavehicleslowly.
Thisdrivingassistancesystemwarnsthedriver
of the presence of another vehicle in the blind
spotangleoftheirvehicle(areasmaskedfrom
thedriver'sfieldofvision),assoonasthis
presentsapotentialdanger.
Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers
monitortheblindspots.
Thissystemisdesignedtoimprovesafetywhendrivingandisinnocircumstancesa
substitutefortheuseoftheinteriorrearviewmirroranddoormirrors.Itisthedriver's
responsibilitytoconstantlycheckthetraffic,toassessthedistancesandrelativespeedsof
othervehiclesandtopredicttheirmovementsbeforedecidingwhethertochangelane.
Theblindspotmonitoringsystemcanneverreplacetheneedforvigilanceonthepartofthe
driver.
Activation of the function is done in the touch
screentablet.
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
assistance" tab, then "Blind spot
monitoring".
This indicator lamp comes on in the
instrumentpanel.
The state of the system remains in memory on
switchingofftheignition.
F To deactivate the system, select "Blind
spot monitoring"againinthe"Driving
assistance" tab of the Drivingmenu.
Theindicatorlampgoesoff.
The system is automatically deactivated
whentowingwithatowbarapprovedby
CITROËN.
background
183
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Thealertisgivenbyawarninglampwhich
comes on in the door mirror on the side in
question as soon as a vehicle - car, lorry,
bicycle-isdetectedandthefollowing
conditionsarefulfilled:
- allvehiclesaremovinginthesame
directionandinadjacentlanes,
- the speed of your vehicle is between 7 and
87mph(12and140km/h),
- youovertakeavehiclewithaspeed
differenceoflessthan6mph(10km/h),
- avehicleovertakesyouwithaspeed
differenceoflessthan15mph(25km/h),
- thetrafficisflowingnormally,
- inthecaseofanovertakingmanoeuvre,
ifthisisprolongedandthevehiclebeing
overtakenremainsintheblindspot,
- youaredrivingonastraightorslightly
curved road,
- yourvehicleisnotpullingatrailer,a
caravan...
Noalertwillbegiveninthefollowingsituations:
- inthepresenceofnon-movingobjects
(parkedvehicles,barriers,streetlamps,
roadsigns...),
- withvehiclesmovingintheopposite
direction,
- drivingonawindingroadorasharpcorner,
Operation
- whenovertaking(orbeingovertakenby)a
verylongvehicle(lorry,coach...)whichis
at the same time detected at the rear in the
blindspotangleandpresentinthedriver's
forward field of vision,
- inveryheavytraffic:vehiclesdetectedin
front and behind are confused with a lorry
orastationaryobject,
- whenovertakingquickly.
background
184
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Intheeventofafault,thiswarning
lamp flashes for a few moments in
the instrument panel, accompanied
byamessage.
Operating fault
HaveitcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
The system may suffer temporary
interference in certain weather
conditions(rain,hail...).
Inparticular,drivingonawetsurface
ormovingfromadryareatoawetarea
cancausefalsealerts(forexample,the
presenceofafogofwaterdropletsin
theblindspotangleisinterpretedasa
vehicle).
In bad or wintry weather, ensure that
the sensors are not covered by mud, ice
orsnow.
Takecarenottocoverthewarningzone
in the door mirrors or the detection
zones on the front and rear bumpers
withadhesivelabelsorotherobjects;
they may hamper the correct operation
ofthesystem.
High pressure jet wash
Whenwashingyourvehicle,directthe
lanceatleast30cmawayfromthe
sensors.
Inadditiontothefixedwarninglampinthedoor
mirror on the side in question, a correction of
trajectorywillbefeltifyoucrossalanemarking
with the direction indicators on, to help you
avoidacollision.
Conditions for operation
Thefollowingsystemsmustbeactivated:
- blindspotmonitoring,
- activelanedeparturewarning.
Active blind spot
monitoring system
For more information on the Blind spot
monitoring system and the Active lane
departure warning system, refer to the
correspondingsections.
background
185
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Fatiguedetectionsystem
Itisrecommendedthatyoutakeabreakassoonasyoufeeltiredoratleasteverytwohours.
Dependingonversion,thevehicleeitherhasthe"Drivingtimewarningsystem"only,orthiscombinedwiththe"Fatiguedetectionsystem".
Driving time warning
Thesystemtriggersanalertonceitdetectsthat
thedriverhasnottakenabreakaftertwohours
ofdrivingataspeedabove40mph(65km/h).
Thisalerttakestheformofthedisplayofa
messageencouragingyoutotakeabreak,
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignal.
If the driver does not follow this advice, the
alert is repeated hourly until the vehicle is
stopped.
The system cannot in any
circumstances replace the need for
vigilanceonthepartofthedriver.
Donottakethewheelifyouaretired.
As soon as the speed of the vehicle
dropsbelow40mph(65km/h),the
systemgoesintostandby.
Thedrivingtimeiscountedagainonce
thespeedisabove40mph(65km/h).
Thesystemresetsitselfifoneofthefollowing
conditionsismet:
- enginerunning,thevehiclehasbeen
stationary for more than 15 minutes,
- theignitionhasbeenswitchedoffforafew
minutes,
- thedriver'sseatbeltisunfastenedand
theirdoorisopen.
The system is activated or deactivated in the
touchscreentablet.
Activation / Deactivation
In the Driving menu, select the "Settings" tab,
then "Driving aids" and "Fatigue Detection
System".
background
186
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Fatigue detection system
Dependingonversion,the"Drivingtime
warningsystem"maybecombinedwiththe
"Fatiguedetectionsystem".
Usingacameraplacedatthetopofthe
windscreen,thesystemassessesthedriver's
levelofvigilancebyidentifyingvariationsin
trajectorycomparedtothelanemarkings.
This system is particularly suited to fast roads
(speedhigherthan40mph(65km/h)).
Once the system considers that the behaviour
ofthevehiclesuggestsacertainleveloffatigue
orinattentionbythedriver,ittriggersthefirst
levelofalert.
Thedriveristhenalertedbythemessage
"Take care!", accompanied by an audible
signal.
Afterthreefirstlevelalerts,thesystemtriggers
anewalertwiththemessage"Take a break!",
accompanied by a more pronounced audible
signal.
Incertaindrivingconditions(poorroad
surfaceorstrongwinds),thesystem
maygivealertsindependentofthe
driver'slevelofvigilance.
Thefollowingsituationsmayinterfere
with operation of the system or prevent
itworking:
- poorvisibility(inadequatelighting
oftheroadway,fallingsnow,heavy
rain,densefog,...),
- dazzle(headlampsofanoncoming
vehicle, low sun, reflections on
adamproad,leavingatunnel,
alternatingshadeandlight,...),
- windscreen area located in front
ofthecamera:dirty,misted,frost-
covered,snow-covered,damaged
orcoveredbyasticker,
- lanemarkingsabsent,worn,
masked(snow,mud)ormultiple
(roadworks,...),
- close to the vehicle ahead (lane
markingsnotdetected),
- roadsthatarenarrow,winding,...
background
187
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Thissystemindicatestheproximityofan
obstacle(examples:pedestrian,vehicle,tree,
gate)whichcomeswithinthefieldofdetection
ofsensorslocatedinthebumper.
Certaintypesofobstacle(examples:stake,
roadworkscone)detectedinitiallywillnolonger
be detected at the end of the manoeuvre, if
theyarelocatedinblindspotsinthesensors'
fieldofdetection.
Parkingsensors
This system cannot in any
circumstances replace the need for
vigilanceonthepartofthedriver.
Thesystemisswitchedonbyengagingreverse
gear.
Thisisconfirmedbyanaudiblesignal.
The system is switched off when you come out
ofreversegear.
Audible assistance
Theproximityinformationisgivenbyan
intermittentaudiblesignal,thefrequencyofwhich
increasesasthevehicleapproachestheobstacle.
Thesoundemittedbythespeaker(rightorleft)
indicatesthesideonwhichtheobstacleislocated.
When the distance between the vehicle and
theobstaclebecomeslessthanapproximately
thirtycentimetres,theaudiblesignalbecomes
continuous.
Rear parking sensors
Visual assistance
Thissupplementstheaudiblesignalby
displayingbarsinthescreenortheinstrument
panelwhichmoveprogressivelynearerto
thevehicle.Whentheobstacleisnear,the
"Danger"symbolisdisplayed.
background
188
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Front parking sensors
Thesoundemittedbythespeaker(front
or rear) indicates whether the obstacle
isinfrontorbehind.
The system will be deactivated
automaticallyifatrailerisbeing
towed or a bicycle carrier is fitted on
a towbar (vehicle fitted with a towbar
installedinlinewiththemanufacturer's
recommendations).
In bad weather or in winter, ensure
that the sensors are not covered with
mud,iceorsnow.Whenreversegearis
engaged,anaudiblesignal(longbeep)
indicatesthatthesensorsmaybedirty.
Certain sound sources (motorcycle,
lorry,pneumaticdrill,etc.)maytrigger
theaudiblesignalsoftheparking
sensorsystem.
Asanadditiontotherearparkingsensors,the
frontparkingsensorsaretriggeredwhenan
obstacle is detected in front and the speed of
thevehicleremainsbelow6mph(10km/h).
Thefrontparkingsensorsareinterruptedif
the vehicle stops for more than three seconds
inforwardgear,ifnofurtherobstaclesare
detected or when the speed of the vehicle
exceeds6mph(10km/h).
Theparkingsensorscanbedeactivatedinthe
touchscreentablet.
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
assistance" tab, then "Parking sensors".
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of
thesystem,whenreversegearis
engaged,thiswarninglampflashes
for a few moments then stays on
continuously.
This indicator comes on in the
instrumentpanel.
Anewselectionreactivatesthefunction.
High pressure jet wash
Whenwashingyourvehicle,donot
directthelancewithin30cmofthe
sensors.
Theparkingsensorsaredeactivated
whiletheParkAssistsystemis
measuringaspace.
For more information on Park Assist,
refertothecorrespondingsection.
Deactivation / Activation of
the front and rear parking
sensors
Amessageappears,accompaniedbyan
audiblesignal.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
background
189
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Reversingcamera
Cleanthereversingcameraregularly
usingasoft,drycloth.
Thereversingcameraisactivatedautomatically
whenreversegearisengaged.
Dependingonversion,theimageisdisplayedin
thetouchscreentabletortheinstrumentpanel.
Thesuperimposedrepresentationofguide
lineshelpswiththemanoeuvre.
Thebluelinesrepresentthegeneraldirection
of the vehicle (the difference corresponds to
thewidthofyourvehiclewithoutthemirrors).
The red lines represent a distance of about
30cmbeyondtheedgeofyourvehicle'srear
bumper.
Thegreenlinesrepresentdistancesofabout1
and2metresbeyondtheedgeofyourvehicle's
rearbumper.
The turquoise blue curves represent the
maximumturningcircle.
Thereversingcameracannotinany
circumstances replace the need for
vigilanceonthepartofthedriver.
Openingthetailgatecausesthedisplay
todisappear.
Thereversingcamerafunctionmaybe
completedwithparkingsensors.
High pressure jet washing
Whenwashingyourvehicle,donot
directthelancewithin30cmofthe
cameralens.
Theyarerepresentedbylinesmarked
"ontheground"anddonotallowthe
position of the vehicle to be determined
relativetotallobstacles(forexample:
othervehicles,...).
Somedeformationoftheimageisnormal.
It is normal to be able to see part of
the number plate at the bottom of the
screen.
background
190
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
360Vision
This system provides a view in the instrument
panelofthenearsurroundingsofyourvehicle,
usingcamerasmountedatthefrontandrearof
yourvehicleandunderthedoormirrors.
Dependingontheangleofviewchosen(front
view,rearviewor360°panoramicview),
360Visionprovidesspecialvisualassistance
inparticulardrivingconditionssuchaswhen
enteringablindjunctionormanoeuvringin
areasofreducedvisibility.
Once activated, this function operates up to
9mph(15km/h).Above18mph(30km/h),the
functionisdeactivatedautomatically.
This system is a visual aid which in no
circumstances can replace the need for
vigilanceonthepartofthedriver.
Theimagesprovidedbythecameras
maybedeformedbytherelief.The
presence of areas in shade, in sunny
conditions,oroflowambientlightmay
darkentheimageandreducecontrast.
Forward vision
The camera located in the front bumper is
activated and views of the areas located at
frontleftandfrontrightappearsimultaneously
intheinstrumentpanel.
Rear vision
Thecameralocatedinthetailgateisactivated
and the view of the area behind your vehicle is
displayed in the instrument panel and behaves
likeareversingcamera,whatevertheposition
ofthegearselectorlever.
The blue lines represent the width of your
vehicle(excludingmirrors):theymove
accordingtothepositionofthesteeringwheel.
Theredlinerepresentsadistanceof30cm
fromtherearbumper,andthetwogreen
lines, 1 m and 2 m from the rear bumper,
respectively.
Rear vision is displayed automatically
whenengagingreverse,regardlessof
thestateofthesystem.
background
191
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Operation
Activating the function
Withtheenginerunning:
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
assistance" tab, then "Panoramic visual
aid".
With this menu displayed, select one of the
threeviews:
Deactivating the function
F Acceleratesoastoexceed18mph
(30km/h).
or
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
assistance" tab, then "Panoramic visual
aid".
F Select"CameraOff".
Checkthecleanlinessofthecamera
lensesregularly.
High pressure jet wash
Whenwashingyourvehicle,directthe
lanceatleast30cmawayfromthe
camera.
"Frontcamera".
"360°camera".
"Rearcamera".
The view selected is displayed in the
instrumentpanel.
360 vision
The cameras located in the front and rear
bumpers and under the door mirrors are
activated and a reconstruction of the view from
aboveyourvehicleinitsimmediatesurroundings
isdisplayedintheinstrumentpanel.
Openingadoororthetailgatedisturbs
the360andrearviews.
Fittingtheverycoldconditionsscreen
affectstheimagetransmittedbythe
frontcamera.
The display in the instrument panel
disappearsabove9mph(15km/h).
Theimagetransmittedbythecamera
canbeslightlyaffectedbythepresence
oftheverycoldconditionsscreen.
background
192
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
ParkAssist
This system provides active assistance with
parking.Itdetectsaparkingspacethen
operatesthesteeringtoparkinthespace.
Itoperatesthesteeringwhilethedriver
managestheaccelerator,brakes,gearsand
clutch(manualgearbox).Duringphasesof
entryintoandexitfromaparkingspace,the
system provides visual and audible information
tothedriverinordertomakethemanoeuvres
safe.Itmaybenecessarytomoveforwards
andbackwardsmorethanonce.
Duringamanoeuvrethesteering
wheelturnsquickly:donotholdthe
steeringwheel,donotplaceyourhands
betweenthespokesofthesteering
wheelandtakecarewithlooseand
bulkyclothing,scarves,handbags...
Thereisariskofinjury.
WhenParkAssistisactivated,it
preventsachangetoSTOPmodeof
Stop&Start.InSTOPmode,activation
ofParkAssistrestartstheengine.
TheParkAssistsystemcannotinany
circumstances replace the need for
vigilanceonthepartofthedriver.
The driver must remain in control
oftheirvehicleensuringthatthe
spaceremainsclearthroughoutthe
manoeuvre.
In some circumstances, the sensors
may not detect small obstacles located
intheirblindspots.
Thedrivercantakecontrolatanytimeby
grippingthesteeringwheel.
TheParkAssistsystemprovidesassistancefor
thefollowingmanoeuvres:
A. Entryintoaparallelparkingspace
B. Exitfromaparallelparkingspace
C. Bayparking
TheParkAssistsystemtakescontrol
ofthepowersteeringforamaximum
of4manoeuvrecycles.Thefunction
isdeactivatedafterthese4cycles.
Ifyouthinkthatyourvehicleisnot
positioned correctly, you should then
takecontrolofthesteeringtocarryout
themanoeuvre.
TheParkAssistsystemcannotwork
withtheengineoff.
background
193
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
The sequence of manoeuvres and the
drivinginstructionsaredisplayedinthe
instrumentpanel.
Youshouldalwayscheckthe
surroundingsofyourvehiclebefore
startingamanoeuvre.
The assistance is
deactivated:thedisplayof
this symbol indicates that
thesteeringmanoeuvres
arenolongercontrolledby
thesystem:youmusttake
controlofthesteering.
The assistance is
activated:thedisplayofthis
symbol and a speed limit
indicatethatthesteering
manoeuvres are controlled
bythesystem:donottouch
thesteeringwheel.
Theparksensorsfunctionisnot
availableduringparkingspace
measurement.Itinterveneslaterwhen
manoeuvringtowarnyouthatyour
vehicleisapproachinganobstacle:the
audiblesignalbecomescontinuous
when the obstacle is less than thirty
centimetresaway.
Ifyouhavedeactivatedtheparking
sensors, they are automatically
reactivatedduringassistedparking
manoeuvres.
ActivationofParkAssistinhibitsthe
blindspotmonitoringsystem.
background
194
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Operation
Assistance with parallel parking
manoeuvres
F Pressthisbutton.
Toenteraparkingspace,thesystem
does not identify spaces that are clearly
smallerorlargerthanthevehicle.
This indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel to confirm activation
ofthefunction.
F Limit the speed of the vehicle to
amaximumof12mph(20km/h)
and select "Enter parallel
parking space" in the touch
screentablet.
F Operate the direction indicator on the
parkingsidechosentoactivatethe
measurementfunction.Youshoulddrive
atadistanceofbetween0.5mand1.5m
fromtherowofparkedvehicles.
F Driveslowlyfollowingtheinstructionsuntil
thesystemfindsafreespace.
F Whenyouhaveidentifiedaparkingspace.
background
195
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
F Moveforwardsslowlyuntilamessageis
displayed, accompanied by an audible
signal,askingyoutoengagereversegear.
F Selectreverse,releasethesteeringwheel
andstartmovingwithoutexceeding4mph
(7km/h).
F Theassistedparkingmanoeuvreisin
progress.
Withoutexceeding4mph(7km/h),move
forwardsandbackwards,aidedbythe
warningsfromthe"Parkingsensors"
system, until the indication of the end of the
manoeuvre.
F Attheendofthemanoeuvre,theoperating
indicatorlampgoesoutintheinstrument
panel,accompaniedbyamessageandan
audiblesignal.
Theassistanceisdeactivated:youcan
takeovercontrol.
background
196
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Assistance in exiting from a
parallel parking space
F With the vehicle stationary, press
thisbutton.
F Press on "Exit parallel parking
space" in the touch screen
tablet.
F Operatethedirectionindicatorfortheexit
sidechosen.
F Engagereverseorforwardgearand
releasethesteeringwheel.
F Theassistedparkingmanoeuvreisin
progress.Withoutexceeding3mph
(5km/h),moveforwardsandbackwards,
aidedbythewarningsfromthe"Parking
sensors" system, until the indication of the
endofthemanoeuvre.
F Whenyouwanttoleaveaparallelparking
space,starttheengine.
This indicator lamp comes on in
the instrument panel to confirm
activationofthefunction.
Themanoeuvreiscompletewhenthevehicle's
frontwheelsareclearoftheparkingspace.
At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp
intheinstrumentpanelgoesoff,accompanied
byamessageandanaudiblesignal.
Theassistanceisdeactivated:youcantake
overcontrol.
background
197
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
F Once you have identified a
parkingzone,pressthisbutton.
Assistance with bay parking
manoeuvres
This indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel to confirm activation
ofthefunction.
F Operate the direction indicator on the
parkingsidechosentoactivatethe
measurementfunction.Youshoulddrive
atadistanceofbetween0.5mand1.5m
fromtherowofparkedvehicles.
F Driveslowlyfollowingtheinstructionsuntil
thesystemfindsafreespace.
F Moveforwardsslowlyuntilamessageis
displayed, accompanied by an audible
signal,askingyoutoengagereversegear.
F Limit the speed of the vehicle to
amaximumof12mph(20km/h)
and select "Enter bay parking
space" on the touch screen
tablet.
When several successive bays are
found, the vehicle will be directed
towardsthelastone.
background
198
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
F Selectreverse,releasethesteeringwheel
andstartmovingwithoutexceeding4mph
(7km/h).
F Theassistedparkingmanoeuvreisin
progress.
Withoutexceeding4mph(7km/h),follow
the instructions displayed in the instrument
panel,aidedbythewarningsfromthe
"Parkingsensors"system,untilthe
indicationoftheendofthemanoeuvre.
Attheendofthemanoeuvre,theoperating
indicatorlampgoesoffintheinstrumentpanel,
accompaniedbyamessageandanaudible
signal.
Theassistanceisdeactivated:youcantake
overcontrol.
Duringparkingandexitfrom
parkingmanoeuvres,thereversing
camera function may come into
operation.Itfacilitatesmonitoringof
thesurroundingsofthevehicle,by
displayingadditionalinformationinthe
instrumentpanel.
For more information on the Reversing
camera,refertothecorresponding
section.
Duringabayparkingmanoeuvre,the
ParkAssistsystemisautomatically
deactivated once the rear of the vehicle
iswithin50cmofanobstacle.
background
199
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Thesystemisdeactivatedbypressingthe
control.
Thesystemisdeactivatedautomatically:
- onswitchingofftheignition,
- iftheenginestalls,
- if no manoeuvre is started within 5 minutes
of selection of the type of manoeuvre,
- afteraprolongedstopofthevehicleduring
a manoeuvre,
- iftheroadwheelanti-slipregulation(ASR)
istriggered,
- ifthespeedofthevehicleexceedsthe
stated limit,
- when the driver interrupts movement of the
steeringwheel,
- after 4 manoeuvre cycles,
- onopeningthedriver'sdoor,
- if one of the front wheels encounters an
obstacle.
Theoperationindicatorlampgoesoffinthe
instrumentpanelandamessageisdisplayed
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignal.
Thedrivershouldthentakebackcontrolofthe
vehicle'ssteering.
Deactivation
Thesystemisswitchedoffautomatically:
- whentowingatrailer,connected
electrically,
- ifthedriver'sdoorisopened,
- if the speed of the vehicle is above 42 mph
(70km/h).
Toswitchthesystemofforaprolongedperiod,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Operating faults
In the event of a fault with the power
steering,thiswarninglampflashesin
the instrument panel, accompanied
byamessage.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Switching off
If the lateral distance between your
vehicleandthespaceistoogreat,the
system may not be able to measure the
space.
Anythingprojectingbeyondtheenvelope
of the vehicle (a ladder on the roof, for
example)isnottakenintoaccountbythe
ParkAssistsystemduringamanoeuvre.
In bad weather or in winter, ensure that
the sensors are not covered by road
dirt,iceorsnow.
In the event of a fault, have the system
checkedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Ifthesystemisdeactivatedduringa
manoeuvre, the drive should reactivate
ittorepeatthemeasurement.
Intheeventofafault,thiswarning
lamp flashes for a few seconds,
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignal.
Ifthefaultoccursduringtheuse
ofthesystem,thewarninglamp
goesoff.
High pressure jet washing
Whenwashingyourvehicle,keepthe
lanceatleast30cmawayfromthe
sensors.
background
200
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Under-inationdetection
The system monitors the pressures in the four
tyres,oncethevehicleismoving.
Itcomparestheinformationgivenbythefour
wheel speed sensors with reference values,
which must be reinitialised every time the
tyre pressures are adjusted or a wheel
changed.
Thesystemtriggersanalertassoonasit
detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one
ormoretyres.
The under-inflation detection system
doesnotreplacetheneedforvigilance
onthepartofthedriver.
This system does not avoid the need to
checkthetyrepressures(includingthe
spare wheel) every month as well as
beforealongjourney.
Drivingwithunder-inflatedtyresimpairs
roadholding,extendsbrakingdistances
and causes premature tyre wear,
particularly under arduous conditions
(highloading,highspeed,longjourney).
Systemwhichautomaticallychecksthepressuresofthetyreswhiledriving.
The inflation pressures defined for
your vehicle can be found on the tyre
pressurelabel.
For more information on the
Identification markings, refer to the
correspondingsection.
Tyrepressuresshouldbechecked
when the tyres are "cold" (vehicle
stoppedfor1hourorafterajourneyof
lessthan6miles(10km)atmoderate
speeds).
Otherwise(whenhot),add0.3barto
thepressuresshownonthelabel.
Drivingwithunder-inflatedtyres
increasesfuelconsumption.
background
201
4
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Under-inflation alert Reinitialisation
Thisisgivenbyfixedilluminationof
thiswarninglamp,accompaniedby
anaudiblesignaland,dependingon
equipment,thedisplayofamessage.
It is necessary to reinitialise the system every
timeoneormoretyrepressuresareadjusted,
andafterchangingoneormorewheels.
F Reduce speed immediately, avoid
excessivesteeringmovementsandsudden
braking.
F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
todoso.
F In the event of a puncture, use the
temporarypuncturerepairkitorthespare
wheel(dependingonequipment),
or
F if you have a compressor, such as the one
inthetemporarypuncturerepairkit,check
the pressures of the four tyres when cold,
or
F ifitisnotpossibletomakethischeck
immediately, drive carefully at reduced
speed.
The loss of pressure detected does not
alwayscausevisiblebulgingofthetyre.
Donotsatisfyyourselfwithjustavisual
check.
The alert is maintained until the system
isreinitialised.
Snow chains
The system does not have to be
reinitialisedafterfittingorremoving
snowchains.
Beforereinitialisingthesystem,ensure
that the pressures of the four tyres are
correct for the use of the vehicle and in
line with the recommendations on the
tyrepressurelabel.
The under-inflation alert can only
be relied on if the reinitialisation of
the system has been done with the
pressures in the four tyres correctly
adjusted.
The under-inflation detection system
doesnotgiveawarningifapressureis
incorrectatthetimeofreinitialisation.
background
202
Driving
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap04_conduite_ed01-2016
Reinitialisation of the system is done in the
touchscreentablet,withtheignitiononandthe
vehiclestationary.
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
assistance" tab then "Under-inflation
initialisation".
F Confirmtheinstructionbypressing"Yes",
anaudiblesignalandamessageconfirm
thereinitialisation.
Thenewpressuresettingsregisteredare
considered to be reference values by the
system.
Operating fault
Theflashingandthenfixedilluminationofthe
under-inflationwarninglampaccompanied
byilluminationoftheServicewarninglamp
indicatesafaultwiththesystem.
Amessageappears,accompaniedbyan
audiblesignal.
Beforedoinganythingtothesystem,
the pressures of the four tyres must be
checkedandthesystemreinitialised.
The under-inflation alert can only be
relied on if reinitialisation of the system
is done with the four tyre pressures
correctlyset.
Inthiscase,under-inflationmonitoringofthe
tyresisnolongerassured.
HavethesystemcheckedbyaCITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
background
203
5
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Mirrors
Adjustment
F Move control Atotherightortotheleftto
selectthecorrespondingmirror.
F Move control B in all four directions to
adjust.
F Return control Atothecentralposition.
Eachfittedwithanadjustablemirrorglass
providingthelateralrearwardvisionnecessary
forovertakingorparking.
Theycanalsobefoldedforparkinginconfined
spaces.
Demisting - Defrosting
Door mirrors
Demisting-defrostingofthedoor
mirrorsoperateswiththeengine
running,byswitchingontheheated
rearscreen.
As a safety measure, the mirrors should
beadjustedtoreducethe"blindspots".
Theobjectsobservedare,inreality,
closerthantheyappear.
Takethisintoaccountinorderto
correctlyjudgethedistanceofvehicles
approachingfrombehind.
Folding
F Fromoutside:lockthevehicleusingthe
electronickeyortheKeylessEntryand
Startingsystem.
F Frominside:withtheignitionon,pullthe
control Ainthecentralpositionrearwards.
IfthemirrorsarefoldedusingcontrolA,
they will not unfold when the vehicle is
unlocked.PullagainoncontrolA.
Thefoldingandunfoldingofthedoor
mirrorsusingtheremotecontrolcanbe
deactivated by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshop.
F Fromoutside:unlockthevehicleusingthe
electronickeyortheKeylessEntryand
Startingsystem.
F Frominside:withtheignitionon,pullthe
control Ainthecentralpositionrearwards.
Unfolding
If necessary, it is possible to fold the
mirrorsmanually.
For more information on Demisting -
Defrosting the rear screen, refer to the
correspondingsection.
background
204
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Rear view mirror
Equippedwithananti-dazzlesystem,whichdarkensthemirrorglassandreducesthenuisanceto
thedrivercausedbythesun,headlampsfromothervehicles...
Manual model
Adjustment
F Adjustthemirrorsothattheglassis
directedcorrectlyinthe"day"position.
In order to ensure optimum visibility
duringyourmanoeuvres,themirror
lightensautomaticallywhenreverse
gearisengaged.
Day / night position
F Pullthelevertochangetothe"night"anti-
dazzleposition.
F Pushthelevertochangetothenormal
"day"position.
Automatic "electrochrome"
model
Thissystemautomaticallyandprogressively
changesbetweenthedayandnightusesby
meansofasensor,whichmeasuresthelight
fromtherearofthevehicle.
Automatic tilting in reverse gear
Withtheenginerunning,onengagingreverse
gear,themirrorglassestiltdownwards.
Theyreturntotheirinitialposition:
-
afewsecondsaftercomingoutofreversegear,
- oncethespeedofthevehicleexceeds
6mph(10km/h),
- onswitchingofftheengine.
Systemwhichprovidesaviewoftheground
duringparkingmanoeuvresinreversegear.
This function can be deactivated in the Driving
menu.
F Select the "Setting" tab then "Comfort"
and "Auto mirror dipping in reverse".
background
205
5
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Child surveillance mirror
A child surveillance mirror is fitted above the
rearviewmirror.Thisallowsyoutomonitorthe
vehicle’srearpassengers,oritcanfacilitate
conversation between the front and rear
passengerswithouttheneedtomovetherear
viewmirror.
Itcanbefoldedawaytoeliminatedazzle.
background
206
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Lightingcontrolstalk
Main lighting
The various front and rear lamps of the vehicle
aredesignedtoadaptthedriver'svisibility
progressivelyaccordingtotheclimatic
conditions:
- sidelamps, to be seen,
- daytimerunninglampstobemorevisible
duringtheday,
- dipped beam headlamps to see without
dazzlingotherdrivers,
- main beam headlamps to see clearly when
theroadisclear.
Additional lighting
Other lamps are provided to meet the
requirementsofparticulardrivingconditions:
- rearfoglamps,
- frontfoglampswithcorneringlighting,
- directional headlamps for improved
visibilitywhencornering,
- guide-me-homeandwelcomelightingto
facilitate access to the vehicle,
- parkinglampsasvehiclepositionmarkers.
Programming
Thesettingofsomefunctionscanbeadjusted:
- automatic illumination of headlamps,
- automaticheadlampdipping,
- guide-me-homelighting,
- welcomelighting,
- corneringlighting,
- directionallighting.
Insomeweatherconditions(e.g.low
temperature or humidity), the presence
ofmistingontheinternalsurfaceofthe
glassoftheheadlampsandrearlamps
isnormal;itdisappearsafterthelamps
havebeenonforafewminutes.
Travelling abroad
Halogen headlamps
Formotoringincountriesthatdrive
on the other side of the road, it is
necessarytoadapttheadjustmentof
the dipped beams so as to not dazzle
thedriversofapproachingvehicles.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified
workshop.
Xenon headlamps
Thedesignofthedippedbeam
headlamps allows you to drive in a
country that drives on the other side
of the road, without the need for any
modification.
In the event of the failure of one or more
bulbs,amessageadvisesyoutocheck
thelamp(s)inquestion.
Selectionandcontrolofthevariousfrontandrearlampsprovidingthevehicle'slighting.
background
207
5
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Displays
Illuminationofthecorrespondingindicator
lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the
lightingselectedison.
The rear sidelamps and direction
indicatorsarelocatedonthetailgate.
Whentheyareon,openingthetailgate
automatically transfers illumination to
the lamps located in the rear bumper, to
maintainthesafetyofthevehicle.
Main lighting
Lightingoff(ignitionoff)/
Daytimerunninglamps(enginerunning).
Automaticilluminationofheadlamps.
Daytimerunninglamps/Dipped
beam/Mainbeam.
Sidelamps.
Dippedormainbeamheadlamps.
TurntheringA to place the desired symbol
againstthemark.
Selection of main lighting mode
Model without AUTO lighting
Model with AUTO lighting
Headlamp dipping
PullthestalkB towards you to switch the
lightingbetweendippedandmainbeam
headlamps or to activate automatic headlamp
dipping.
Inthelightingoffandsidelampsmodes,the
driver can switch on the main beam headlamps
temporarily("headlampflash")bymaintaininga
pullonthestalk.
background
208
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Model with rear foglamps only
Rearfoglamps
RotateandreleasetheringC:
F forwards a first time to switch on the front
foglamps,
F forwards a second time to switch on the
rearfoglamps,
F rearwards a first time to switch off the rear
foglamps,
F rearwards a second time to switch of the
frontfoglamps.
Model with front and rear
foglamps
Foglamps
F Toswitchonthefoglamps,turntheringC
forwards.
Frontandrearfoglamps
F Toswitchoffthefoglamps,turntheringC
rearwards.
When the headlamps switch off with automatic
illumination of headlamps or when the dipped
beam headlamps are switched off manually,
thefoglampsandsidelampsremainon.
F Turntheringrearwardstoswitchoff
thefoglamps,thesidelampswillthen
switchoff.
Whenswitchingoffdippedbeam
manually,therearfoglampsalsogooff.
Thefoglampsoperatewiththedippedandmain
beamheadlamps.
background
209
5
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Operationoftherearfoglampsis
inhibitedwiththetailgateopen.
Openingthetailgatewhentheselamps
are on causes them and their indicator
lampintheinstrumentpaneltogooff.
Theydonotcomebackon
automaticallywhenthetailgateis
closed:theymustbeswitchedonagain
usingthecontrolstalk.
Ingoodorrainyweather,bybothday
andnight,thefrontfoglampsandthe
rearfoglampsareprohibited.Inthese
situations, the power of their beams
maydazzleotherdrivers.Theyshould
onlybeusedinfogorfallingsnow.
In these weather conditions, you should
switchonthefoglampsanddipped
beam headlamps manually, as the
sunshine sensor may detect sufficient
light.
Donotforgettoswitchoffthefrontand
rearfoglampswhentheyarenolonger
necessary.
Switching off the lighting
when switching off the ignition
Whentheignitionisswitchedoff,allofthe
lampsswitchoffimmediately,exceptforthe
dippedbeamheadlampsifautomaticguide-
me-homelightingisactivated.
Switching on the lighting when
switching on the ignition
Toreactivatethelightingcontrolstalk,turn
theringA to position "0"-lightingoff,then
tothepositionofyourchoice.
Whenthedriver'sdoorisopened,a
temporaryaudiblesignalwarnsyouthat
thevehicle'slightingison.
They switch off automatically after a period
whichdependsonthestateofchargeofthe
battery(entrytoenergyeconomymode).
background
210
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Automatic
When the automatic illumination of headlamps
isactivated(lightingcontrolstalkatthe
AUTOposition),iftheambientlightlevelis
low, the dipped beam headlamps come on
automaticallywhenswitchingofftheignition.
Activation or deactivation of the system, as well
astheperiodofoperationoftheguide-me-
homelightingissetinthetouchscreentablet.
F In the Driving menu, select the "Settings"
tab, then "Lighting" and "Guide-me-home
lighting".
Toadjusttheperiodofoperation,selectthe
symbol for the "Guide-me-home lighting"
function.
Parking lamps Guide-me-home lighting
Manual
Deactivation
Themanualguide-me-homelightingswitches
offautomaticallyafterasettime.
The temporary illumination of the dipped beam
headlampsafterthevehicle'signitionhasbeen
switchedoffmakesthedriver'sexiteasier
whenthelightispoor.
Sidemarkersforthevehiclebyilluminationof
thesidelampsonthetrafficsideonly.
F Dependingonversion,withinoneminute
ofswitchingofftheignition,operatethe
lightingcontrolstalkupordowndepending
onthetrafficside(forexample:when
parkingontheleft;lightingcontrolstalk
upwards;therighthandsidelampsareon).
Thisisconfirmedbyanaudiblesignaland
illuminationofthecorrespondingdirection
indicatorwarninglampintheinstrumentpanel.
Toswitchofftheparkinglamps,returnthe
lightingcontrolstalktothecentralposition.
Activation
F Withtheignitionoff,"flash"theheadlamps
usingthelightingstalk.
F A further "headlamp flash" switches the
functionoff.
background
211
5
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Automatic illumination of
headlamps
Activation
F Turntheringtothe"AUTO"position.The
activation of the function is accompanied
bythedisplayofamessage.
Whenalowlevelofambientlightisdetected
by a sunshine sensor, the number plate lamps,
sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are
switched on automatically, without any action
onthepartofthedriver.Theycanalsocome
on if rain is detected, at the same time as
automaticoperationofthewindscreenwipers.
Assoonasthebrightnessreturnstoa
sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers
are switched off, the lamps are switched off
automatically.
Deactivation
F Turntheringtoanotherposition.
Deactivation of the function is
accompaniedbythedisplayofamessage.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of the
sunshinesensor,thelightingcomes
on,thiswarninglampisdisplayed
Infogorsnow,thesunshinesensor
maydetectsufficientlight.Inthis
case,thelightingwillnotcomeon
automatically.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
coupled with the rain sensor and
located in the top of the windscreen
behindtherearviewmirror;the
associatedfunctionswouldnolonger
becontrolled.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
in the instrument panel accompanied by an
audiblesignaland/oramessage.
background
212
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Systemwhichautomaticallychangesbetween
dippedandmainbeamaccordingtothe
ambientlightlevelandthedrivingconditions,
usingacameralocatedatthetopofthe
windscreen.
Thissystemisadrivingaid.
The driver remains responsible for the
vehicle'slighting,itscorrectuseforthe
prevailingconditionsoflight,visibility
andtrafficandobservationofdriving
andvehicleregulations.
The system will be operational as soon
asyouhaveexceeded15mph(25km/h).
If the speed drops below 9 mph
(15km/h),thesystemnolonger
operates.
Automaticheadlampdipping
background
213
5
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
The system may suffer interference or
notworkcorrectly:
- under conditions of poor visibility
(fallingsnow,heavyrainorthick
fog,...),
- if the windscreen is dirty, misted or
obscured(byasticker,...)infrontof
the camera,
- ifthevehicleisfacinghighly
reflectivesigns.
Thesystemisnotabletodetect:
- road users that do not have their
ownlighting,suchaspedestrians,
- roaduserswhoselightingis
obscured,suchasvehiclesrunning
behind a safety barrier (on a
motorway,forexample),
- road users at the top or bottom of
a steep slope, on twisty roads, on
crossroads.
Deactivation
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
assistance" tab, then "Automatic
headlamp dip";thesystemchangesto
"automaticilluminationheadlamps"mode.
To reactivate the system, flash the headlamps
again.
Dependingonthesituation,
these indicator lamps
comeon.
Activation
F Putthelightingcontrolstalkring
in the "AUTO"position.
F In the Driving menu, select "Driving
assistance", then "Automatic headlamp
dip".
Operation
- dipped beam is
maintained, this indicator
lamp comes on in the
instrumentpanel.
F Flash the headlamps
(goingbeyondthepoint
of resistance) to activate
thefunction.
Once the function is activated, the system
operatesasfollows:
Iftheambientlightlevelissufficientand/orif
the traffic conditions do not allow illumination of
themainbeamheadlamps:
Iftheambientlightlevelisverylowandthe
trafficconditionspermit:
- main beam comes
onautomatically:this
indicator lamp comes on in
theinstrumentpanel.
Pause
Ifthesituationrequiresachangeofheadlamp
beam,thedrivercantakeoveratanytime.
F Flashingtheheadlamps
againpausesthe
function and the system
changesto"automaticilluminationof
headlamps"mode:
- if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam"
indicator lamps are on, the system
changestomainbeam,
- if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator
lampsareon,thesystemchangesto
dippedbeam.
background
214
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Tomakeyourapproachtothevehicleeasier,
theseilluminate:
- thezonesfacingthedriver’sand
passenger’sdoors,
- the zones forward of the door mirrors and
rearwardofthefrontdoors.
Door mirror spotlamps
Switching on
Switching off
Theygooffautomaticallyafter30seconds.
Exterior welcome lighting
Switching on
F Presstheopenpadlockonthe
remote control or one of the front
door handles with Keyless Entry
andStarting.
Front daytime running
lamps
(light-emitting diodes)
Theycomeonautomaticallywhentheengine
isstarted,whenthelightingcontrolstalkisin
position "0" or "AUTO".
Insomeweatherconditions(e.g.low
temperature or humidity), the presence
ofmistingontheinternalsurfaceofthe
glassoftheheadlampsandrearlamps
isnormal;itdisappearsafterthelamps
havebeenonforafewminutes.
Theremoteswitchingonofthelightingmakes
your approach to the vehicle easier in poor
light.Itisactivatedwhenthelightingcontrol
is in the "AUTO"positionandtheleveloflight
detectedbythesunshinesensorislow.
Switching off
Theexteriorwelcomelightingswitchesoff
automaticallyafterasettime,whentheignition
isswitchedonoronlockingthevehicle.
When the courtesy lamp is in this
position, the spotlamps come on
automatically:
- whenyouunlockthevehicle,
- whenyouremovetheelectronickeyfrom
the reader,
- when you open a door,
-
whenyouusetheremotecontroltolocatethevehicle.
The dipped beam headlamps and sidelamps
comeon;yourvehicleisalsounlocked.
background
215
5
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Toavoidcausinganuisancetootherroad
users,theheadlampsshouldbeadjusted
accordingtotheloadinthevehicle.
0. 1or2peopleinthefrontseats.
-. Intermediatesetting.
1. 5people+maximumauthorisedload.
-. Intermediatesetting.
2. Driver+maximumauthorisedload.
-. Intermediatesetting.
3. 5people+maximumloadintheboot.
Adjustingtheheadlamp
beamheight
Theinitialsettingisposition"0".
Programming
The activation, deactivation and choice of
welcomelightingdurationaredoneinthetouch
screentablet.
In the Driving menu, select the "Settings"
tab then "Lighting" and select "Welcome
lighting".
Usethearrowsorthecursortoadjustthe
durationofthelighting.
Direction indicators
F Left:lowerthelightingstalkpassingthe
pointofresistance.
F Right:raisethelightingstalkpassingthe
pointofresistance.
Three ashes of the direction
indicators
F Press briefly upwards or downwards,
withoutgoingbeyondthepointof
resistance;thedirectionindicatorswill
flash3times.
background
216
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Corneringlighting
Thissystem,iffittedtoyourvehicle,makes
useofthebeamfromafrontfoglampto
illuminate the inside of a bend, when the
main or dipped beam headlamps are on and
thevehiclespeedisbelow25mph(40km/h)
(urbandriving,windingroad,junctions,parking
manoeuvres...).
with cornering lighting
without cornering lighting
Switching on
Thissystemstarts:
- whenthecorrespondingdirectionindicator
is switched on,
or
- fromacertainangleofrotationofthe
steeringwheel.
Switching off
Thesystemdoesnotoperate:
- belowacertainangleofrotationofthe
steeringwheel,
- above25mph(40km/h),
- whenreversegearisengaged.
Thecorneringlightingcanbeactivatedor
deactivated in the Drivingmenu.
F Select the "Settings" tab, then "Lighting"
and "Directional headlamps".
background
217
5
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Directionallighting
When the dipped or main beam headlamps are
on,thissystemallowsthelightbeamstobetter
followtheroad.
Associatedwithxenonheadlamps,thissystem
improvesthequalityoflightingwhencornering.
with directional lighting
without directional lighting
Operating fault
Thissystemisinactive:
- when stationary or at low speeds,
- whenreverseisengaged.
Ifafaultoccurs,thesewarninglamps
come on in the instrument panel,
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignal
andamessage.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Thedirectionallightingcanbeactivatedor
deactivatedinthetouchscreentablet.
In the Driving menu, select the "Settings"
tab, then "Lighting" and select "Directional
headlamps".
background
218
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Wipercontrolstalk
Programming
Your vehicle may also include some functions
thatcanbeconfigured:
- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,
- rearwipingonengagingreversegear.
Manual controls
Windscreen wipers
Fastwipe(heavyrain).
Normalwipe(moderaterain).
Intermittent wipe (proportional to the
speedofthevehicle).
Park.
Automaticwiping(pressdown,
thenrelease).
Singlewipe(pullthestalkbriefly
towardsyou).
Thewipersarecontrolleddirectlybythedriver.
Wipingspeedcontrolstalk:raiseorlowerthe
stalktothedesiredposition.
Model without AUTO wiping
Model with AUTO wiping
Singlewipe(pressdownwardsorpull
thestalkbrieflytowardsyou,then
release).
or
In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice
or frost present on the windscreen,
around the wiper arms and blades and
thewindscreenseal,beforeoperating
thewipers.
Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windscreen.Underextremelyhotor
cold conditions, ensure that the wiper
bladesarenotstucktothewindscreen
beforeoperatingthewipers.
The front wiper system includes a
safety device which can temporarily
inhibit operation if it detects obstacles
suchasiceorsnow.
background
219
5
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Rear wiper
Park.
Ifasignificantaccumulationofsnowor
ice is present, deactivate the automatic
rearwiper.
Intermittentwipe.
Wash-wipe(setduration).
Rearwiperselectionring:
Reverse gear
Whenreversegearisengaged,therearwiper
will come into operation if the windscreen
wipersareoperating.
This function can be deactivated in the Driving
menu.
Select the "Settings" tab, then "Driving aids"
and "Rear wiper in reverse".
background
220
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Screenwash and washer jets
Windscreen wash and headlamp wash
Adjusting the jets
Thefrontwashersincludeanadjustmentforthe
heightofdeliveryfromthejets.
Ifyouwanttomodifythefactorysetting,turn
thescrewoneachjetanti-clockwise,towards
the"+"toraisethejetorclockwise,towards
the"-"tolowerit.
Headlamp wash
F Pullthewindscreenwiperstalktowards
you.Thewindscreenwashthenthe
windscreenwipersoperateforafixed
period.
Afewmomentsafterreleasingthewiperstalk,
there is a last wipe to clear any runs from the
screen.
The headlamps operate when the vehicle is
movingandwhenthedippedbeamheadlamps
areon.However,toreducetheconsumption
of screenwash fluid, the headlamp wash only
operates with every 7th use of the screenwash
oronceevery25miles(40km),duringagiven
journey.
background
221
5
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Donotcovertherainsensor,linkedwith
the sunshine sensor and located in the
centre of the windscreen behind the rear
viewmirror.
Switch off the automatic rain sensitive
wiperswhenusinganautomaticcarwash.
In winter, it is advisable to wait until the
windscreen is completely clear of ice
beforeactivatingtheautomaticrain
sensitivewipers.
Operating fault
If a fault occurs with the automatic rain
sensitive wipers, the wipers will operate in
intermittentmode.
HaveitcheckedbyCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
The windscreen wipers operate automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, if rain is
detected(sensorbehindtherearviewmirror),adaptingtheirspeedtotheintensityoftherainfall.
Switching on
Switching off
The automatic rain sensitive windscreen
wipersmustbereactivatedbypushing
thecontrolstalkdownwards,ifthe
ignitionhasbeenoffformorethan
oneminute.
Brieflypushthecontrolstalk
downwards.
Awipingcycleconfirmsthatthe
instructionhasbeenaccepted.
Thiswarninglampcomesoninthe
instrumentpanelandamessageis
displayed.
Brieflypushthecontrolstalk
downwardsagain,orplace
thecontrolstalkinanother
position(Int,1or2).
Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers
Thiswarninglampgoesoffintheinstrument
panelandamessageisdisplayed.
background
222
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Special position of the windscreen wipers
To maintain the effectiveness of the
"flat-blade" type of wiper blades, it is
advisableto:
- handle them with care,
- cleanthemregularlyusingsoapy
water,
- avoidusingthemtoretain
cardboard on the windscreen,
- replacethematthefirstsignsof
wear.
This position permits release of the windscreen
wiperblades.
Itisusedforcleaningorreplacementofthe
wiperblades.Itcanalsobeuseful,inwinter,to
detachthewiperbladesfromthewindscreen.
Onswitchingofftheignition:
F anyactiononthewiperstalkintheminute
afterswitchingofftheignitionplacesthe
wiperbladesverticallyonthescreen.
Whenthesystemisnolongerpowered-at
leastoneminuteafterswitchingoffthe
ignition-itispossibletomovethearms
manually.
F Toparkthebladesagain,switchonthe
ignitionandoperatethewiperstalk.
Replacement of the arms must only
be done by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshop.
background
223
5
Lighting and visibility
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap05_eclairage-visibilite_ed01-2016
Panoramic sunroof
F Rotate the control A to slide the roof blind
to the desired position (positions 1 to 4).
Closing the roof blind
Anti-pinch
Itisfittedwithanelectricallycontrolledblind.
Opening the roof blind
F Rotate the control A to position 0 to close
theroofblind.
Theblindhasananti-pinchfunction.
At the end of its travel, when the blind
encountersanobstacleonclosing,itstopsand
movesbackslightly.
Followingafaultorafterabattery
disconnectionduringthemovementoftheblind
or after it has stopped, you must re-initialise the
anti-pinchfunction:
F place the blind in the closed position,
F presscontrolknobBforapproximately
twoseconds.
background
224
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Hazardwarninglamps
Visualwarningwithallofthedirection
indicatorsflashingtoalertotherroaduserstoa
vehiclebreakdown,towingoraccident.
F Press this button, all of the direction
indicatorsflash.
Theycanoperatewiththeignitionoff.
Automatic operation of
hazard warning lamps
Whenbrakinginanemergency,dependingon
thedeceleration,thehazardwarninglamps
comeonautomatically.
They switch off automatically the first time you
accelerate.
F Youcanalsoswitchthemoffbypressing
thebutton.
Horn
F Pressthecentralpartofthesteering
wheel.
Thissystemallowsyoutomakeanemergency
orassistancecalltotheemergencyservicesor
tothededicatedCITROËNservice.
Emergencyor
assistance call
For more information on the use of this
function, refer to the "Audio and telematics"
section.
background
225
6
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Electronicstabilitycontrol(ESC)incorporating
thefollowingsystems:
- anti-lockbrakingsystem(ABS)and
electronicbrakeforcedistribution(EBFD),
- emergencybrakingassistance(EBA),
- wheelanti-slipregulation(ASR)ortraction
control,
- dynamicstabilitycontrol(DSC).
Electronic stability control (ESC)
Definitions
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
and electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD)
This system improves the stability and
manoeuvrabilityofyourvehiclewhenbraking
and contributes towards improved control on
corners, in particular on poor or slippery road
surfaces.
TheABSpreventswheellockintheeventof
emergencybraking.
TheEBFDmanagesthebrakingpressure
wheelbywheel.
Emergency braking assistance
(EBA)
Inanemergency,thissystemenablesyouto
reachtheoptimumbrakingpressuremore
quicklyandthereforereducethestopping
distance.
Itistriggeredaccordingtothespeedatwhich
thebrakepedalispressed.Thisisfeltbya
reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an
increaseintheeffectivenessofthebraking.
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)
TheASRsystem(alsoknownasTraction
Control) optimises traction in order to limit
wheelslipbyactingonthebrakesofthedriving
wheelsandontheengine.Italsoimproves
the directional stability of the vehicle on
acceleration.
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
If there is a difference between the path
followed by the vehicle and that required by
the driver, the DSC monitors each wheel and
automaticallyactsonthebrakeofoneormore
wheelsandontheenginetoreturnthevehicle
to the required path, within the limits of the laws
ofphysics.
background
226
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Intelligent traction control
system ("Snow motion")
Whenthiswarninglampcomeson,
coupled with the STOPandABSwarning
lamps,accompaniedbyanaudiblesignal
andamessage,itindicatesthatthere
isafaultwiththeelectronicbrakeforce
distribution(EBFD).
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD)
Thefixedilluminationofthiswarning
lamp indicates that there is a fault
withtheABS.
Dependingonversion,yourvehiclehasa
systemtohelpdrivingonsnow:intelligent
traction control.
This system detects situations of difficult
surfaceadhesionthatcouldmakeitdifficultto
moveofformakeprogressondeepfreshsnow
orcompactedsnow.
In these situations, the intelligent traction
control limits the amount of wheel slip to
providethebesttractionandtrajectorycontrol
foryourvehicle.
Theuseofsnowtyresisstrongly
recommendedonsurfacesofferinglowlevels
ofadhesion.
Whenchangingwheels(tyresand
rims), ensure that these are approved
foryourvehicle.
NormaloperationoftheABSmaymake
itselffeltbyslightvibrationsofthebrake
pedal.
In emergency braking, press very
firmly and maintain this pressure.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Inbothcases,havethesystemcheckedbya
CITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshopas
soonaspossible.
Thevehicleretainsconventionalbraking.Drive
carefullyatmoderatespeed.
background
227
6
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)
Activation
This system is activated automatically each
timethevehicleisstarted.
It comes into operation in the event of a
problemofgrip.
Deactivation
Inexceptionalconditions(startingavehicle
whichisboggeddown,stuckinsnow,onsoft
ground...),itmaybeadvisabletodeactivate
the DSC and ASR, so that the wheels can turn
freelyandregaingrip.
Thisisindicatedbytheflashingof
thiswarninglampintheinstrument
panel.
Reactivate the systems as soon as the level of
grippermits.
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
assistance" tab, then "Anti-slip
regulation".
This indicator lamp comes on in the
instrumentpanel.
TheASRsystemwillnolongeract
ontheoperationoftheengineand
onthebrakesintheeventofan
involuntarychangeoftrajectory.
Afteranimpact,havethesystemcheckedbya
CITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Operating fault
Reactivation
The system is reactivated automatically every
timetheignitionisswitchedbackonorfrom
30mph(50km/h).
Below30mph(50km/h),youcanreactivateit
manually:
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
assistance" tab, then "Anti-slip
regulation".
Illuminationofthiswarninglamp,
accompaniedbyanaudiblesignal
andamessage,indicateafaultwith
thesystem.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshoptohavethesystemchecked.
background
228
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Seat belts
Front seat belts
The front seat belts are fitted with a
pretensioningandforcelimitingsystem.
This system improves safety in the front
seatsintheeventofafrontorsideimpact.
Dependingontheseverityoftheimpact,the
pretensioningsysteminstantlytightenstheseat
beltsagainstthebodyoftheoccupants.
Thepretensioningseatbeltsareactivewhen
theignitionison.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the
seat belt on the chest of the occupant, so
improvingtheirprotection.
Front seat belt anchorage height
adjustment
F Toadjusttheheightoftheanchoragepoint,
squeeze the control and slide it up or down
tothedesirednotch.
Fastening
F Pullthestrap,theninsertthetongueinthe
buckle.
F Checkthattheseatbeltisfastened
correctlybypullingthestrap.
Unfastening
F Presstheredbuttononthebuckle.
F Guidetheseatbeltasitreelsin.
background
229
6
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
2
nd
row seat belts
The rear seats are each fitted with a seat belt,
three-pointanchorageswithinertiareeland
forcelimiter(exceptforthecentrerearseat).
Guide the belt as it reels in and place the
tongueonthemagnetatthesideanchorage
point.
2
nd
row outer seat belts
(stowing)
background
230
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
2
nd
row centre seat belt
Theseatbeltforthecentrerearseatisbuiltintotheroof.
Fastening
F PullthestrapandinsertthetongueA into
therighthandbuckle.
F InserttongueBintothelefthandbuckle.
F Checkthateachbuckleiscorrectly
fastenedbypullingonthebeltwebbing.
Unfastening
F PresstheredbuttoninbuckleB, then
buckleA.
F Guide the seat belt as it reels in and place
thetongueB and then Aonthemagnetin
theroofanchoragepoint.
Before any operation of the rear seats,
toavoiddamagetotheseatbelts
checkthatthereisnoslackintheouter
beltsandsecuretheirtonguesonthe
anchoragepoints.Thecentreseatbelt
mustbefullyreeledin.
3
rd
row seat belts
Fastening
F Detachtheseatbeltstrapfromitsretaining
looplocatedonthesidetrimoftheboot.
F Pullonthestrapandinsertthetongueinto
thebuckle.
F Checkthatthebuckleiscorrectlyfastened
bypullingonthebeltstrap.
Unfastening and stowing
F Presstheredbuttoninbuckle.
F Guidetheseatbeltstrapasitreelsin.
F Securethestrap,flatintheretainingloop.
Ensure that the seat belts are secured
whennotinuse.
background
231
6
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Seat belt not fastened and unfastened alerts
Rear seat belts not fastened
alert
The instrument panel includes a seat belt not-
fastenedwarninglampA as well as an indicator
of the location of the non-fastened belts B.
When the system detects a non-fastened
orunfastenedseatbelt,thewarninglampA
comesonaswellasthecorrespondingpoints
in the indicator B.
Onswitchingontheignition,enginerunning
or the vehicle at a speed of up to 12 mph
(20km/h),thewarninglampA as well as the
correspondingpointsintheindicatorB come
on for about thirty seconds, if one or more rear
passengershavenotfastenedtheirseatbelt.
Seat belts unfastened alert
Front seat belts not fastened
alert
Onswitchingontheignition,thewarning
lamp A comes on, as well as the
correspondingpointsintheindicatorB, if the
driverand/orfrontpassengerhavenotfastened
theirseatbelt.
Atspeedsabove12mph(20km/h),these
alertsflash,accompaniedbyanaudiblesignal
fortwominutes.Afterthisperiod,thesealerts
remainonfixed,whilethefrontseatbeltsare
notfastened.
Onswitchingontheignition,thewarning
lamp A remains on, as well as the
correspondingpointsintheindicatorB, if the
driverand/oroneormorepassengershavenot
fastenedtheirseatbelt.
Atspeedsabove12mph(20km/h),these
alertsflash,accompaniedbyamessageand
anaudiblesignalfortwominutes.Afterthis
period,thesealertsremainonfixed,whilethe
seatbeltsarenotfastened.
background
232
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Thedrivermustensurethatpassengersuse
the seat belts correctly and that they are all
fastenedbeforesettingoff.
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle,
always fasten your seat belt, even for short
journeys.
Donotinterchangetheseatbeltbucklesas
theywillnotfulfilltheirrolefully.
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel
permittingautomaticadjustmentofthe
lengthofthestraptoyoursize.Theseatbelt
isstowedautomaticallywhennotinuse.
Before and after use, ensure that the seat
beltisreeledincorrectly.
The lower part of the strap must be
positionedaslowaspossibleonthepelvis.
The upper part must be positioned in the
hollowoftheshoulder.
The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic
lockingdevicewhichcomesintooperationin
theeventofacollision,emergencybraking
orifthevehiclerollsover.Youcanrelease
thedevicebypullingthestrapfirmlyand
thenreleasingitsothatitreelsinslightly.
Recommendations for children
Useasuitablechildseatifthepassengeris
less than 12 years old or shorter than one
andahalfmetres.
Never use the same seat belt to secure more
thanoneperson.
Neverallowachildtotravelonyourlap.
For more information on Child seats, refer
tothecorrespondingsection.
Inordertobeeffective,aseatbeltmust:
- betightenedasclosetothebodyas
possible,
- be pulled in front of you with a smooth
movement,checkingthatitdoesnot
twist,
- be used to restrain only one person,
- notbearanytraceofcutsorfraying,
- not be converted or modified to avoid
affectingitsperformance.
In the event of an impact
Depending on the nature and
seriousness of the impact, the
pretensioningdevicemaybedeployed
beforeandindependentlyoftheairbags.
Deployment of the pretensioners is
accompaniedbyaslightdischargeof
harmlesssmokeandanoise,duetothe
activationofthepyrotechniccartridge
incorporatedinthesystem.
Inallcases,theairbagwarninglampcomes
on.
Followinganimpact,havetheseatbelts
systemchecked,andifnecessaryreplaced,
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
In accordance with current safety
regulations,forallrepairsonyourvehicle's
seatbelts,gotoaqualifiedworkshopwith
theskillsandequipmentneeded,whicha
CITROËNdealerisabletoprovide.
Haveyourseatbeltscheckedregularlyby
aCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop,
particularlyifthestrapsshowsignsof
damage.
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy
wateroratextilecleaningproduct,soldby
CITROËNdealers.
Afterfoldingormovingaseatorrearbench
seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned
andreeledincorrectly.
Advice
background
233
6
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Airbags
Systemdesignedtocontributetowards
improvingthesafetyoftheoccupants(with
theexceptionoftherearcentrepassenger)
intheeventofviolentcollisions.Theairbags
supplementtheactionoftheforce-limiting
seatbelts(withtheexceptionoftherearcentre
passenger).
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors
record and analyse the front and side impacts
sustainedintheimpactdetectionzones:
- inthecaseofaseriousimpact,theairbags
are deployed instantly and contribute
towards better protection of the occupants
ofthevehicle(withtheexceptionofthe
rearcentrepassenger);immediatelyafter
theimpact,theairbagsdeflaterapidlyso
thattheydonothindervisibilityortheexit
of the occupants,
- in the case of a minor or rear impact or in
certainroll-overconditions,theairbags
maynotbedeployed;theseatbelt
alonecontributestowardsensuringyour
protectioninthesesituations.
The airbags do not operate when the
ignition is switched off.
Thisequipmentwillonlydeployonce.
Ifasecondimpactoccurs(duringthe
same or a subsequent accident), the
airbagwillnotbedeployedagain.
Deployment of one or more of the
airbagsisaccompaniedbyaslight
emissionofsmokeandanoise,due
to the activation of the pyrotechnic
cartridgeincorporatedinthesystem.
Thissmokeisnotharmful,butsensitive
individualsmayexperienceslight
irritation.
The noise of detonation related to the
deploymentofoneormoreairbagsmay
resultinaslightlossofhearingfora
shorttime.
Impact detection zones
A. Frontimpactzone.
B. Sideimpactzone.
background
234
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Deactivation
Whentheignitionison,thiswarning
lamp comes in the instrument
panel.Itstaysonwhiletheairbagis
deactivated.
Front airbags
Deployment
Theairbagsaredeployed,exceptthe
passenger'sfrontairbagifitisdeactivated,inthe
event of a serious front impact to all or part of the
front impact zone A,inthelongitudinalcentreline
of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed
fromthefronttotherearofthevehicle.
Thefrontairbaginflatesbetweenthethoraxand
head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the
steeringwheel,driver'sside,andthedashboard,
passenger'ssidetocushiontheirforward
movement.
System which protects the driver and front
passengerintheeventofaseriousfrontimpact
inordertolimittheriskofinjurytotheheadand
thorax.
Thedriver'sairbagisfittedinthecentreofthe
steeringwheel;thefrontpassenger'sairbagis
fittedinthedashboardabovetheglovebox.
Onlythepassenger'sfrontairbagcanbe
deactivated.
F With the ignition off,insertthekeyinthe
passengerairbagdeactivationswitch.
F Turn it to the "OFF"position.
F Removethekeykeepingtheswitchinthe
newposition.
To assure the safety of your child,
thepassenger'sfrontairbagmustbe
deactivated when you install a rearward
facingchildseatonthefrontpassenger
seat.
Otherwise,thechildwouldriskbeing
seriouslyinjuredorkillediftheairbag
weredeployed.
Reactivation
Whenyouremovetherearwardfacingchild
seat, with the ignition off, turn the switch to
the "ON"positiontoreactivatetheairbagand
soassurethesafetyofyourfrontpassengerin
theeventofanimpact.
Whentheignitionisswitchedon,
thiswarninglampcomesoninthe
instrumentpanelforapproximately
oneminutetosignalthatthefront
airbagisactivated.
Operating fault
Ifthiswarninglampcomesoninthe
instrument panel, you must contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshoptohavethesystemchecked.
Theairbagsmaynolongerbedeployed
intheeventofaseriousimpact.
background
235
6
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Lateral airbags
Deployment
Alateralairbagisdeployedunilaterallyinthe
event of a serious side impact applied to all or
part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular
tothelongitudinalcentrelineofthevehicleona
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towardstheinsideofthevehicle.
Thelateralairbaginflatesbetweenthehipand
shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle
andthecorrespondingdoortrimpanel.
System which protects the driver and front
passengerintheeventofaserioussideimpact
inordertolimittheriskofinjurytothechest,
betweenthehipandtheshoulder.
Eachlateralairbagisfittedintheseatbackrest
frame,doorside.
Impact detection zones
A. Frontimpactzone.
B. Sideimpactzone.
background
236
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
In the event of a minor impact or bump
on the side of the vehicle or if the
vehiclerollsover,theairbagsmaynot
bedeployed.
In the event of a rear or front collision,
noneofthelateralairbagsisdeployed.
Systemcontributingtowardsgreaterprotection
forthedriverandpassengers(withthe
exceptionoftherearcentrepassenger)inthe
event of a serious side impact in order to limit
theriskofinjurytothesideofthehead.
Eachcurtainairbagisbuiltintothepillarsand
theupperpassengercompartmentarea.
Curtain airbags
Deployment
Thecurtainairbagisdeployedatthesame
timeasthecorrespondinglateralairbaginthe
event of a serious side impact applied to all or
part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular
tothelongitudinalcentrelineofthevehicleona
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towardstheinsideofthevehicle.
Thecurtainairbaginflatesbetweenthefrontor
rearoccupantofthevehicleandthewindows.
Ifthiswarninglampcomesoninthe
instrument panel, you must contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshoptohavethesystemchecked.
Operating fault
Theairbagsmaynolongerbedeployedinthe
eventofaseriousimpact.
background
237
6
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Sitinanormaluprightposition.
Wearacorrectlyadjustedseatbelt.
Donotleaveanythingbetweenthe
occupantsandtheairbags(achild,pet,
object...),norfixorattachanythingcloseto
theinflationtrajectoryoftheairbags;this
couldcauseinjuriesduringtheirdeployment.
Nevermodifytheoriginaldefinitionofyour
vehicle, particularly in the area directly
aroundtheairbags.
After an accident or if the vehicle has been
stolenorbrokeninto,havetheairbag
systemschecked.
Allworkontheairbagsystemmustbe
carried out by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshop.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned
areobserved,ariskofinjuryorofminor
burns to the head, chest or arms when an
airbagisdeployedcannotberuledout.The
baginflatesalmostinstantly(withinafew
milliseconds) then deflates within the same
timedischargingthehotgasviaopenings
providedforthispurpose.
Front airbags
Donotdriveholdingthesteeringwheelbyits
spokesorrestingyourhandsonthecentre
partofthewheel.
Passengersmustnotplacetheirfeetonthe
dashboard.
Donotsmokeasdeploymentoftheairbags
cancauseburnsortheriskofinjuryfroma
cigaretteorpipe.
Neverremoveorpiercethesteeringwheelor
hititviolently.
Donotfitorattachanythingtothesteering
wheel or dashboard, this could cause
injurieswithdeploymentoftheairbags.
Advice
Lateral airbags
Use only approved covers on the seats,
compatible with the deployment the lateral
airbags.Forinformationontherangeofseat
covers suitable for your vehicle, you can
contactaCITROËNdealer.
For more information on Accessories, refer
tothecorrespondingsection.
Donotfixorattachanythingtotheseat
backs(clothing...).Thiscouldcauseinjury
tothechestorarmsifthelateralairbagis
deployed.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body any
nearertothedoorthannecessary.
Curtain airbags
Donotfixorattachanythingtotheroof.This
couldcauseinjurytotheheadifthecurtain
airbagisdeployed.
If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the
grabhandlesinstalledontheroof,theyplay
apartinsecuringthecurtainairbags.
For the airbags to be fully effective, observe the safety recommendations below:
background
238
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Generalpointsrelatingtochildseats
Formaximumsafety,pleaseobservethe
followingrecommendations:
- inaccordancewithEuropeanregulations,
all children under the age of 12 or less
than one and a half metres tall must
travel in approved child seats suited to
their weight, on seats fitted with a seat
beltorISOFIXmountings*,
- statistically, the safest seats in your
vehicle for carrying children are the
rear seats,
- a child weighing less than 9 kg must
travel in the rearward facing position
both in the front and in the rear.
CITROËN recommends that children
should travel on the rear seats of your
vehicle:
- rearward facinguptotheageof3,
- forward facingovertheageof3.
AlthoughoneofCITROËN'smaincriteriawhendesigningyourvehicle,thesafetyofyourchildren
alsodependsonyou.
*Theregulationsoncarryingchildrenare
specifictoeachcountry.Refertothe
legislationinforceinyourcountry.
background
239
6
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Child seat at the front*
Rearward facing
Whenarearwardfacingchildseatisinstalled
on the front passenger seat,adjustthe
vehicleseattothemidwaylongitudinal
position,thelowestheightposition,backrest
straightened.Thenpulltheheightcontrollever
11times.
Thepassenger'sfrontairbagmustbe
deactivated.Otherwise,the child risks being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag is
deployed.
Forward facing
Whenaforwardfacingchildseatisinstalledon
the front passenger seat,adjustthevehicle
seattothemidwaylongitudinalposition,the
lowestheightposition,backreststraightened.
Thenpulltheheightcontrollever11times.
Leavethepassenger'sairbagactive.
Passengerseatinthemidwaylongitudinal
position,thelowestheightposition,thenthe
heightcontrolleverpulled11times.
Ensure that the seat belt is properly
tightened.
Forchildseatswithasupportleg,
ensure that this is in firm and steady
contactwiththefloor.Ifnecessary,
adjustthepassenger'sseat.
*Refertothelegislationinforceinyourcountry
beforeinstallingachildseatonthisseating
position.
background
240
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Deactivatingthepassenger'sfrontairbag
Passenger airbag OFF
Forinformationondeactivatingthe
passenger'sfrontairbag,refertothe
"Airbags"section.
Neverinstallarearwardfacingchild
restraint system on a seat protected by
anactivefrontairbag.Thiscouldcause
thedeathofthechildorseriousinjury.
Thewarninglabelpresentonbothsidesofthe
passenger'ssunvisorrepeatsthisadvice.In
linewithcurrentlegislation,thefollowingtables
containthiswarninginallofthelanguages
required.
background
241
6
AR
BG
НИКОГАНЕинсталирайтедетскостолченаседалкасАКТИВИРАНАпреднаВЪЗДУШНАВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА.Товаможедапричини
СМЪРТилиСЕРИОЗНОНАРАНЯВАНЕнадетето.
CS
NIKDYneumisťujtedětskézádržnézařízeníorientovanésměremdozadunasedadlochráněnéAKTIVOVANÝMčelnímAIRBAGEM.Hrozí
nebezpečíSMRTIDÍTĚTEneboVÁŽNÉHOZRANĚNÍ.
DA
BrugALDRIGenbagudvendtbarnestolpåetsæde,dererbeskyttetafenAKTIVAIRBAG.BARNETrisikereratbliveALVORLIGT
KVÆSTETellerDRÆBT.
DE
MontierenSieaufeinemSitzmitAKTIVIERTEMFront-AirbagNIEMALSeinenKindersitzodereineBabyschaleentgegenderFahrtrichtung,
dasKindkönnteschwereodersogartödlicheVerletzungenerleiden.
EL
ΜηχρησιμοποιείτεΠΟΤΕπαιδικόκάθισμαμετηνπλάτητουπροςτοεμπρόςμέροςτουαυτοκινήτου,σεμιαθέσηπουπροστατεύεταιαπό
ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟαερόσακοπουείναιΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ.ΑυτόμπορείναέχεισανσυνέπειατοΘΑΝΑΤΟήτοΣΟΒΑΡΟΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟτουΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ.
EN
NEVERusearearwardfacingchildrestraintonaseatprotectedbyanACTIVEAIRBAGinfrontofit,DEATHorSERIOUSINJURYtothe
CHILDcanoccur.
ES
NOINSTALARNUNCAunsistemaderetenciónparaniñosdeespaldasalsentidodelamarchaenunasientoprotegidomedianteun
AIRBAGfrontalACTIVADO,yaquepodríacausarlesionesGRAVESoinclusolaMUERTEdelniño.
ET
ÄrgeMITTEKUNAGIpaigaldage"seljagasõidusuunas"lapseistetjuhikõrvalistmele,milleESITURVAPADIonAKTIVEERITUD.Turvapadja
avaneminevõiblastTÕSISELTvõiELUOHTLIKULTvigastada.
FI
ÄLÄKOSKAANasetalapsenturvaistuintaselkäajosuuntaanistuimelle,jonkaedessäsuojanaonkäyttöönaktivoituTURVATYYNY.Sen
laukeaminenvoiaiheuttaaLAPSENKUOLEMANtaiVAKAVANLOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR
NEJAMAISinstallerdesystèmederetenuepourenfantsfaisantfaceversl’arrièresurunsiègeprotégéparunCOUSSINGONFLABLE
frontalACTIVÉ.
CelapeutprovoquerlaMORTdel’ENFANTouleBLESSERGRAVEMENT.
HR
NIKADAnepostavljatidječjusjedaliculeđimausmjeruvožnjenasjedalozaštićenoUKLJUČENIMprednjimZRAČNIMJASTUKOM.Tobi
moglouzrokovatiSMRTiliTEŠKUOZLJEDUdjeteta.
HU
SOHAnehasználjonmenetiránynakháttalbeszereltgyermeküléstAKTIVÁLT(BEKAPCSOLT)FRONTLÉGZSÁKKALvédettülésen.Eza
gyermekHALÁLÁTvagySÚLYOSSÉRÜLÉSÉTokozhatja.
IT
NONinstallareMAIseggioliniperbambiniposizionatiinsensocontrarioaquellodimarciasuunsedileprotettodaunAIRBAGfrontale
ATTIVATO.CiòpotrebbeprovocarelaMORTEoFERITEGRAVIalbambino.
LT
NIEKADAneįrenkitevaikoprilaikymopriemonėssuatgalatgręžtuvaikuantsėdynės,kurisaugomaVEIKIANČIOSpriekinėsORO
PAGALVĖS.IšsiskleidusoropagalveivaikasgalibūtiMIRTINAIarbaSUNKIAITRAUMUOTAS.
LV
NEKADNEuzstādietuzaizmugurivērstubērnusēdeklītipriekšējāpasažierasēdvietā,kurāirAKTIVIZĒTSpriekšējaisDROŠĪBASGAISA
SPILVENS.
TasvarizraisītBĒRNANĀVIvairadītNOPIETNUSIEVAINOJUMUS.
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
background
242
MT
Qattm’ghandekthallitifel/tiflamarbutf’siggudahrulejnl-Airbagattiva,ghaliextista’tikkawzakorrimentserjujewankemewtlit-tifel/tifla.
NL
PlaatsNOOITeenkinderzitjemetderuginderijrichtingopeenzitplaatswaarvandeAIRBAGisINGESCHAKELD.Bijhetafgaanvande
airbagkanhetKINDLEVENSGEVAARLIJKGEWONDRAKEN.
NO
InstallerALDRIetbarnesetemedryggenmotkjøreretningenietsetesomerbeskyttetmedenfrontalAKTIVERTKOLLISJONSPUTE,
BARNETrisikereråbliDREPTellerHARDTSKADET.
PL
NIGDYnieinstalowaćfotelikadziecięcegowpozycji"tyłemdokierunkujazdy"nasiedzeniuwyposażonymwCZOŁOWĄPODUSZKĘ
POWIETRZNĄwstanieAKTYWNYM.MożetodoprowadzićdoŚMIERCIDZIECKAlubspowodowaćuniegoPOWAŻNEOBRAŻENIA
CIAŁA.
PT
NUNCAinstaleumsistemaderetençãoparacriançasdecostasparaaestradanumbancoprotegidoporumAIRBAGfrontalACTIVADO.
EstainstalaçãopoderáprovocarFERIMENTOSGRAVESouaMORTEdaCRIANÇA.
RO
NuinstalatiNICIODATAunsistemderetinerepentrucopii,dispuscuspateleindirectiademers,peunlocdinvehiculprotejatcuAIRBAG
frontalACTIVAT.AceastaarputeaprovocaMOARTEACOPILULUIsauRANIREAluiGRAVA.
RU
ВОВСЕХСЛУЧАЯХЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯиспользоватьобращенноеназаддетскоеудерживающееустройствонасиденье,
защищенномФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙПОДУШКОЙБЕЗОПАСНОСТИ,установленнойпередэтимсиденьем.
ЭтоможетпривестикГИБЕЛИРЕБЕНКАилиНАНЕСЕНИЮЕМУСЕРЬЕЗНЫХТЕЛЕСНЫХПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ.
SK
NIKDYneinštalujtedetskézádržnézariadenieorientovanésmeromdozadunasedadlochránenéAKTIVOVANÝMčelnýmAIRBAGOM.
MohlobydôjsťkSMRTEĽNÉMUaleboVÁŽNEMUPORANENIUDIEŤAŤA.
SL
NIKOLInenameščajteotroškegasedežashrbtomvsmerivožnje,čejeVARNOSTNABLAZINApredsprednjimsopotnikovimsedežem
AKTIVIRANA.TakšnanamestitevlahkopovzročiSMRTOTROKAaliHUDEPOŠKODBE.
SR
NIKADAnekoristitedečjesedištekojeseokrećeunazadnasedištuzaštićenimAKTIVNIMVAZDUŠNIMJASTUKOMisprednjega,jer
mogunastupitiSMRTiliOZBILJNAPOVREDADETETA.
SV
PassagerarkrockkuddenframMÅSTEvaraavaktiveradomenbakåtvändbilbarnstolinstalleraspådennaplats.Annarsriskerarbarnetatt
DÖDASellerSKADASALLVARLIGT.
TR
KESİNLKLEHAVAYASTIĞIAKTİFolanönkoltuğayüzüarkayadönükbirçocukkoltuğuyerleştirmeyiniz.BuÇOCUĞUNÖLMESİNEveya
ÇOKAĞIRYARALANMASINAsebepolabilir.
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
background
243
6
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Child seat at the rear
Rearward facing
Whenarearwardfacingchildseatisinstalled
on a rear passenger seat,movethevehicle's
frontseatforwardandstraightenthebackrest
sothattherearwardfacingchildseatdoesnot
touchthevehicle'sfrontseat.
When a child seat is installed on a 3
rd
row
passenger seat, move the 2
nd
row seat
forwardsandstraightenthebackrestsothat
thechildseatandthelegsofthechilddonot
touch the 2
nd
rowseat.
Achildseatwithasupportlegmustneverbe
installed on a 3
rd
row passenger seat.
Seats in the 3
rd
row
Forward facing
Whenaforwardfacingchildseatisinstalled
on a rear passenger seat,movethevehicle's
frontseatforwardandstraightenthebackrest
sothatthelegsofthechildintheforward
facingchildseatdonottouchthevehicle'sfront
seat.
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly
tensioned.
Forchildseatswithasupportleg,
ensure that this is in firm contact with
thefloor.Ifnecessary,adjustthefront
seatofthevehicle.
background
244
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Child seats recommended by CITROËN
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L1
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"
Installedintherearwardfacingposition.
L4
"KLIPPAN Optima"
From22kg(approximately6years),
theboosterisusedonitsown.
L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Canbefittedtothevehicle'sISOFIX
mountings.
Thechildisrestrainedbytheseatbelt.
CITROËNoffersarangeofrecommendedchildseatswhicharesecuredusingathree point seat belt.
background
245
6
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Installationofchildseatssecuredusingtheseatbelt
Seat
Weight of the child /indicativeage
Groups 0 (b) and 0+
Birth to 13 kg
Group 1
From 9 to 18 kg
Group 2
From 15 to 25 kg
Group 3
From 22 to 36 kg
1
st
row
Frontpassengerseat(c)
- fixed U U U U
- heightadjustable U(R) U(R) U(R) U(R)
2
nd
row
Fixedouterrear
seats (d)
U U U U
Outer rear seats with
longitudinaladjustment(d) (e)
U U U U
Centre rear seat (d) U U U U
InaccordancewithEuropeanregulations,thistableindicatestheoptionsforinstallingchildseatssecuredusingtheseatbeltanduniversally
approved (a)inrelationtotheweightofthechildandtheseatinthevehicle.
background
246
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
(a)Universalchildseat:childseatwhichcanbe
installedinallvehiclesusingtheseatbelt.
(b)Group0:frombirthto10kg.Infantcarseats
and "car cots" cannot be installed on the
frontpassengerseat.Wheninstalledinthe
2
nd
row, they may prevent use of the other
seats.
(c)Consultthelegislationinforceinyour
countrybeforeinstallingyourchildonthis
seat.
(d) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
rearwardfacingorforwardfacing,move
thefrontseatforward,thenstraightenthe
backresttoallowenoughspaceforthechild
seatandthechild'slegs.
(e) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
rearwardfacingorforwardfacing,adjustthe
rearseattothefullybackposition,withthe
backrestupright.
Remove and stow the head restraint
beforeinstallingachildseatona
passengerseat.Refittheheadrestraint
oncethechildseathasbeenremoved.
U:seatsuitablefortheinstallationofachild
seatsecuredusingtheseatbeltand
universallyapprovedrearwardfacingand/
orforwardfacing,withthepassengerseat
adjustedtothemidwaylongitudinalposition.
U(R):sameasU,withthepassenger's
seatadjustedtothelowpositionwith
11actionsontheheightcontrolleverand
inthemidwaylongitudinalposition.
background
247
6
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Installationofchildseatssecuredusingtheseatbelt
InaccordancewithEuropeanregulations,thistableindicatestheoptionsforinstallingchildseatssecuredusingtheseatbeltanduniversally
approved (a)inrelationtotheweightofthechildandtheseatinthevehicle.
Seat
Weight of the child /indicativeage
Groups 0 (b) and 0+
Birth to 13 kg
Group 1
From 9 to 18 kg
Group 2
From 15 to 25 kg
Group 3
From 22 to 36 kg
1
st
row
Frontpassengerseat(c)
- fixed U U U U
- heightadjustable U(R) U(R) U(R) U(R)
2
nd
row
Fixedouterrearseats(d) U U U U
Outer rear seats with
longitudinaladjustment(d) (e)
U U U U
Centre rear seat (d) U U U U
3
rd
row Rear seats U U U U
background
248
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
(a)Universalchildseat:childseatwhichcanbe
installedinallvehiclesusingtheseatbelt.
(b)Group0:frombirthto10kg.Infantcarseats
and "car cots" cannot be installed on the
frontpassengerseatorinthe3
rd
row.When
installed in the 2
nd
row, they may prevent
useoftheotherseats.
(c)Consultthelegislationinforceinyour
countrybeforeinstallingyourchildonthis
seat.
(d) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
rearwardfacingorforwardfacing,move
thefrontseatforward,thenstraightenthe
backresttoallowenoughspaceforthechild
seatandthechild'slegs.
(e) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
rearwardfacingorforwardfacing,adjustthe
rearseattothefullybackposition,withthe
backrestupright.
Remove and stow the head restraint
beforeinstallingachildseatona
passengerseat.Refittheheadrestraint
oncethechildseathasbeenremoved.
U:seatsuitablefortheinstallationofachild
seatsecuredusingtheseatbeltand
universallyapprovedrearwardfacingand/
orforwardfacing,withthepassengerseat
adjustedtothemidwaylongitudinalposition.
U(R):sameasU,withthepassenger's
seatadjustedtothelowposition
with11actionsontheheightcontrollever
andinthemidwaylongitudinalposition.
background
249
6
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
"ISOFIX"mountings
Your vehicle has been approved in accordance with the latest ISOFIX regulations.
Theseats,representedbelow,arefittedwithregulationISOFIXmountings:
- tworingsA, located between the vehicle
seatbackrestandcushion,indicatedbya
marking,
-
aringB,locatedunderacoverontheback
ofthetopoftheseatbackrest,referredtoas
the TOP TETHERforfixingtheupperstrap.
Itspositionisindicatedbyamarking.
Locatedonthebackoftheseatbackrest,the
TOP TETHER is used to secure the upper strap
ofchildseatsthathaveone.Thisdevicelimits
forwardtippingofthechildseat,intheeventof
afrontimpact.
The incorrect installation of a child seat
inavehiclecompromisesthechild's
protectionintheeventofanaccident.
Observestrictlythefittinginstructions
providedwiththechildseat.
For information on the possibilities
forfittingISOFIXchildseatstoyour
vehicle,refertothetableofseating
positions.
TheISOFIXmountingsarethreeringsforeachseat:
ThisISOFIXmountingsystemensuresfast,
reliableandsafefittingofthechildseatinyour
vehicle.
The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two
latches which are secured easily on the two
ringsA.
Some also have an upper strap which is
attachedtoringB.
To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER:
- remove and stow the head restraint before
installingthechildseatonthisseat(refitit
after the child seat has been removed),
- remove the TOP TETHERcoverbypulling
at its cut-out,
- pass the child seat strap behind the seat
backrest,centredbetweentheholesforthe
head restraint rods,
- securetheupperstrapfixingtotheringB,
- tightentheupperstrap.
background
250
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" and
its ISOFIX base
(sizecategory:E)
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
InstalledrearwardfacingusinganISOFIX
basewhichisattachedtotheringsA.
Thebasehasasupportleg,adjustablefor
height,whichsitsonthevehicle'sfloor.
This child seat can also be secured with a
seatbelt.Inthiscase,onlytheshellisused
andattachedtothevehicle'sseatbythe
three-pointseatbelt.
ISOFIX child seats recommended by CITROËN
CITROËNoffersarangeofISOFIXchildseatslistedandtypeapprovedforyourvehicle.
Referalsotothechildseatmanufacturer'sfittinginstructionsforinformationoninstallingandremovingtheseat.
Baby P2C Mini and its ISOFIX base
(sizecategories:C, D, E)
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
InstalledrearwardfacingusinganISOFIX
basewhichisattachedtotheringsA.
Thebasehasasupportleg,adjustablefor
height,whichsitsonthevehicle'sfloor.
This seat can also be secured with a seat
belt.
In this case only the seat shell is used and is
attachedtothevehicle'sseatbythethree-
pointseatbelt.
"Baby P2C Midi" and its ISOFIX base
(sizecategories:D, C, A, B, B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
InstalledrearwardfacingusinganISOFIX
basewhichisattachedtotheringsA.
Thebasehasasupportleg,adjustablefor
height,whichsitsonthevehicle'sfloor.
This child seat can also be used forward
facing.
This seat can not be secured with a seat
belt.
We recommend that you use the seat in the
rearwardfacingpositionuptotheageof
3years.
background
251
6
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
LocationsforinstallingISOFIXchildseats
InaccordancewithEuropeanRegulations,thistableindicatestheoptionsforinstallingISOFIXchildseatsonseatsinthevehiclefittedwithISOFIX
mountings.
Inthecaseofuniversalandsemi-universalISOFIXchildseats,theISOFIXsizecategory,determinedbyaletterfromA to G, is indicated on the child
seatnexttotheISOFIXlogo.
Weight of the child/indicativeage
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Uptoapprox.
6 months
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Less than 13 kg
(group 0+)
Uptoapprox.1year
From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
Fromapprox.1to3years
Type of ISOFIX child seat Sleeper cot* rearward facing rearward facing forward facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Frontpassengerseat Not ISOFIX
Outerrearseats,fixed IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU X IUF / IL-SU
Outerrearseats,adjustablelongitudinally IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU
IUF / IL-SU
(1)
IUF / IL-SU
Centre rear seat X IL-SU IL-SU IUF / IL-SU IUF / IL-SU
*Sleepercotscannotbefittedtothefrontpassenger'sseat. **TheISOFIXsleepercot,securedtothelowerringsofanISOFIXseat,
occupiesthefullwidthoftherearseats.
background
252
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an
ISOFIX Universal seat, Forwardfacing
securedusingtheupperstraptothetop
tetheronISOFIXseats.
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an
IsofixSemi-Universalseateither:
- rearwardfacingfittedwithanupperstrap
orasupportleg,
- forwardfacingfittedwithasupportleg,
- a sleeper cot fitted with an upper strap or a
supportleg.
Remove and stow the head restraint
beforeinstallingachildseatona
passengerseat.Refittheheadrestraint
oncethechildseathasbeenremoved.
For more information on ISOFIX mountings
andinparticularonsecuringtheupperstrap,
refertothecorrespondingsection.
X: seat not suitable for the installation of a
childseatorsleepercotfortheweightgroup
indicated.
(1):Theouterseatinrow2mustbeadjusted
to3notchesbackfromthefullyforward
position.
background
253
6
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
LocationsforinstallingISOFIXchildseats
InaccordancewithEuropeanRegulations,thistableindicatestheoptionsforinstallingISOFIXchildseatsonseatsinthevehiclefittedwithISOFIX
mountings.
Inthecaseofuniversalandsemi-universalISOFIXchildseats,theISOFIXsizecategory,determinedbyaletterfromA to G, is indicated on the child
seatnexttotheISOFIXlogo.
*Sleepercotscannotbefittedtothefrontpassenger'sseat. **AnISOFIXsleepercot,securedtothelowerringsofanISOFIXseat,
occupiesthefullwidthoftherearseats.
Weight of the child/indicativeage
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Uptoapprox.
6 months
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Less than 13 kg
(group 0+)
Uptoapprox.1year
From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
Fromapprox.1to3years
Type of ISOFIX child seat Sleeper cot* rearward facing rearward facing forward facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Frontpassengerseat Not ISOFIX
Outerrearseats,fixed IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU IUF / IL-SU IUF / IL-SU
Outerrearseats,adjustablelongitudinally IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU IUF / IL-SU IUF / IL-SU
Centre rear seat X IL-SU IL-SU IUF / IL-SU IUF / IL-SU
Rearseatinthe3
rd
row Not ISOFIX
background
254
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an
ISOFIX Universal seat, Forwardfacing
securedusingtheupperstraptothetop
tetheronISOFIXseats.
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an
IsofixSemi-Universalseateither:
- rearwardfacingfittedwithanupperstrap
orasupportleg,
- forwardfacingfittedwithasupportleg,
- a sleeper cot fitted with an upper strap or a
supportleg.
Remove and stow the head restraint
beforeinstallingachildseatona
passengerseat.Refittheheadrestraint
oncethechildseathasbeenremoved.
For more information on ISOFIX mountings
andinparticularonsecuringtheupperstrap,
refertothecorrespondingsection.
X: seat not suitable for the installation of a
childseatorsleepercotfortheweightgroup
indicated.
background
255
6
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Child seats
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a
vehiclecompromisesthechild'sprotectionin
theeventofanaccident.
Checkthatthereisnoseatbeltorseatbelt
buckleunderthechildseatasthiscould
destabiliseit.
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the
child seat harnesses keeping the slack in
relationtothechild'sbodyto a minimum,
evenforshortjourneys.
Fortheinstallationofachildseatusinga
seat belt, ensure that this is well tensioned
onthechildseatandthatitisholdingthe
childseatfirmlyagainsttheseatofyour
vehicle.Ifyourfrontpassengerseatis
adjustable,moveitforwardifnecessary.
At the rear seats, always leave sufficient
spacebetweenthefrontseatand:
- arearwardfacingchildseat,
- the feet of a child seated in a forward
facingchildseat.
Recommendations
For this, move the front seat forward and if
necessarystraightenitsbackrest.
Foroptimuminstallationoftheforwardfacing
childseat,ensurethatthebackofthechild
seatisascloseaspossibletothebackrest
ofthevehicle'sseat,orincontactifpossible.
The head restraint must be removed before
installingachildseatwithabackrestonthe
passengerseat.
Ensure that the head restraint is stowed or
attached securely so that it is not thrown
around the vehicle in the event of sharp
braking.
Refit the head restraint as soon as the child
seatisremoved.
Installing a booster
cushion
Asasafetyprecaution,donotleave:
- one or more children alone and
unsupervised in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle which
isexposedtothesun,withthewindows
closed,
- thekeyswithinreachofchildreninside
thevehicle.
Topreventaccidentalopeningofthedoors,
usethechildlock.
Takecarenottoopentherearwindowsby
morethanonethird.
Toprotectyoungchildrenfromtheraysof
thesun,fitsideblindsontherearwindows.
The chest part of the seat belt must be
positionedonthechild'sshoulderwithout
touchingtheneck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
passescorrectlyoverthechild'sthighs.
CITROËN recommends the use of a booster
seatwhichhasaback,fittedwithaseatbelt
guideatshoulderlevel.
Thelegislationoncarryingachildonthe
frontpassengerseatisspecifictoeach
country.Refertothelegislationinforcein
thecountryinwhichyouaredriving.
Deactivatethepassenger'sfrontairbag
whenarearwardfacingchildseatisinstalled
onthefrontpassengerseat.Otherwise,the
childwouldriskbeingseriouslyinjuredor
killediftheairbagweredeployed.
Children at the front
background
256
Safety
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap06_securite_ed01-2016
Childlock
Thismechanicalsystempreventsopeningofareardoorusingitsinteriorcontrol.
Thecontrolislocatedontheedgeofeachreardoorandlockingisindependentforeachdoor.
Locking
F Usingtheintegralignitionkey,turnthecontrolasfarasitwillgo:
- to the left on the left-hand rear door,
- totherightontheright-handreardoor.
Unlocking
F Usingtheintegralignitionkey,turnthecontrolasfarasitwillgo:
- totherightontheleft-handreardoor,
- totheleftontheright-handreardoor.
background
257
7
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Fuel
Capacityofthetank:approximately57litres(petrol)or55litres(Diesel).
Low fuel level
Refuelling
When the low fuel level is reached,
thiswarninglampcomesoninthe
instrument panel, accompanied by an
audiblewarningandamessageand
thelastbarofthefuelgaugecomes
oninorange.
F Takecaretoselectthepumpthatdelivers
thecorrecttypeoffuelforyourvehicle.
F Introduce the nozzle so as to push in the
metal non-return flap A.
F Makesurethatthenozzleispushedinas
faraspossiblebeforestartingtorefuel
(riskofblowback).
F Maintainthispositionthroughoutthe
refuellingoperation.
F Pushthefuelflaptocloseit.
If you are filling your tank to the top, do
not persist after the 3rd cut-off; this could
cause malfunctions.
A label on the inside of the fuel filler flap
reminds you of the type of fuel to use,
dependingonyourenginetype.
Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres to
beregisteredbythefuelgauge.
When it first comes on, about 6 litres of fuel
remaininthetank.
Until sufficient fuel has been added, this
warninglampappearseverytimetheignition
is switched on, accompanied by an audible
warningandamessage.Thisaudiblewarning
andmessagearerepeatedwithincreasing
frequency as the fuel level drops towards "0".
Refuelassoonaspossibletoavoidrunningout.
Openingthefillerflapmayresultinaninrushof
air.Thisisentirelynormalandresultsfromthe
sealingofthefuelsystem.
F Withthevehicleunlocked,presstherear
edgeoftheflaptoopenit(thefillercapisa
partofit).
With Stop & Start, never refuel with the
systeminSTOPmode;youmustswitch
offtheignitionwiththeSTART/STOP
button.
background
258
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
ThepetrolorDieselengineofyourvehicleis
fitted with a catalytic converter, a device which
helps to reduce the level of harmful emissions
intheexhaustgases.
For petrol engines, you must use unleaded
fuel.
Thefillerneckisnarrower,allowingonly
unleadedpetrolnozzlestobeintroduced.
If you have put in the wrong fuel
for your vehicle, you must have the
fuel tank drained and filled with
the correct fuel before starting the
engine.
Fuel cut-off
Your vehicle is equipped with a safety device
which cuts off the fuel supply in the event of a
collision.
Misfuel prevention (Diesel)*
Operation
When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the
fuelfillerneckofyourDieselvehicle,itcomes
intocontactwiththeflap.Thesystemremains
closedandpreventsfilling.
Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type
filler nozzle.
MechanicaldevicewhichpreventsfillingthetankofaDieselvehiclewithpetrol.Itavoidstheriskof
enginedamagethatcanresultfromfillingwiththewrongfuel.
It remains possible to use a fuel can to
fillthetank.
Inordertoensureagoodflowoffuel,
do not place the nozzle of the fuel can
in direct contact with the flap of the
misfuel prevention device and pour
slowly.
Travelling abroad
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may
be different in other countries, the
presence of the misfuel prevention
devicemaymakerefuellingimpossible.
Beforetravellingabroad,we
recommendthatyoucheckwiththe
CITROËNdealernetwork,whetheryour
vehicle is suitable for the fuel pumps in
thecountryinwhichyouwanttotravel.
*Dependingonthecountryofsale.
background
259
7
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Fuel used for petrol engines
Thepetrolenginesarecompatiblewith
E10bio-petrol(containing10%ethanol),
conformingtoEuropeanstandardsEN228and
EN15376.
E85typefuels(containingupto85%ethanol)
arereservedexclusivelyforvehiclesmarketed
fortheuseofthistypeoffuel(BioFlex
vehicles).Thequalityoftheethanolmust
complywithEuropeanstandardEN15293.
Fuel used for Diesel
engines
TheDieselenginesarecompatiblewith
biofuels available at the pumps which meet
currentandfutureEuropeanstandards:
- Diesel fuel that meets standard EN 590
mixedwithabiofuelthatmeetsstandard
EN 14214,
- DieselfuelthatmeetsstandardEN16734
mixedwithabiofuelthatmeetsstandard
EN14214(possiblycontainingupto10%
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester),
- Paraffinic Diesel fuel that meets standard
EN15940mixedwithabiofuelthatmeets
standardEN14214(possiblycontainingup
to7%FattyAcidMethylEster).
TheuseofB20orB30fuelmeetingstandard
EN16709ispossibleinyourDieselengines.
However, this use, even occasional, requires
strictapplicationofthespecialservicing
conditionsreferredtoas"Arduousconditions".
For more information, contact a CITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
The use of any other type of (bio)fuel
(vegetableoranimaloils,pureordiluted,
domesticfuel...)isstrictlyprohibited(riskof
damagetotheengineandfuelsystem).
Only the use of Diesel fuel additives that meet
thestandardB715000isauthorised.
background
260
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Originaltyresize Type of chain
205/60R16
Maximumlinksize:
9 mm
205/55R17
225/45R18
THULE model
K-SummitK34only
For more information on snow chains, contact a
CITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Useonlychainsdesignedtobefittedthetype
ofwheelonyourvehicle:
Snow chains
Inwintryconditions,snowchainsimprovetractionaswellasthebehaviourofthevehiclewhenbraking.
The snow chains must be fitted only
tothefrontwheels.Theymustnever
be fitted to "space-saver" type spare
wheels.
Advice on installation
F Ifyouhavetofitthechainsduringa
journey,stopthevehicleonaflatsurface
onthesideoftheroad.
F Applytheparkingbrakeandpositionany
wheelchockstopreventmovementofyour
vehicle.
F Fitthechainsfollowingtheinstructions
providedbythemanufacturer.
F Moveoffgentlyanddriveforafew
moments,withoutexceeding30mph
(50km/h).
F Stopyourvehicleandcheckthatthesnow
chainsarecorrectlytightened.
Takeaccountofthelegislationinforce
in your country on the use of snow
chainsandthemaximumrunningspeed
authorised.
Avoiddrivingwithsnowchainsonroads
that have been cleared of snow, to
avoiddamagingyourvehicle'styresand
theroadsurface.Ifyourvehicleisfitted
withalloywheels,checkthatnopartof
thechainoritsfixingsisincontactwith
thewheelrim.
Itisstronglyrecommendedthatbefore
youleave,youpractisefittingthesnow
chainsonalevelanddrysurface.
background
261
7
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Very cold climate screen(s)*
Removableprotectivescreenswhichpreventtheaccumulationofsnowattheradiatorcoolingfan.
Dependingonversion,youwillhaveoneortwoscreens.
F Offerupthecorrespondingverycold
climate screen to the upper or lower
sectionofthefrontbumper.
F Pressaroundtheedgeofeachscreento
engageitsfixingclipsonebyone.
F Use a screwdriver as a lever to release the
fixingclipsinturnoneachscreen.
Donotforgettoremovetheverycoldclimate
screen(s)when:
- theambienttemperatureexceeds10°C,
- towing,
- drivingatspeedsabove75mph(120km/h).
Removal
Fitting
360 Vision system
The pre-cut zone must be removed
beforefittingthescreentothefront
bumper, to allow operation of the
camera.
When the very cold climate screen
isfitted,theimageprovidedbythe
cameraisslightlydifferent.
*Dependingonthecountryofsale.
background
262
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Towbarwithquicklydetachabletowball
Fitting
F Below the rear bumper, unclip and remove
theprotectivecoveronthecarrier.
F Beforefittingthetowball,checkthatthe
points of contact, indicated by the arrows,
areclean.
Useasoftcleancloth.
F Ensurethatthetowballisfullyengaged.
The two pins must be in contact with
the cut-outs in the carrier and the
triggerB must have returned to the
"locked"position.
F Install and clip in place the protective
cover,byrotatingittotheleft.
F On the towball, press and hold control A.
F Releasethelockingmechanismby
pressingthetriggerB.
F Put the end of the towball into the carrier,
locatedbelowthebumper,asfarasitwillgo.
Notoolsarerequiredtoinstallorremovethetowballonthisgenuinetowbarsystem.
F Connectthetrailerplugtothe13-way
socketprovided,locatednexttothecarrier.
F Makethetrailersafebyattachingitssafety
cable to the eye provided for this purpose,
locatedonthecarrier.
background
263
7
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
F Unclip and remove the protective cover, by
turningittotheright.
Removing
F PressthetriggerB and remove the towball
bypullingittowardsyou.
F On the towball, press and hold control A.
F Releasethelockingmechanismby
pressingthetriggerB.
Ifthetowballisnotlockedinplace,the
trailercouldseparate.Thereisariskof
anaccident.
Alwayslockthetowballintheway
described.
Observethelegislationinforceinthe
countryinwhichyouaredriving.
Removethetowballwhenitisnotbeing
used.
Beforesettingoff,checkthatthetrailer
lightingandsignallingworkscorrectly.
Maximumauthorisednoseweight:
70kg.
Formoreinformationonyourvehicle's
Weights,refertothecorresponding
section.
Carryingsystem(boxorbicyclecarrier).
Youmustnotexceedthemaximum
noseweightonthetowbar:ifthisweight
isexceeded,thedevicecoulddetach
from the vehicle and cause a serious
accident.
F Clip the protective cover in place on the
carrierlocatedbelowthebumper.
background
264
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Towingatrailer
Werecommendtheuseofgenuine
CITROËN towbars and their harnesses
that have been tested and approved
fromthedesignstageofyourvehicle,
andthatthefittingofthetowbaris
entrusted to a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshop.
If the towbar is not fitted by a
CITROËN dealer, it must still be
fitted in accordance with the vehicle
manufacturer'sinstructions.
Yourvehicleisprimarilydesignedfor
transportingpeopleandluggage,butitmay
alsobeusedfortowingatrailer.
Drivingwithatrailerplacesgreater
demandsonthetowingvehicleandthe
drivermusttakeparticularcare.
For more information on Driving
advice,particularlywhentowing,refer
tothecorrespondingsection.
For more information on Weights (and
the towed loads which apply to your
vehicle)refertothecorresponding
section.
Youmustobservethemaximumtrailer
weight,indicatedontheregistration
certificate or in the technical
specificationforyourvehicle.
Whennottowingatrailer,removethe
quickly-detachabletowballbefore
driving.
Thelanedeparturewarningsystemis
deactivatedwhileatrailerisconnected.
background
265
7
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Exiting economy mode
These functions are reactivated automatically
nexttimethevehicleisdriven.
In order to restore the use of these functions
immediately,starttheengineandletitrun:
- for less than ten minutes, to use the
equipmentforapproximatelyfiveminutes,
- for more than ten minutes, to use the
equipmentforuptoapproximately
thirtyminutes.
Lettheenginerunforthedurationspecifiedto
ensurethatthebatterychargeissufficient.
Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the
engineinordertochargethebattery.
Aflatbatterypreventstheenginefromstarting.
For more information on the 12 V battery, refer
tothecorrespondingsection.
Load reduction mode
Systemwhichmanagestheuseofcertain
functionsaccordingtothelevelofcharge
remaininginthebattery.
Whenthevehicleisbeingdriven,theload
reduction function temporarily deactivates
certainfunctions,suchastheairconditioning,
theheatedrearscreen...
The deactivated functions are reactivated
automaticallyassoonasconditionspermit.
Energyeconomymode
Switching to economy
mode
Amessageappearsintheinstrumentpanel
screenindicatingthatthevehiclehasswitched
to economy mode and the active functions are
putonstandby.
Ifatelephonecallisbeingmadeatthistime,it
will be maintained for around 10 minutes with
the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio
system.
Systemwhichmanagesthedurationofuseofcertainfunctionstoconserveasufficientlevelof
chargeinthebattery.
Aftertheenginehasstopped,youcanstillusefunctionssuchastheaudioandtelematics
system,windscreenwipers,dippedbeamheadlamps,courtesylamps,etc.foramaximum
combineddurationofaboutfortyminutes.
background
266
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Accessories
AwiderangeofaccessoriesandgenuinepartsisavailablefromtheCITROËNdealernetwork.
TheseaccessoriesandpartsareallsuitableforyourvehicleandbenefitfromCITROËN'srecommendationandwarranty.
"Comfort"
Door deflectors, sun blind, insulated module,
coathangerfixedtoheadrestraint,mobile
readinglamp,mirrorforcaravan,frontandrear
parkingsensors,programmableadditional
heating,smoker'skit,solarfilmforreardoor
windows,portablescentedairfreshener...
"Transport systems"
Boot carpet, boot liner, boot net, boot
spacers,transverseroofbars,skicarrier,roof
boxes,towbars,towbarwiringharnesses,
bicycle carriers for towbar and roof bars,
towbarswithfixedanddetachabletowball,
separationnet,slidingcarrier,bootorganiser
(GrandC4Picasso)...
Ifatowbarandwiringharnessarefitted
outsidetheCITROËNdealernetwork,the
installation must be done strictly in line with the
manufacturer'srecommendations.
If your vehicle has a detachable towball, it is
recommended that the ball be removed when
nottowing.
"Styling"
Gearleverknobs,aluminiumfootrest,alloy
wheels, door sill finishers, interior mirror
shells...
"Security and safety"
Anti-intrusionalarm,vehicletrackingsystem,
child seats and booster cushions, breathalyser,
firstaidkit,fireextinguisher,warningtriangle,
highvisibilityvest,wheelsecuritybolts,snow
chains,non-slipcovers,wintertyres,foglamp
kit,securityfilmforfrontdoorwindows,dog
guard,petseatbelt...
"Protection"
Mats*, seat covers compatible with lateral
airbags,mudflaps,doorprotectivemouldings,
bumper protection strips, vehicle cover, boot
sill protector, door sill protectors, seat and boot
protectivecoversforpets...
Therearbodyworkhasbeendesignedtoavoid
spray.
* Toavoidanyriskofjammingthepedals:
- ensure that mats are correctly positioned
and secured,
- neverfitonematontopofanother.
background
267
7
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Thefittingofelectricalequipment
or accessories which are not
recommended by CITROËN may result
inafailureofyourvehicle'selectronic
systemandexcessiveelectrical
consumption.
Contact a CITROËN dealer
forinformationontherangeof
recommended equipment and
accessories.
Installation of radio
communication
transmitters
Beforeinstallinganyafter-marketradio
communication transmitter, you can
contact a CITROËN dealer for the
specification of transmitters which can
befitted(frequency,maximumpower,
aerial position, specific installation
requirements), in line with the Vehicle
ElectromagneticCompatibility
Directive(2004/104/EC).
Dependingonthelegislationinforcein
the country, certain safety equipment
maybecompulsory:highvisibility
safetyvests,warningtriangles,
breathalyzers, spare bulbs, spare fuses,
fireextinguisher,firstaidkit,mudflaps
attherearofthevehicle.
"Multimedia"
Portablesatellitenavigationsystem,driving
assistancesystems,reversingcamera,
portable video screen, portable video carrier,
smartphone carrier, Bluetooth
®
hands-freekit,
two-screenvideopack,portablevideoplayer,
CDplayer,230V/50Hzsocket,230V/12V
adaptor,iPhone/iPadcharger...
ByvisitingaCITROËNdealeryoucanalso
obtaincleaningandmaintenanceproducts
(interiorandexterior)-includingecological
productsinthe"TECHNATURE"range,
productsfortopping-up(screenwash...),paint
touch-uppensandaerosolsfortheexact
colourofyourvehicle,refills(sealantcartridge
forthetemporarypuncturerepairkit...),...
background
268
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Changingawiperblade
Before removing a front
wiper blade
F Withinoneminuteafterswitchingoff
theignition,operatethewiperstalkto
position the wiper blades vertically on the
windscreen,
or
F Fromoneminuteafterswitchingoffthe
ignition,repositionthearmsmanually.
Removing
F Raisethecorrespondingwiperarm.
F Unclipthewiperbladeandremoveit.
Fitting
F Putthecorrespondingnewwiperbladein
placeandclipit.
F Folddownthewiperarmcarefully.
After fitting a front wiper
blade
F Switchontheignition.
F Operatethewiperstalkagaintoparkthe
wiperblades.
Replacement of the arms must be done
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
background
269
7
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Roof bars
Forsafetyreasonsandtoavoiddamagingthe
roof, it is essential to use transverse roof bars
thatareapprovedforyourvehicle.
Observethefittinginstructionsandthe
conditionsofusegivenintheinformation
providedwiththeroofbars.
Version with
longitudinal bars
To install the roof bars, you must secure
themonlytothefouranchoragepointsinthe
roofframe.Thesepointsaremaskedbythe
vehicle'sdoorswhenclosed.
Theroofbarfixingsincludeastudthatshould
be introduced into the aperture at each
anchoragepoint.
Version without longitudinal
bars
You must fit the transverse bars to the
longitudinalbarsatthefixingpointsindicated
byengravedmarkingsonthelongitudinalbars.
Recommendations
F Distributetheloadevenly,avoiding
overloadingononeside.
F Arrangetheheaviestpartoftheloadas
closeaspossibletotheroof.
F Anchortheloadsecurelyandfitawarning
flagifpartofitoverhangsthevehicle.
F Drivegently,asthevehiclewillbemore
liable to the effects of side winds (vehicle
stabilitymaybeaffected).
F Remove the roof bars as soon as they are
nolongerneeded.
Maximumload,distributedovertheroof
bars,foraloadingheightnotexceeding
40cm:80 kg.
Thisvalueissubjecttochange,please
checkthemaximumloadstatedinthe
instructionsprovidedwithheroofbars.
Iftheheightexceeds40cm,adaptthe
speed of the vehicle to the profile of the
roadtoavoiddamagingtheroofbars
andthefixingsonthevehicle.
Pleaserefertonationallegislationsoas
tomeettherequirementsoncarrying
objectsthatarelongerthanthevehicle.
Whencarryinglongobjects,itis
recommended that you deactivate the
motorisedoperationofthetailgate.
background
270
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
TOTAL & CITROËN
Partners in performance and
protecting the environment
Innovation in the search for
performance
For over 40 year, the TOTAL Research and
Development departments have developed lubricants
for CITROËN, to match the latest technical innovations
on CITROËN vehicles, both for competition and for
everydaymotoring.
For you, this is an assurance that you will obtain the
bestperformancefromyourengine.
Optimum protection for
your engine
ByhavingyourCITROËNvehicle
serviced with TOTAL lubricants, you are
contributingtowardsimprovingthelife
andperformanceofyourengine,while
alsoprotectingtheenvironment.
background
271
7
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Bonnet
F Openthelefthandfrontdoor.
F Liftthesafetycatchandraisethebonnet.
F Unclipthestayfromitshousingandplace
it in the support slot to hold the bonnet
open.
Opening
F Pull the release lever, located at the bottom
ofthedooraperture,towardsyou.
Beforedoinganythingunderthe
bonnet, switch off the Stop & Start
systemtoavoidanyriskofinjury
resultingfromanautomaticchangeto
STARTmode.
The cooling fan may start after switching off the engine: take care with articles and
clothing that might be caught by the fan blades.
Do not open the bonnet under very
windyconditions.
The location of the interior bonnet
releaseleverpreventsopeningofthe
bonnet when the left hand front door
isshut.
Whentheengineishot,handlethe
exteriorsafetycatchandthestaywith
care(riskofburns),usingtheprotected
area.
Whenthebonnetisopen,takecarenot
todamagethesafetycatch.
Because of the presence of electrical equipment under the bonnet, it is recommended that
exposuretowater(rain,washing,...)belimited.
Closing
F Takethestayoutofitssupportslot.
F Clipthestaybackintoitshousing.
F Lower the bonnet and release it at the end
ofitstravel.
F Pullonthebonnettocheckthatithas
latchedcorrectly.
background
272
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
1. Screenwashandheadlampwashreservoir.
2. Coolantreservoir.
3. Brakefluidreservoir.
4. Battery/Fuses.
5. Fusebox.
6. Airfilter.
7. Engineoildipstick.
8. Engineoilfillercap.
9. Remoteearthpoint.
Petrolengines
background
273
7
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
1. Screenwashandheadlampwashreservoir.
2. Coolantreservoir.
3. Brakefluidreservoir.
4. Battery/Fuses.
5. Fusebox.
6. Airfilter.
7. Engineoildipstick.
8. Engineoilfillercap.
9. Primingpump*.
10. Remoteearthpoint.
Dieselengines
*Accordingtoengine.
background
274
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Checkinglevels
Takecarewhenworkingunderthebonnet,ascertainareasoftheenginemaybeextremelyhot(riskofburns)andthecoolingfancouldstartat
anytime(evenwiththeignitionoff).
Engine oil level
Thecheckiscarriedouteitherwhen
theignitionisswitchedonusingthe
oil level indicator in the instrument
panel for vehicles so equipped, or
usingthedipstick.
Checking using the dipstick
Thelocationofthedipstickisshowninthe
correspondingunderbonnetlayoutview.
F Takethedipstickbyitscolouredgripand
removeitcompletely.
F Wipetheendofthedipstickusingaclean
non-fluffycloth.
F Refitthedipstickandpushfullydown,then
pullitoutagaintomakethevisualcheck:
thecorrectlevelisbetweenthemarksA
and B.
It is normal to top-up the oil level between
twoservices(oroilchanges).CITROËN
recommendsthatyoucheckthelevel,andtop-
upifnecessary,every3000miles(5000kms).
Checkalloftheselevelsregularly,inlinewiththemanufacturer'sserviceschedule.Topthemupifnecessary,unlessotherwiseindicated.
Ifaleveldropssignificantly,havethecorrespondingsystemcheckedbyaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Toensurethatthereadingiscorrect,
yourvehiclemustbeparkedonalevel
surfacewiththeenginehavingbeenoff
formorethan30minutes.
A = MAX
B = MIN
If you find that the level is above the Amarkor
below the Bmark,do not start the engine.
- If the level is above the MAXmark(risk
ofdamagetotheengine),contacta
CITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
- If the level is below the MINmark,you
musttop-uptheengineoil.
background
275
7
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Thebrakefluidlevelshouldbeclose
tothe"MAX"mark.Ifitisnot,check
thebrakepadwear.
Brake fluid level
Changing the uid
Refertothemanufacturer'sserviceschedule
fordetailsoftheintervalforthisoperation.
Fluid specication
Thebrakefluidmustconformtothe
manufacturer'srecommendations.
Topping-up the engine oil level
The location of the oil filler cap is shown in the
correspondingunderbonnetlayoutview.
F Unscrew the oil filler cap to reveal the filler
aperture.
F Addoilinsmallquantities,avoidingany
spillsonenginecomponents(riskoffire).
F Waitafewminutesbeforecheckingthe
levelagainusingthedipstick.
F Addmoreoilifnecessary.
F Aftercheckingthelevel,carefullyrefitthe
oilfillercapandthedipstickinitstube.
Engine oil change
Refertothemanufacturer'sserviceschedule
fordetailsoftheintervalforthisoperation.
Inordertomaintainthereliabilityoftheengine
and emission control system, never use
additivesintheengineoil.
Aftertopping-uptheoil,thecheckwhen
switchingontheignitionwiththeoil
level indicator in the instrument panel
isnotvalidduringthe30minutesafter
toppingup.
Oil grade
Beforetopping-uptheoilorchangingtheoil,
checkthattheoilisthecorrectgradeforyour
engineandconformstothemanufacturer's
recommendations.
background
276
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Coolant level
The coolant level should be close
tothe"MAX"markbutshouldnever
exceedit.
Inaddition,asthecoolingsystemispressurised,
waitatleastonehourafterswitchingoffthe
enginebeforecarryingoutanywork.
Toavoidanyriskofscalding,unscrewthecap
bytwoturnstoallowthepressuretodrop.
When the pressure has dropped, remove the
capandtop-upthelevel.
Fluid specication
The coolant must conform to the
manufacturer'srecommendations.
The cooling fan may start after switching
off the engine: take care with articles and
clothing that might be caught by the fan
blades.
Whentheengineiswarm,thetemperatureof
thecoolantisregulatedbythefan.
Topping-up
The reservoir must be topped-up without delay
byaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Diesel fuel additive level
(Diesel with particle filter)
The additive reservoir low level is
indicatedbyfixedilluminationofthis
warninglamp,accompaniedbyan
audiblesignalandamessagethat
the particle filter additive level is
toolow.
Thewarninglampcomesonwhentheignition
isswitchedon,oreverytimethestalkis
operated,untilthereservoirisrefilled.
Nexttimeyoustop,refillthescreenwash/
headlampwashreservoir.
Screenwash/headlamp
wash level low
In the case of vehicles fitted with
headlamp washers, when the fluid
reservoir low level is reached this
warninglampcomesoninthe
instrument panel, accompanied by an
audiblesignalandamessage.
Avoidprolongedcontactofusedoilor
fluidswiththeskin.
Most of these fluids are harmful to
healthorindeedverycorrosive.
Do not discard used oil or fluids into
sewersorontotheground.
TakeusedoiltoaCITROËNdealeror
aqualifiedworkshop(France)ortoan
authorisedwastedisposalsite.
Used products
background
277
7
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Checks
12 V battery
The battery does not require any
maintenance.
However,checkthattheterminals
arecleanandcorrectlytightened,
particularlyinsummerandwinter.
Refertothemanufacturer's
service schedule for details of the
replacement intervals for these
components.
Air filter and passenger compartment filter
Replace the oil filter each time the
engineoilischanged.
Refertothemanufacturer's
service schedule for details of
the replacement interval for this
component.
Oil filter
The presence of this label, in particular
with the Stop & Start system, indicates
the use of a specific 12 V lead-acid
batterywithspecialtechnologyand
specification.
The involvement of a CITROËN dealer
oraqualifiedworkshopisessentialwhen
replacingordisconnectingthebattery.
Unlessotherwiseindicated,checkthesecomponentsinaccordancewiththemanufacturer'sservicescheduleandaccordingtoyourengine.
Otherwise,havethemcheckedbyaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
Dependingontheenvironment(e.g.dusty
atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle
(e.g.citydriving),replace them twice as often
if necessary.
Acloggedpassengercompartmentfiltermay
have an adverse effect on the performance
oftheairconditioningsystemandgenerate
undesirableodours.
Particle filter (Diesel)
The start of saturation of the particle
filterisindicatedbythefixed
illuminationofthiswarninglamp
accompaniedbyawarningmessage.
As soon as the traffic conditions permit,
regeneratethefilterbydrivingata
speedofatleast40mph(60km/h)until
thewarninglampgoesoff.
Ifthewarninglampstayson,this
indicatesalowadditivelevel.
For more information on Checking
levels and the Diesel additive level in
particular,refertothecorresponding
section.
On a new vehicle, the first particle
filterregenerationoperationsmaybe
accompaniedbya"burning"smell,
whichisperfectlynormal.
Followingprolongedoperationofthe
vehicle at very low speed or at idle,
youmay,inexceptionalcircumstances,
notice the emission of water vapour at
theexhaustonacceleration.Thisdoes
not affect the behaviour of the vehicle
ortheenvironment.
Whencarryingoutworkonthebattery,refer
to the "12 V battery" section for details of the
precautionstobetakenbeforedisconnecting
thebatteryandfollowingitsreconnection.
background
278
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Brakeweardependsonthestyle
ofdriving,particularlyinthecase
of vehicles used in town, over short
distances.Itmaybenecessarytohave
theconditionofthebrakeschecked,
evenbetweenvehicleservices.
Brake pads
Forinformationoncheckingbrake
disc wear, contact a CITROËN dealer
oraqualifiedworkshop.
Brake disc wear
Only use products recommended by
CITROËN or products of equivalent
qualityandspecification.
In order to optimise the operation of
units as important as those in the
brakingsystem,CITROËNselectsand
offersveryspecificproducts.
Afterwashingthevehicle,dampness,
or in wintry conditions, ice can form
onthebrakediscsandpads:braking
efficiencymaybereduced.Makelight
brakeapplicationstodryanddefrost
thebrakes.
Electric parking brake
For more information, refer to the "Electric
parking brake - Operating faults"section.
This system does not require any
routineservicing.However,inthe
event of a problem, have the system
checkedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Manual gearbox
Thegearboxdoesnotrequireany
maintenance(nooilchange).
Refertothemanufacturer'sservice
scheduleforthecheckingintervalfor
thiscomponent.
Automatic gearbox
Thegearboxdoesnotrequireany
maintenance(nooilchange).
Refertothemanufacturer'sservice
schedule for details of the level
checkingintervalforthiscomponent.
Toavoiddamagingtheelectricalunits,
never useahighpressurejetwashin
theenginecompartment.
Unlessthereisaleakinthecircuit,adropin
thebrakefluidlevelindicatesthatthebrake
padsareworn.
background
279
7
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
AdBlue
®
additive and SCR system
forBlueHDiDieselengines
To assure respect for the environment and
conformity with the new Euro 6 emissions
standard,withoutadverselyaffectingthe
performance or fuel consumption of Diesel
engines,CITROËNhastakenthedecisionto
equip its vehicles with an effective system that
associates SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction)
with a particle filter (FAP) for the treatment of
exhaustgases.
Presentation of the SCR system
UsingafluidcalledAdBlue
®
containingurea,a
catalyticconverterturnsupto85%ofnitrogen
oxides(NOx)intonitrogenandwater,whichare
harmlesstohealthandtheenvironment.
The AdBlue
®
additive is held in a special
tanklocatedunderthebootattherearof
thevehicle.Ithasacapacityof17litres:this
providesadrivingrangeofabout12500miles
(20000km),afterwhichanalertistriggered
warningyouwhenthereserveremainingis
enoughforjust1500miles(2400km).
Duringeachscheduledserviceofyourvehicle
byaCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop,
the AdBlue
®
additivetankisrefilledinorderto
allownormaloperationoftheSCRsystem.
Iftheestimatedmileagebetweentwoservices
isgreaterthan12500miles(20000km),we
recommendthatyougotoaCITROËNdealer
oraqualifiedworkshoptohavethenecessary
top-upcarriedout.
Once the AdBlue
®
tankisempty,
asystemrequiredbyregulations
preventsstartingoftheengine.
If the SCR is faulty, the level of
emissions from your vehicle will no
longermeettheEuro6standard:you
vehiclebecomespolluting.
In the event of a confirmed fault
withtheSCRsystem,youmustgo
to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshopassoonaspossible:after
arunningdistanceof650miles
(1100km),asystemwillbetriggered
automaticallytopreventenginestarting.
background
280
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Freezing of the AdBlue
®
additive
The AdBlue
®
additive freezes at
temperaturesbelowaround-11°C.
The SCR system includes a heater
for the AdBlue
®
tank,allowingyouto
continuedrivinginverycoldconditions.
Topping-up the AdBlue
®
FillingtheAdBlue
®
tankisanoperation
included in every routine service on your
vehicle by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Nevertheless,giventhecapacityofthetank,it
may be necessary to top-up the fluid between
services,moreparticularlyifanalert(warning
lampsandamessage)signalstherequirement.
YoucangotoaCITROËNdealeroraqualified
workshop.
Ifyouenvisagetopping-upyourself,please
readthefollowingwarningscarefully.
Precautions in use
Use only AdBlue
®
fluid that meets the
ISO22241standard.
AdBlue
®
isaurea-basedsolution.Thisliquidis
non-flammable,colourlessandodourless(kept
inacoolarea).
Intheeventofcontactwiththeskin,wash
theaffectedareawithsoapandwater.Inthe
eventofcontactwiththeeyes,wash(irrigate)
theeyeswithlargeamountsofwaterorwith
aneyewashsolutionforatleast15minutes.
Ifaburningsensationorirritationpersists,get
medicalattention.
If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth
withcleanwaterandthendrinkplentyofwater.
Incertainconditions(highambient
temperature,forexample),theriskofreleaseof
ammoniacannotbeexcluded:donotinhalethe
fluid.Ammoniavapourhasanirritanteffecton
mucousmembranes(eyes,noseandthroat).
The supply in a non-drip bottle simplifies
topping-up.Youcanobtain1.89litre(halfaUS
gallon)bottlesfromaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop.
Never dilute AdBlue
®
withwater.
Never pour AdBlue
®
into the Diesel fuel
tank.
Never top-up from an AdBlue
®
dispenserreservedforheavygoods
vehicles.
Keep AdBlue
®
out of the reach of
children,initsoriginalbottle.
Never transfer AdBlue
®
to another
container:itwouldloseitspurity.
background
281
7
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Recommendations on storage
AdBlue
®
freezes at about -11°C and
deterioratesabove25°C.Itisrecommended
that bottles be stored in a cool area and
protectedfromdirectsunlight.
Undertheseconditions,thefluidcanbekept
foratleastayear.
If the additive has frozen, it can be used once it
hascompletelythawedout.
Procedure
Beforetopping-up,ensurethatthevehicleis
parkedonaflatandlevelsurface.
In wintry conditions, ensure that the
temperatureofthevehicleisabove-11°C.
Otherwise,byfreezing,theAdBlue
®
cannot
bepouredintoitstank.Parkyourvehicleina
warmer area for a few hours to allow the top-up
tobecarriedout.
F PresstheSTART/STOPbuttontoswitch
offtheengine.
F For access to the AdBlue
®
tank,raisethe
boot floor, or on 7-seat versions, unfold the
righthandseatinthethirdrow.
Never store bottles of AdBlue
®
in your
vehicle.
F Withoutpressing,turntheblackcapa
quarterturnanti-clockwiseandliftitoff.
F Turn the blue cap a 6
th
of a turn anti-
clockwise.
F Liftoffthecap.
F Obtain a bottle of AdBlue
®
.Afterfirst
checkingtheuse-bydate,readcarefully
the instructions on use on the label before
pouringthecontentsofthebottleintoyour
vehicle'sAdBlue
®
tank.
background
282
Practical information
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap07_info-pratiques_ed01-2016
Important:ifyourvehicle'sAdBlue
®
tankiscompletelyempty-whichis
confirmedbythealertmessagesand
theimpossibilityofstartingtheengine,
youmustaddatleast3.8litresoffluid.
Important:when topping-up after
running out of AdBlue
®
,signalled
bythemessage"Top-upAdBlue:
Startingprevented",youmustwait
forapproximately5minutesbefore
switchingontheignition,without
opening the driver's door, unlocking
the vehicle, placing the key of the
"Keyless Entry and Starting" system
inside the vehicle or inserting the
electronic key in the reader.
Switchontheignition,waitfor
10seconds,thenstarttheengine.
If any fluid is spilt or splashed, wash
immediately with cold water or wipe with
adampcloth.
If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off
usingaspongeandhotwater.
F Afteremptyingthebottle,wipeawayany
spillagearoundthetankfillerusingadamp
cloth.
F Refitthebluecaptothetankandturnita
6
th
ofaturnclockwise,toitsstop.
F Refittheblackcapandturnitaquarterof
aturnclockwisewithoutpressing.Ensure
that the indicator on the cap lines up with
theindicatoronthesupport.
F Dependingonequipment,returnthespare
wheeland/orthestorageboxtothebottom
oftheboot.
F Refitthebootcarpetandclosethetailgate.
Do not dispose of AdBlue
®
bottles in
thehouseholdwaste.Placethemina
container provided for this purpose or
takethemtoyourdealer.
background
283
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Warningtriangle
This safety device should be used in addition to
thehazardwarninglamps.
Itspresenceinthevehicleismandatory.
Alocationforstowingthewarningtriangleis
providedinthetailgateinteriortrim.
Placing the triangle in the road
F Placethetrianglebehindthevehicle,as
requiredbythelegislationinforceinyour
country.
Beforeleavingyourvehicletosetup
andinstallthetriangle,switchonthe
hazardwarninglampsandputonyour
highvisibilityvest.
Refer to the instructions provided by the
supplieronfoldingandunfoldingthe
triangle.
background
284
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Thiskitisinstalledinthestoragebox,underthe
bootfloor.
Thiskitconsistsofacompressorandasealantcartridge.
It allows the temporary repairofatyre.
Youarethenabletogotothenearestgarage.
Itisdesignedtorepairmostpunctureswhichcouldaffectthetyre,locatedonthetyretreador
shoulder.
Itscompressorcanbeusedtocheckandadjustthepressureofthetyre.
Temporarypuncturerepairkit
Access to the kit
Dependingonversion,thekitisstowedunder
thefrontpassenger'sseatorinthestoragebox
underthesecondrowfootwell.
List of tools
*Dependingonequipment.
All of these tools are specific to your vehicle
andcanvaryaccordingtoequipment.Donot
usethemforotherpurposes.
1. 12Vcompressor.
Containsasealantcartridgeforthe
temporary repair of a tyre and can also be
usedforadjustingtyrepressures.
2. Chocks*toimmobilisethewheelsofthe
vehicle.
3. Wheelboltcoverremover*.
Forremovingthewheelboltcoversonalloy
wheels.
4. Removabletowingeye.
For more information on Towing, refer to the
correspondingsection.
background
285
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
A. "Sealant"or"Air"positionselector.
B. On "I"/off"O"switch.
C. Deflationbutton.
D. Pressuregauge(inbarsandpsi).
E. Compartmenthousingacablewithan
adaptorfora12Vsocket.
Description of the kit
ThespeedlimitstickerImustbeaffixed
tothevehicle'ssteeringwheeltoremind
youthatawheelisintemporaryuse.
Donotexceedaspeedof50mph
(80km/h)whendrivingwithatyre
repairedusingthistypeofkit.
F. Sealantcartridge.
G. Whitepipewithcapforrepair.
H. Blackpipeforinflation.
I. Speedlimitsticker.
Thetyreinflationpressuresaregivenonthis
label.
Thevehicle'selectricsystemallowsthe
connectionofthecompressorforlong
enoughtoinflateatyreafterapuncture
repair.
background
286
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
1. Sealing
Repair procedure
Avoidremovinganyforeignbodies
whichhavepenetratedintothetyre.
F Uncoil the white pipe Gfully.
F Unscrewthecapfromthewhitepipe.
F Connect the white pipe to the valve of the
tyretoberepaired.
F Switchofftheignition.
F Turn the selector A to the "sealant"
position.
F CheckthattheswitchB is in
position "O".
F Connectthecompressor'selectricplugto
thevehicle's12Vsocket.
F Startthevehicleandleavetheengine
running.
Takecare,thisproductisharmfulif
swallowedandcausesirritationtotheeyes.
Keep this product out of the reach of
children.
Do not start the compressor before
connectingthewhitepipetothetyre
valve:thesealantproductwouldbe
expelledthroughthepipe.
background
287
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
F Switchonthecompressorbymoving
the switch B to position "I" until the tyre
pressurereaches2.0bars.
Thesealantisinjectedintothetyreunder
pressure;donotdisconnectthepipefrom
thevalveduringthisoperation(riskof
splashing).
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the
pressure is not attained, this indicates
thatthetyreisnotrepairable;contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshopforassistance.
F Removethekitandscrewthecapbackon
thewhitepipe.
Takecaretoavoidstainingyourvehicle
withtracesoffluid.Keepthekittohand.
F Driveimmediatelyforapproximately
threemiles(fivekilometres),atreduced
speed(between15and35mph
(20and60km/h)),toplugthepuncture.
F Stoptochecktherepairandthetyre
pressureusingthekit.
Tyre under-ination detection
Afterrepairofthetyre,thewarning
lamp will remain on until the system is
reinitialised.
For more information on Under-
inflation detection, refer to the
correspondingsection.
background
288
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
2. Ination
F Turn the selector A to the "Air"
position.
F UncoiltheblackpipeHfully.
F Connecttheblackpipetothe
valveofthewheel.
F Connectthecompressor'selectricplugto
thevehicle's12Vsocket.
F Startthevehicleagainandleavethe
enginerunning.
Assoonaspossible,gotoaCITROËN
dealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
You must inform the technician that you
haveusedthiskit.Afterinspection,the
technician will advise you on whether
the tyre can be repaired or if it must be
replaced.
F Adjustthepressureusingthecompressor
(toinflate:switchB in position "I";
todeflate:switchB in position "O" and
press button C), in accordance with the
vehicle'styrepressurelabel(locatedonthe
lefthanddooraperture).
A loss of pressure indicates that the
puncturehasnotbeenfullyplugged;
contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified
workshopforassistance.
F Removeandstowthekit.
F Driveatreducedspeed(50mph[80km/h]
max)limitingthedistancetravelledto
approximately120miles(200km).
background
289
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Removing the cartridge
F Stowtheblackpipe.
F
Detachtheangledbasefromthewhitepipe.
F Supportthecompressorvertically.
F Unscrewthecartridgefromthebottom.
Bewareofdischargesoffluid.
Theexpirydateofthefluidisindicated
onthecartridge.
Thesealantcartridgeisdesignedfor
singleuse;evenifonlypartlyused,it
mustbereplaced.
Afteruse,donotdiscardthecartridge
intotheenvironment,takeittoan
authorised waste disposal site or a
CITROËNdealer.
Donotforgettoobtainanewsealant
cartridge,availablefromCITROËN
dealersorfromaqualifiedworkshop.
background
290
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Checking /adjusting tyre pressures
You can also use the compressor without
injectinganyproduct,tocheckandifnecessary
adjustyourtyrepressures.
F Turn the selector A to the "Air"
position.
F UncoiltheblackpipeHfully.
F Connecttheblackpipetothe
tyrevalve.
F Connectthecompressor'selectrical
connectortothevehicle's12Vsocket.
F Startthevehicleandlettheenginerun.
F Adjustthepressureusingthecompressor
(toinflate:switchB in position "I";
todeflate:switchB in position "O" and
press button C),accordingtothevehicle's
tyrepressurelabel.
F Removethekitthenstowit.
Should the pressure of one or more
tyresbeadjusted,itisnecessaryto
reinitialise the under-inflation detection
system.
For more information on Under-
inflation detection, refer to the
correspondingsection.
background
291
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Spare wheel
The tools are installed in the boot under the
floor.
Removethebootcarpetforaccesstothem.
Access to the tools
List of tools*
Procedureforchangingawheelwithapuncturedtyreforthesparewheelusingthetoolsprovidedwiththevehicle.
All of these tools are specific to your
vehicleandcanvaryaccordingtothelevel
ofequipment.Donotusethemforother
purposes.
1. Wheelbrace.
Forremovingthewheeltrimandremoving
thewheelbolts.
2. Chockforimmobilisingthevehicle(except
versionswithmanualgearbox).
3. Jackwithintegralhandle.
Forraisingthevehicle.
4. Wheelboltcoverremover.
Forremovingthewheelboltcoversonalloy
wheels.
5. Socketforthesecuritybolts(locatedinthe
glovebox).
Foradaptingthewheelbracetothespecial
"security"bolts.
*Accordingtoequipment.
background
292
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Taking out the wheel
F Unscrewthecentralnut.
F Removethefixing(nutandscrew).
F Lift the spare wheel towards you from the
rear.
F Removethewheelfromtheboot.
As the spare wheel is narrower than the
wheels on the vehicle, in the event of a
puncture, the punctured wheel must be
carriedintheboot.
Thesparewheelislocatedinthebootunderthefloor.
Access to the spare wheel
Putting the spare wheel back in
place
F Returnthewheeltoitshousing.
F Unscrewthenutafewturnsonthescrew.
F Positionthefixing(nutandscrew)inthe
middleofthewheel.
F Fullytightenthecentralnuttosecurethe
wheelcorrectly.
F Returntheboxtoitspositioninthemiddle
ofthewheel.
background
293
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Spare wheel
Procedureforchangingawheelwithapuncturedtyreforthesparewheelusingthetoolsprovidedwiththevehicle.
Some of the tools are accessible from inside
theboot.
Thewheelchock2 as well as the wheelbrace
extension6arestowedundertherighthand
bootsilltrim.
The wheelbrace 1andthetowingeye7 are
stowedunderthelefthandbootsill.
Access to the tools*
2. Wheelchockforimmobilisingthevehicle
(exceptversionswithmanualgearbox).
3. Jackwithintegralhandle.
Forraisingthevehicle.
4. Wheelboltcoverremover.
Forremovingthewheelboltcoversonalloy
wheels.
5. Socketforthesecuritybolts(stowedinthe
glovebox).
Foradaptingthewheelbracetothespecial
securitybolts.
6. Wheelbraceextension.
Forlowering/raisingthesparewheel
carrier.
7. Towingeye.
Wheel with trim
When removing the wheel, detach the trim
firstusingthewheelbrace1pullingatthevalve
passagehole.
When refitting the wheel, refit the trim
startingbyplacingitsnotchfacingthevalve
andpressarounditsedgewiththepalmofyour
hand.
List of tools*
All of these tools are specific to your vehicle
andcanvaryaccordingtoequipment.Donot
usethemforotherpurposes.
1. Wheelbrace.
Forremovingthewheeltrimandthewheel
fixingbolts.
*Dependingonversion.Acompletesetoftools
isprovidedwiththesparewheel.
Theothertools,thejack3 and the tool for
removingthewheelboltcoversonalloy
wheels 4,arestowedinaboxattachedtothe
sparewheel.
The assembly is secured under the vehicle in
acarrier.
background
294
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Taking out the spare wheel
The spare wheel is supported by a carrier
underneaththevehicle.
Access to the spare wheel*
F Takeoutthewheel/toolboxassembly
fromtherearofthevehicle.
F Straightenthesparewheelforaccessto
the tools (A).
F Fold the concertina board and put the left
hand third row seat into position (if your
vehiclehasthem).
F Raise the pre-cut section of carpet to
exposethenutforoperatingthespare
wheelcarrier.
F Usingtheextension6 fitted to the end of
the wheelbrace 1,turnthenutclockwise
to unwind the carrier cable until the spare
wheelreachestheground.Unwindthe
lengthneededforaccesstothewheel.
Only a "space-saver" type of spare
wheelcanbefittedunderthevehicle.
*Dependingonversion.
F Detachthelinkpiecefromthetool
boxlid(B - C).
F Passthelinkpiecethroughthemiddleof
the wheel to free it (D).
background
295
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
A punctured wheel from the vehicle
cannotbefittedunderthevehicle.It
mustbecarriedintheboot.Useacover
toprotecttheboot.
F Pressthetongue,slidethetoolboxcover
to the centre and remove it for access to
theothertools(jackandwheelboltcover
removerforalloywheels).
Putting the carrier and spare
wheel back in place
F Stowthecorrespondingtoolsinthebox
andclosethecover.
F Positionthetoolboxontheground.
Stowing the tools
F Returnthetoolstotheboxandstowthe
boxinthevehicle'sboot.
F Windinthecarrierbyturningthe
wheelbraceclockwise:oncethecableis
fullywoundinyoushouldnolongerfeel
anyresistance.
F Stow the other tools in the locations
providedintheboot.
When the spare wheel is fitted in place
of a punctured wheel, it is essential
to return the carrier and tools to their
normal position under the vehicle
beforemovingoff.
background
296
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
F Insertthelinkpieceintheapertureinthe
toolbox(B - C).
F Insertthecentreguideintothemiddleof
thewheel.
F Placethewheel/toolboxassemblyunder
therearofthevehicle.
F Centre and position the spare wheel on the
toolbox(D).
F Raisethewheel/toolboxassembly
underneaththevehiclebyturningthe
carrierdrivenutanticlockwiseusingthe
wheelbraceandtheextension.
F Tightenfully.Whenthecableisfullywound
in,rotationofthenutnolongerpresents
anyresistance.
F Checkthatthewheelishorizontallyflat
againstthefloor.
F Straightenthewheel.
F Passthelinkpiecethroughthemiddleof
the wheel (A).
background
297
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Removing a wheel
Parking the vehicle
Immobilise the vehicle where it does not
blocktraffic:thegroundmustbelevel,
stableandnotslippery.
Applytheparkingbrakeunlessithas
beenprogrammedtoautomaticmode,
switchofftheignitionandengagefirst
gear*toblockthewheels.
Checkthatthebrakingwarninglamp
and the Pwarninglampintheparking
brakecontrollevercomeon.
Forgreatersafety,placethechock2
againstthewheeloppositetotheone
beingchanged.
Theoccupantsmustgetoutofthe
vehicleandwaitwheretheyaresafe.
Nevergounderneathavehicle
supportedbyajack;useanaxlestand.
List of operations
F Removethewheelboltcover(s)usingthe
tool 4(dependingonequipment).
F Fitthesecuritysocket5 on the
wheelbrace 1toslackenthesecuritybolt
(iffitted).
F Slackentheotherbolts(nomorethana
1/4turn)usingthewheelbrace1only.
* Position Pforanautomaticgearbox.
Donotuse:
- thejackforanypurposeotherthan
liftingthevehicle,
- anyotherjackthantheone
suppliedbythemanufacturer.
F Placethefootofthejack3ontheground
andcheckthatitisdirectlybelowthe
front A or rear Bjackingpointprovidedon
the underbody, whichever is closest to the
wheeltobechanged.
Ensurethatthejackisstable.Ifthe
groundisslipperyorloose,thejack
mayslipordrop-Riskofinjury!
Ensurethatthejackispositionedonly
atoneofthejackingpointsA or B
underthevehicle,makingsurethatthe
vehicle'scontactsurfaceiscentredon
theheadofthejack.Otherwisethereis
ariskofdamagetothevehicleand/orof
thejackdropping-Riskofinjury!
background
298
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
F Extendthejack3untilitsheadcomesintocontactwiththejackingpointA or Bused;the
vehicle'scontactsurfaceA or Bmustengagewiththecentralpartoftheheadofthejack
F Raisethevehicleuntilthereissufficientspacebetweenthewheelandthegroundtoadmitthe
spare(notpunctured)wheeleasily.
F Remove the bolts and store them in a clean
place.
F Removethewheel.
background
299
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Fitting a wheel
F Lowerthevehiclefully.
F Foldthejack3anddetachit.
List of operations
F Putthewheelinplaceonthehub.
F Screwintheboltsfullybyhand.
F Pre-tightenthesecurityboltusingthe
wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security
socket5(dependingonequipment).
F Pre-tightentheotherboltsusingthe
wheelbrace 1only.
Thejackmustonlybeusedtochangea
wheelwithadamagedtyre.
Thejackdoesnotrequireany
maintenance.
ThejackconformstoEuropean
legislation,suchasdefinedinthe
MachineryDirective2006/42/CE.
background
300
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Fitting the "space-saver"
spare wheel
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels,
whentighteningtheboltsonfitting,it
is normal to notice that the washers
do not come into contact with the
"space-saver"sparewheel.Thewheel
is secured by the conical surface of
eachbolt.
After changing a wheel
To correctly store the punctured wheel
in the boot (not in the location for the
space-saver wheel), first remove the
centralcover.
Whenusingthe"space-saver"type
sparewheel,donotexceed50mph
(80km/h).
Havethetighteningoftheboltsandthe
pressureofthesparewheelchecked
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshopwithoutdelay.
Have the punctured wheel repaired
and refitted to the vehicle as soon as
possible.
F Tightenthesecurityboltusingthe
wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security
socket5(dependingonequipment).
F Tightentheotherboltsusingthe
wheelbrace 1only.
F Refitthewheelboltcover(s)(dependingon
equipment).
F Stowthetoolsinthebox.
Thetyreinflationpressuresaregivenonthis
label.
background
301
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Changingabulb
ForH7typebulbswithlugs...takecare
to observe their correct installation
soastoensurethebestlighting
performance.
Risk of electrocution
Xenon bulbs (D5S-25W) must be
replaced by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshop.
Front lamps
Model with xenon headlamps
1. Directional dipped beam headlamps
(D5S-25W).
2. Mainbeamheadlamps(H7-55W).
3. Daytimerunninglamps/sidelamps
(6lightemittingdiodes-LEDs).
4. Direction indicators
(6lightemittngdiodes-LEDs).
5. Frontfoglamps(H11-55W).
Model with halogen headlamps
1. Dippedbeamheadlamps(H7-55W).
2. Mainbeamheadlamps(H7-55W).
3. Daytimerunninglamps/sidelamps
(4lightemittingdiodes-LEDs).
4. Directionindicators(PWY24W).
5. Foglamps(H11-55W).
Insomeweatherconditions(e.g.low
temperature or humidity), the presence
ofmistingontheinternalsurfaceofthe
glassoftheheadlampsandrearlamps
isnormal;itdisappearsafterthelamps
havebeenonforafewminutes.
Light-emitting diodes - LEDs
For replacement, contact a CITROËN dealer or
qualifiedworkshop.
background
302
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Directional dipped beam
headlamps (xenon model)
Main beam headlamps (xenon model)
F Remove the protective plastic cover by
pullingthetab.
F Pushtheconnector.
F Removethebulbandchangeit.
For reassembly, carry out these operations in
reverseorder.
D5Sxenonbulbsmustbechanged
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop,asthereisariskof
electrocution.
In the event of failure of one
of the D5S bulbs, it is recommended
that the bulb on the other side be
changedatthesametime.
The headlamps have polycarbonate
lenseswithaprotectivecoating:
F do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a
detergent or solvent product,
F useaspongeandsoapywaterora
pH neutral product,
F whenusingahighpressurewasher
onpersistentmarks,donotkeep
the lance directed towards the
lampsortheiredgesfortoolong,
soasnottodamagetheirprotective
coatingandseals.
Changingabulbshouldonlybedone
after the headlamp has been switched
offforseveralminutes(riskofserious
burns).
F Do not touch the bulb directly with
yourfingers,usealint-freecloth.
It is imperative to use only anti-
ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs to avoid
damagingtheheadlamp.
Always replace a failed bulb with a
new bulb with the same type and
specification.
background
303
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Dipped beam headlamps
(halogen model)
F Remove the protective plastic cover by
pullingthetab.
F Pushtheconnector.
F Removethebulbandchangeit.
For reassembly, carry out these operations in
reverseorder.
Main beam headlamps
(halogen model)
F Turn the protective plastic cover to
removeit.
F Disconnecttheconnector.
F Releasetheclips.
F Removethebulbandchangeit.
For reassembly, carry out these operations in
reverseorder.
background
304
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
The direction indicator bulb is located below
thefrontlamp.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anti-
clockwise.
F Removethebulbholder.
F Changethefailedbulb.
For reassembly, carry out these operations in
reverseorder.
Direction indicators Front foglamps
F Unclipthefinisherbypullingatthetop.
F Removethetwoscrewstoremovetheunit.
F Turnthebulbholderaquarterturn.
F Removethebulbholder.
F Changethefailedbulb.
For reassembly, carry out these operations in
reverseorder,pressingonthefinishertorefitit.
Fasterflashingofadirectionindicator
warninglamp(leftorright)indicatesa
failedbulbonthatside.
Direction indicators (light
emitting diodes - LED)
For the replacement of this type of lamp,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
background
305
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
You should contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshopforthereplacementofthe
light-emittingdiode-LED.
Door mirror spotlamps
Integrated direction indicator
side repeaters
You should contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshopforthereplacementofthese
bulbs.
1. Direction indicators (PY21W amber).
2. Sidelamps/foglamps(P21/5W).
Rear lamps
Light-emitting diodes -
LEDs
For replacement, contact a CITROËN
dealerorqualifiedworkshop.
3. Brakelamps/sidelamps(light-emitting
diodes-LEDs).
4. Reversinglamps(W16W).
5. Directionindicators(PY21W).
Model with LED lamps
3. Sidelamps(5W5).
4. Brakelamps(P21/W).
5. Directionindicators(WY16W).
6. Reversinglamps(W16W).
Model with conventional bulb lamps
background
306
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Lamps on the tailgate
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshopforthereplacement
ofreversinglampanddirectionindicator
bulbs.
Identifythefailedbulb.
F Opentheboot.
F Removetheaccesscover.
F RemovethethreelampfixingscrewsA.
F Disconnectthelampconnector.
F Carefully remove the lamp from the outside
bypressingtheretainingclipB.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn
anti-clockwiseandpullthebulbout.
F Changethebulb.
For reassembly, carry out these operations in
reverseorder.
Model with LED lamps
Model with conventional bulb lamps
background
307
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
1. Directionindicators(PY21Wamber).
2. Sidelamps/foglamps(P21/5W).
Rear lamps
3. Sidelamps(light-emittingdiodes-LEDs).
4. Brakelamps(light-emittingdiodes-LEDs).
5. Directionindicators(PY21W).
6. Reversinglamps(light-emittingdiodes-
LEDs).
Model with LED lamps
3. Sidelamps(W5W).
4. Brakelamps/sidelamps(P21W).
5. Directionindicators(WY16W).
6. Reversinglamps(W16W).
Model with conventional bulb lamps
Light-emitting diodes -
LEDs
For replacement, contact a CITROËN
dealerorqualifiedworkshop.
background
308
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Lamps on the tailgate
Model with LED lamps
Model with conventional bulb lamps
Identifythefailedbulb.
F Opentheboot.
F Removetheaccesscover.
F RemovethethreelampfixingscrewsA.
F Disconnectthelampconnector.
F Carefullyremovethelampfromitshousing.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn
anti-clockwiseandpullthebulbout.
F Changethebulb.
For reassembly, carry out these operations in
reverseorder.
background
309
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Direction indicator, sidelamp and
foglamp
Accessisbypassingahandunderthebumper.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and
pullitout.
F Changethebulb.
For reassembly carry out these operations in
reverseorder.
You can also contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshopforthereplacementofthese
bulbs.
For the replacement of this type of lamp,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Third brake lamp (light emitting
diodes-LED)
Number plate lamps (W5W)
Torefit,pressonthelenstoclipitinplace.
F Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the cut-
outsinthelens.
F Pushitoutwardstounclipit.
F Removethelens.
F Changethefaultybulb.
background
310
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Beforechangingafuse:
F the cause of the failure must be identified
and rectified,
F all electrical consumers must be switched
off,
F the vehicle must be immobilised with the
ignitionoff,
F identifythefailedfuseusingthetablesand
layoutdrawingsinthefollowingpages.
Changing a fuse
Good Failed
The replacement of a fuse not shown in
the tables below may cause a serious
malfunctionofyourvehicle.Contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Tweezer
Changingafuse
Theextractiontweezerislocatedinthe
dashboardfuseboxcompartment.
Foraccesstoit:
F unclipthecoverbypullingatthetopright,
then left,
F disengagethecovercompletely,by
carefullypullinginthedirectionindicated
by the arrow,
F removethetweezer.
Access to the tools
Toreplaceafuse,youmust:
F usethespecialtweezertoextractthefuse
fromitshousingandchecktheconditionof
itsfilament.
F always replace the failed fuse with a fuse of
thesamerating(samecolour);usingafuse
ofadifferentratingcouldcausefaults(risk
offire).
Ifthefusefailsagainsoonafterreplacement,
havethevehicle'selectricalsystemcheckedby
aCITROËNdealeroraqualifiedworkshop.
background
311
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
CITROËN will not accept responsibility
forthecostincurredinrepairingyour
vehicleorforrectifyingmalfunctions
resultingfromtheinstallationof
accessories not supplied and not
recommended by CITROËN and
not installed in accordance with its
instructions, in particular when the
combined consumption of all of the
additional equipment connected
exceeds10milliamperes.
Installing electrical
accessories
Yourvehicle'selectricalsystemis
designedtooperatewithstandardor
optionalequipment.
Beforeinstallingotherelectrical
equipment or accessories on your
vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshop.
background
312
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Dashboard fuses
Thetwofuseboxesarelocatedinthelowerdashboard(left-handside).
Access to the fuses
F Referto"Accesstothetools".
Fuse tables
Fusebox 1
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F1 40 A Heatedrearscreen.
F2 20 A Electricdoormirrors.
F5 30 A Panoramic sunroof blind
F6 20 A 12Vsocket,rearmultimedia.
F7 20 A 230Vsocket.
F9 25 A Heatedseats.
F10 20 A Trailerinterfaceunit.
F11 20 A Airconditioningfan.
F12 30 A Electricwindowmotors.
background
313
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Fusebox 2
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F7 10 A Boot12Vsocket,rearmultimedia.
F8 20 A Rearwiper.
F10 30 A Locks.
F17 5 A Instrumentpanel.
F18 5 A Automaticgearboxgearselector.
F21 3 A START/STOPbutton.
F22 3 A Rainandsunshinesensor,windscreencamera.
F24 5 A Parkingsensors,panoramicvisualaid.
F27 5 A Automaticgearbox.
F29 20 A Audioandtelematicsystems.
F32 15 A 12Vsockets.
F35 5 A Headlampbeamheightadjustment,heatedrearscreen,radar.
F36 5 A
Interiorlighting:glovebox,centralstorage,readinglamps,
courtesylamps.
background
314
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Engine compartment fuses
Thefuseboxisplacedintheengine
compartmentnearthebattery.
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F16 20 A Headlampwash.
F18 10 A Righthandmainbeam.
F19 10 A Lefthandmainbeam.
F29 40 A Wipers.
Fuse table
Access to the fuses
F Unclipthecover,bypushingthetwored
latchestowardstherearofthevehicle.
F Changethefuse.
F When you have finished, close the cover
carefullytoensurecorrectsealingofthe
fusebox.
background
315
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
12 V battery
Thebatteryislocatedunderthebonnet.
Foraccesstothe(+)terminal:
F releasethebonnetusingtheinteriorlever,
thentheexteriorsafetycatch,
F raise the bonnet and secure it with its stay,
F lift the plastic cover for access to the (+)
terminal.
Access to the battery
Procedureforstartingtheengineusinganotherbatteryorchargingadischargedbattery.
Protect your eyes and face before
handlingthebattery.
All operations on the battery must be
carried out in a well ventilated area and
awayfromnakedflamesandsources
ofsparks,soastoavoidtheriskof
explosionorfire.
Washyourhandsafterwards.
Versions equipped with Stop & Start are
fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of
specifictechnologyandspecification.
Its replacement should be carried out
only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Batteries contain harmful substances
suchassulphuricacidandlead.
They must be disposed of in
accordancewithregulationsandmust
not, in any circumstances, be discarded
withhouseholdwaste.
Takeusedremotecontrolbatteriesand
vehicle batteries to a special collection
point.
General points
Lead-acid starter batteries
If your vehicle has an automatic
gearbox,donottrytostarttheengine
bypushingthevehicle.
The(-)batteryterminalisnotaccessible.
Aremoteearthpointislocatedathighlevel
underthebonnet(alongsidethebattery).
background
316
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
F Starttheengineofthevehiclewiththe
goodbatteryandleaveitrunningforafew
minutes.
F Operatethestarteronthebrokendown
vehicleandlettheenginerun.
Iftheenginedoesnotstartstraightaway,
switchofftheignitionandwaitafew
momentsbeforetryingagain.
F Waituntiltheenginereturnstoidlethen
disconnectthejumpleadcablesinthe
reverseorder.
F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if
yourvehiclehasone.
F Allowtheenginetorunforatleast
30minutes,bydrivingorwiththevehicle
stationary, so that the battery reaches an
adequatestateofcharge.
Starting using another battery
Somefunctions,includingStop&Start,
are not available if the battery is not
sufficientlycharged.
F Raise the plastic cover on the (+) terminal,
ifyourvehiclehasone.
F Connect the red cable to the positive
terminal (+) of the flat battery A (at the metal
elbow) then to the positive terminal (+) of the
slave battery Borthebooster.
F Connectoneendofthegreenorblack
cabletothenegativeterminal(-)ofthe
slave battery B or the booster (or earth
pointontheothervehicle).
F Connecttheotherendofthegreenorblack
cable to the earth point Conthebroken
downvehicle.
Nevertrytostarttheengineby
connectingabatterycharger.
Neverusea24Vorhigherbattery
booster.
Firstcheckthattheslavebatteryhasa
nominalvoltageof12Vandacapacity
atleastequaltothatofthedischarged
battery.
The two vehicles must not be in contact
witheachother.
Switch off the electrical consumers on
both vehicles (audio system, wipers,
lighting,...).
Ensurethatthejumpleadcablesdo
notpassclosetomovingpartsofthe
engine(coolingfan,belts,...).
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when
theengineisrunning.
Whenyourvehicle'sbatteryisdischarged,the
enginecanbestartedusingaslavebattery
(externaloronanothervehicle)andjumplead
cablesorabatterybooster.
background
317
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Nevertrytochargeafrozenbattery.
If the battery has been frozen, have
itcheckedbyaCITROËNdealerora
qualifiedworkshop,whowillcheckthat
the internal components have not been
damagedandthecasingisnotcracked,
whichcouldcausealeakoftoxicand
corrosiveacid.
F Switchofftheignition.
F Switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system,lighting,wipers,...).
F SwitchoffthechargerBbeforeconnecting
the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any
dangeroussparks.
F Ensurethatthechargercablesareingood
condition.
F Raise the plastic cover, if your vehicle has
one,onthe(+)terminal.
F ConnectthechargerBcablesasfollows:
- the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal
of the battery A,
- thenegative(-)blackcabletotheearth
point Conthevehicle.
F Attheendofthechargingoperation,switch
offthechargerBbeforedisconnectingthe
cables from the battery A.
It is not necessary to disconnect the
battery.
Ifyouenvisagechargingyourvehicle's
batteryyourself,useonlyacharger
compatible with lead-acid batteries of a
nominalvoltageof12V.
Follow the instructions for use provided
bythemanufacturerofthecharger.
Neverreversepolarities.
Charging the battery using a battery charger
If this label is present, it is essential
touseonlya12Vcharger,toavoid
causingirreversibledamagetothe
electrical components related to the
Stop&Startsystem.
For optimum service life of the battery, it is
essential to maintain an adequate state of
charge.
In some circumstances it may be necessary to
chargethebattery:
- if you use your vehicle essentially for short
journeys,
- ifthevehicleistobetakenofftheroadfor
severalweeks.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
background
318
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
The Stop & Start system may not be
operationalduringthetripfollowingthe
firstenginestart.
In this case, the system will only be
availableagainafteracontinuous
period of immobilisation of the vehicle,
a period which depends on the ambient
temperatureandthestateofchargeof
thebattery(uptoabout8hours).
Donotforcetheleveraslockingwill
not be possible if the clamp is not
positionedcorrectly;starttheprocedure
again.
Disconnecting the (+) terminal
F Raise the lever A fully to release the
clamp B.
Reconnecting the (+) terminal
F Position the open clamp B of the cable on
thepositivepost(+)ofthebattery.
F Press down on the clamp to position it
correctlyonthebatterypost.
F LocktheclampbyloweringtheleverA.
Disconnecting the battery
In order to maintain an adequate state
ofchargeforstartingtheengine,itis
recommended that the battery be disconnected
ifthevehicleistakenoutofserviceforalong
period.
Beforedisconnectingthebattery:
F closeallopenings(doors,boot,windows,
roof),
F switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system,wipers,lighting,...),
F switchofftheignitionandwaitforfour
minutes.
Atthebattery,detachjustthe(+)terminal.
Following reconnection of the battery
Followingreconnectionofthebattery,switchon
theignitionandwait1minutebeforestartingto
permitinitialisationoftheelectronicsystems.
However,ifproblemsremainfollowingthis
operation, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualifiedworkshop.
Referringtothecorrespondingsection,you
mustyourselfreinitialise(dependingon
version):
- theremotecontrolkey,
- the electric blind(s),
- ...
Quick release terminal
background
319
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Towing
Thetowingeyeisinstalledinthebootunder
thefloor.
Togainaccesstoit:
F open the boot,
F lift the floor and remove it,
F removethetowingeyefromitshousing.
General recommendations
Observethelegislationinforceinyourcountry.
Ensurethattheweightofthetowingvehicleishigherthanthatofthetowedvehicle.
Thedrivermustremainatthewheelofthetowedvehicleandmusthaveavaliddrivinglicence.
Whentowingavehiclewithallfourwheelsontheground,alwaysuseanapprovedtowing
arm;ropeandstrapsareprohibited.
Thetowingvehiclemustmoveoffgently.
Whentowingavehiclewiththeengineoff,thereisnolongeranypowerassistancefor
brakingorsteering.
Inthefollowingcases,youmustalwayscallonaprofessionalrecoveryservice:
- vehiclebrokendownonamotorwayorfastroad,
- four-wheel drive vehicle,
- whenitisnotpossibletoputthegearboxintoneutral,unlockthesteering,orrelease
theparkingbrake,
- towingwithonlytwowheelsontheground,
- wherethereisnoapprovedtowingarmavailable...
Procedureforhavingyourvehicletowedorfortowinganothervehicleusingthetowingeye.
Access to the tools
background
320
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Towing another vehicle
F On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by
pressingatthebottom.
F Screwthetowingeyeinfully.
F Installthetowingbar.
F Switchonthehazardwarninglampson
bothvehicles.
F Moveoffgently,driveslowlyandforashort
distance.
F On the front bumper, unclip the cover by
pressingontheleft.
F Screwthetowingeyeinfully.
F Installthetowingbar.
F Placethegearleverinneutral(positionN
withanautomaticgearbox).
Towing your vehicle
Failure to observe this instruction could
resultindamagetocertaincomponents
(braking,transmission...)andthe
absenceofbrakingassistancethenext
timetheengineisstarted.
F Unlockthesteeringbyturningthekey
intheignitiononenotchandreleasethe
parkingbrake.
F Switchonthehazardwarninglampson
bothvehicles.
F Moveoffgently,driveslowlyandforashort
distance.
background
321
8
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap08_en-cas-panne_ed01-2016
Runningoutoffuel(Diesel)
OnvehiclesfittedwithDieselengines,thefuel
systemmustbeprimedifyourunoutoffuel.
For all versions other than BlueHDi, refer to the
correspondingenginecompartmentview.
Other HDi engines
(except BlueHDi version)
For more information on Diesel misfuel
prevention,refertothecorresponding
section.
Iftheenginedoesnotstartfirsttime,
don'tkeeptryingbutstarttheprocedure
againfromthebeginning.
BlueHDi engines
F Fillthefueltankwithatleastfivelitresof
Diesel.
F Switchontheignition(withoutstartingthe
engine).
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the
ignition.
F Repeattheoperation10times.
F Operatethestartertoruntheengine.
F Add at least five litres of Diesel fuel to the
tank.
F Openthebonnet.
F Ifnecessary,unclipthestylingcoverfor
accesstotheprimingpump.
F Squeezeandreleasetheprimingpump
repeatedly until resistance is felt (there
mayberesistanceatthefirstpress).
F Operatethestartertostarttheengine
(iftheenginedoesnotstartatthefirst
attempt, wait around 15 seconds before
tryingagain).
F Iftheenginedoesnotstartafterafew
attempts,operatetheprimingpumpagain
thenstarttheengine.
F Refitthestylingcoverandclipitinplace.
F Closethebonnet.
background
322
Technical data
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
Petrol engine PureTech 110 S&S PureTech 130 S&S
Gearbox Manual (6-speed) Manual (6-speed) EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code
3D 3D...3E...3A... 3D...3E...3A...
HNX...
M/1S-M/2SM
HNY…
M/1S-M/2SM
HNY…
T/1S-T/2S
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 199
Borexstroke(mm) 75x90.5
Maxpower*:EUstandard(kW) 96
Maxpowerenginespeed(rpm) 5 500
Maxtorque:EUstandard(Nm) 230
Maxtorqueenginespeed(rpm) 1 750
Fuel Unleaded
Catalytic converter yes
Engineoilcapacity,withfilterreplacement
(in litres)
4.25
Petrolenginesandgearboxes
3D...:CITROËNC4Picasso(5-seat). 3A...:CITROËNGrandC4Picasso(7-seat).
3E...:CITROËNGrandC4Picasso(5-seat).
*Themaximumpowercorrespondstothevaluetype-approvedonatestbed,underconditionsdefinedinEuropeanlegislation(Directive1999/99/EC).
background
9
323
Technical data
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
3D...:CITROËNC4Picasso(5-seat). 3A...:CITROËNGrandC4Picasso(7-seat).
3E...:CITROËNGrandC4Picasso(5-seat).
*Themaximumpowercorrespondstothevaluetype-approvedonatestbed,underconditionsdefinedinEuropeanlegislation(Directive1999/99/EC).
Petrol engine THP 150 / 160 THP 165 S&S
Gearbox EAT6 automatic (6-speed) EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code
3D...3E...3A... 3D...3E...3A...
5GX-5GY...
A-A/1-A/2-A/D-A/1D-A/2D-Y-Y/1-Y/2
5GZT/S
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 598 1 598
Borexstroke(mm) 77x85.8 77x85.8
Maxpower*:EUstandard(kW) 110/121 121
Maxpowerenginespeed(rpm) 6 000 6 000
Maxtorque:EUstandard(Nm) 240 240
Maxtorqueenginespeed(rpm) 1 400 1 400
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded
Catalytic converter yes yes
Engineoilcapacity(inlitres)
(with filter replacement)
4.25 4.25
background
324
Technical data
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
*Theweightvaluesarecalculatedwithatowbar.
**Thekerbweightisequaltotheunladenweight+driver(75kg).
***Theweightofthebrakedtrailercanbeincreased,withintheGTWlimit,iftheGVWofthetowingvehicleisreducedbyanequalamount;warning,
towingusingalightlyloadedtowingvehiclemayhaveanadverseeffectonitsroadholding.
Petrol engine PureTech 110 S&S* PureTech 130 S&S*
Gearbox Manual (6-speed) Manual (6-speed) EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code
3D 3D...3E...3A... 3D...3E...3A...
HNX...
M/1S-M/2SM
HNY…
M/1S-M/2SM
HNY…
T/1S-T/2S
Unladenweight 1 280 1 280 - 1 295 - 1 297 1298-1315-1317
Kerbweight** 1355 1355-1370-1372 1373-1390-1392
Grossvehicleweight(GVW) 1 905 1 905 - 2 075 - 2 125 1918-1957-2136
Grosstrainweight(GTW)
ona12%gradient
3035 3175-3125-3175 3188-3007-3186
Brakedtrailer(withintheGTWlimit)
ona10%or12%gradient
1130 1 270 - 1 050 - 1 050 1 270 - 1 050 - 1 050
Brakedtrailer***
(with load transfer within the GTW limit)
1330 1470-1350-1350 1470-1350-1350
Unbrakedtrailer 640 640 - 647 - 648 640 - 647 - 648
Recommendednoseweight 70 70 70
Petrolweightsandtowedloads(inkg)
TheGTWandtowedloadvaluesindicatedarevaliduptoamaximumaltitudeof1000metres;thetowedloadmentionedmustbereducedby10%for
eachadditional1000metresofaltitude.
Whentowing,thespeedmustneverexceed60mph(100km/h)(complywiththelegislationinforceinyourcountry).
Highambienttemperaturesmayresultinareductionintheperformanceofthevehicletoprotecttheengine;iftheambienttemperatureisabove37°C,
limitthetowedload.
background
9
325
Technical data
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
Theweightofthebrakedtrailercanbeincreased,withintheGTWlimit,iftheGVWofthetowingvehicleisreducedbyanequalamount;warning,
towingusingalightlyloadedtowingvehiclemayhaveanadverseeffectonitsroadholding.
Whentowing,thespeedmustneverexceed60mph(100km/h)(complywiththelegislationinforceinyourcountry).
Highambienttemperaturesmayresultinareductionintheperformanceofthevehicletoprotecttheengine;iftheambienttemperatureisabove37°C,
limitthetowedload..
Petrol engine THP 150 / 160 THP 165 S&S
Gearbox EAT6 automatic (6-speed) EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code
3D...3E...3A... 3D...3E...3A...
5GX-5GY...
A-A/1-A/2-A/D-A/1D-A/2D-Y-Y/1-Y/2
5GZT/S
Unladenweight 1405-1428-1430 1310-1318-1320
Kerbweight* 1480-1503-1505 1385-1393-1395
Grossvehicleweight(GVW) 1 940 - 2 140 - 2 160 1930-2100-2150
Grosstrainweight(GTW)
ona12%gradient
2 740 - 2 940 - 2 960 3330-3350-3350
Brakedtrailer(withintheGTWlimit)
ona10%or12%gradient
800 1 400 - 1 250 - 1 200
Brakedtrailer**
(with load transfer within the GTW limit)
800 1 600 - 1 550 - 1 500
Unbrakedtrailer 600 685 - 690 - 690
Recommendednoseweight 70 70
*Thekerbweightisequaltotheunladenweight+driver(75kg).
**Theweightofthebrakedtrailercanbeincreased,withintheGTWlimit,iftheGVWofthetowingvehicleisreducedbyanequalamount;warning,
towingusingalightlyloadedtowingvehiclemayhaveanadverseeffectonitsroadholding.
background
326
Technical data
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
Dieselenginesandgearboxes
.../S:e-HDimodelfittedwithStop&Start.
3D...:CITROËNC4Picasso(5-seat).
3E...:CITROËNGrandC4Picasso(5-seat).
3A...:CITROËNGrandC4Picasso(7-seat).
Diesel engine HDi 115 BlueHDi 100 S&S
Gearbox Manual (6-speed) Manual (6-speed)
Model code
3D...3E...3A... 3D...3E...3A...
9HC...
8-8/1
BHY...
6/1S-6/2SM
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560 1 560
Borexstroke(mm) 75x88.3 75x88.3
Maxpower*:EUstandard(kW) 85 73
Maxpowerenginespeed(rpm) 3600 3750
Maxtorque:EUstandard(Nm) 270 254
Maxtorqueenginespeed(rpm) 1 750 1 750
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter yes yes
Particle filter no yes
Engineoilcapacity,withfilterreplacement
(in litres)
3.75 3.75
*Themaximumpowercorrespondstothevaluetype-approvedonatestbed,underconditionsdefinedinEuropeanlegislation(Directive1999/99/EC).
background
9
327
Technical data
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
Dieselenginesandgearboxes
.../S:e-HDimodelfittedwithStop&Start.
3D...:CITROËNC4Picasso(5-seat).
3E...:CITROËNGrandC4Picasso(5-seat).
3A...:CITROËNGrandC4Picasso(7-seat).
Diesel engine BlueHDi 115/120 S&S BlueHDi 135/150 S&S
Gearbox Manual (6-speed)
EAT6 automatic
(6-speed)
Manual (6-speed)
EAT6 automatic
(6-speed)
Model code
3D...3E...3A... 3D...3E...3A... 3D...3E...3A... 3D...3E...3A...
BHZ-BHX...
M/S-M/1S
BHZ-BHX...
T/1S-T/2S
AHX-AHR-AHV-AHS...
M/S-M/1S
AHX...
T/S-T/1S
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560 1 997
Borexstroke(mm) 75x88.3 85x88
Maxpower*:EUstandard(kW) 85/88 110
Maxpowerenginespeed(rpm) 3500 3750
Maxtorque:EUstandard(Nm) 300 370
Maxtorqueenginespeed(rpm) 1 750 1 750
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter yes yes
Particle filter yes yes
Engineoilcapacity,withfilterreplacement
(in litres)
3.75 6.1
*Themaximumpowercorrespondstothevaluetype-approvedonatestbed,underconditionsdefinedinEuropeanlegislation(Directive1999/99/EC).
background
328
Technical data
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
Dieselweightsandtowedloads(inkg)
TheGTWandtowedloadvaluesindicatedarevaliduptoamaximumaltitudeof1000metres;thetowedloadmentionedmustbereducedby10%for
eachadditional1000metresofaltitude.
Whentowing,thespeedmustneverexceed60mph(100km/h)(complywiththelegislationinforceinyourcountry).
Highambienttemperaturesmayresultinareductionintheperformanceofthevehicletoprotecttheengine;iftheambienttemperatureisabove37°C,
limitthetowedload.
Diesel engine HDi 115 BlueHDi 100 S&S*
Gearbox Manual (6-speed) Manual (6-speed)
Model code
3D...3E...3A... 3D...3E...3A... 3D...3E...3A...
9HC8 9HC8/1
BHY...
6/1S-6/2SM
Unladenweight 1290-1310-1312 1298-1318-1320 1296-1318-1320
Kerbweight** 1365-1385-1387 1373-1393-1395 1371-1393-1395
Grossvehicleweight(GVW) 1 940 - 2 110 - 2 150 1 940 - 2 110 - 2 150 1 950 - 2 120 - 2 175
Grosstrainweight(GTW)
ona12%gradient
3340-3350-3350 2 740 - 2 910 - 2 950 3150-3120-3175
Brakedtrailer(withintheGTWlimit)
ona10%or12%gradient
1 400 - 1240 - 1 200 800 1 200 - 1 000 - 1 000
Brakestrailer***
(with load transfer within the GTW limit)
1 600 - 1 540 - 1 500 800 1400-1300-1300
Unbrakedtrailer 680 - 690 - 690 685 - 695 - 695 645 - 659 - 660
Recommendednoseweight 70 70 70
*Theweightsarecalculatedwithatowbarfitted.
**Thekerbweightisequaltotheunladenweight+driver(75kg).
***Theweightofthebrakedtrailercanbeincreased,withintheGTWlimit,iftheGVWofthetowingvehicleisreducedbyanequalamount;warning,
towingusingalightlyloadedtowingvehiclemayhaveanadverseeffectonitsroadholding.
background
9
329
Technical data
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
Dieselweightsandtowedloads(inkg)
*Thekerbweightisequaltotheunladenweight+driver(75kg).
**Theweightofthebrakedtrailercanbeincreased,withintheGTWlimit,iftheGVWofthetowingvehicleisreducedbyanequalamount;warning,
towingusingalightlyloadedtowingvehiclemayhaveanadverseeffectonitsroadholding.
TheGTWandtowedloadvaluesindicatedarevaliduptoamaximumaltitudeof1000metres;thetowedloadmentionedmustbereducedby10%for
eachadditional1000metresofaltitude.
Whentowing,thespeedmustneverexceed60mph(100km/h)(complywiththelegislationinforceinyourcountry).
Highambienttemperaturesmayresultinareductionintheperformanceofthevehicletoprotecttheengine;iftheambienttemperatureisabove37°C,
limitthetowedload.
Diesel engine BlueHDi 115/120 S&S BlueHDi 135/150 S&S
Gearbox Manual (6-speed)
EAT6 automatic
(6-speed)
Manual (6-speed)
EAT6 automatic
(6-speed)
Model code
3D...3E...3A... 3D...3E...3A... 3D...3E...3A... 3D...3E...3A...
BHZ-BHX...
M/S-M/1S
BHZ-BHX...
T/1S-T/2S
AHX-AHR-AHV-
AHS...
M/S-M/1S
AHX...
T/S-T/1S
Unladenweight 1320-1345-1347 1320-1357-1359 1415-1428-1430 1435-1474-1476
Kerbweight* 1395-1420-1422 1395-1432-1434 1490-1503-1505 1 510 - 1 549 - 1 551
Grossvehicleweight(GVW) 1 950 - 2 100 - 2 175 1 975 - 2 025 - 2 205 2030-2200-2250 2030-2200-2280
Grosstrainweight(MTRA)
ona12%gradient
3350-3350-3375 3375-3225-3405 3530-3560-3650 3530-3580-3580
Brakedtrailer(withinGTWlimit)
ona10%or12%gradient
1 400 - 1 250 - 1 200 1 400 - 1 200 - 1 200 1 500 - 1 450 - 1 400 1500-1380-1300
Brakedtrailer**
(with load transfer within the GTW limit)
1 600 - 1 550 - 1 500 1 600 - 1 500 - 1 500 1 700 - 1 750 - 1 700 1 700 - 1 680 - 1 600
Unbrakedtrailer 660 - 672 - 674 660 - 675 - 675 745 - 750 - 750 750
Recommendednoseweight 70 70 70 70
background
330
Technical data
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
Dimensions (in mm)
Thesedimensionshavebeenmeasuredonanunladenvehicle.
*Mirrorsfolded.
background
9
331
Technical data
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap09_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016
Identicationmarkings
Variousvisiblemarkingsfortheidentificationofyourvehicle.
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
under the bonnet.
Thisnumberisengravedonthechassis
neartherighthandfrontwheelarch.
Thetyrepressuresmustbechecked
when the tyres are cold, at least once
amonth.
If the tyre pressures are too low, this
increasesfuelconsumption.
C. Manufacturer's label.
Thisself-destroyinglabelonthemiddle
doorpillar,rightorlefthandside,contains
thefollowinginformation:
- themanufacturer'sname,
-
the European whole vehicle type approval number,
- the vehicle identification number (VIN),
- themaximumauthorisedweight(gross
vehicleweight),
- themaximumauthorisedweightwith
trailer(grosstrainweight),
- themaximumfrontaxleweight,
- themaximumrearaxleweight.
D. Tyre/paint label.
Thislabelonthemiddledoorpillar,driver's
side,containsthefollowinginformation:
- the tyre inflation pressures, laden and
unladen,
- thetyresizes(includingthetyreload
indexandspeedrating),
- the inflation pressure for the spare
wheel,
- thepaintcolourcode.
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) on
the windscreen lower cross member.
This number is indicated on a self-
adhesivelabelwhichisvisiblethroughthe
windscreen.
background
Audio and Telematics
332
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap10a_BTA_ed01-2016
Emergencyorassistancecall
Ifanimpactisdetectedbytheairbag
control unit, and independently of
thedeploymentofanyairbags,an
emergencycallismadeautomatically.
Localised Emergency Call
Inanemergency,pressthis
buttonformorethan2seconds.
FlashingofthegreenLEDand
avoicemessageconfirmthat
the call has been made to the
"LocalisedEmergencyCall"*
service.
Pressingthisbuttonagainimmediatelycancels
therequest.
ThegreenLEDgoesoff.
ThegreenLEDremainson(withoutflashing)
whencommunicationisestablished.
Itgoesoffattheendofcommunication.
This call is dealt with by the "Localised
EmergencyCall"centrewhichreceiveslocating
information from the vehicle and can send a
detailedalerttotheappropriateemergency
services.
In countries in which the team is not
operational,orwhenthelocatingservice
hasbeenexpresslydeclined,thecallisdealt
withdirectlybytheemergencyservices(112)
withoutthevehiclelocation.
*Theseservicesaresubjecttoconditionsand
availability.
ConsultaCITROËNdealer.
If you benefit from the CITROËN
ConnectBoxofferwiththeSOSand
assistancepackincluded,thereare
additional services available to you in
your MyCITROËN personal space, via
the CITROËN Internet website in your
country,accessibleonwww.citroen.com.
background
.
Audio and Telematics
333
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap10a_BTA_ed01-2016
Localised Assistance Call
If you purchased your vehicle outside
theCITROËNdealernetwork,we
inviteyoutohaveadealercheckthe
configurationoftheseservicesand,if
desired,modifiedtosuityourwishes.
Inamulti-lingualcountry,configuration
is possible in the official national
languageofyourchoice.
For technical reasons, particularly
to improve the quality of Telematic
services to customers, the
manufacturerreservestherightto
carryoutupdatestothevehicle's
on-boardtelematicsystem.
A fault with the system does not
preventthevehiclebeingdriven.
Press this button for more than
2 seconds to request assistance
ifthevehiclebreaksdown.
Avoicemessageconfirmsthat
thecallhasbeenmade*.
Pressingthisbuttonagainimmediatelycancels
therequest.
The cancellation is confirmed by a voice
message.
TheorangeLEDisoncontinuously:thebackup
batterymustbereplaced.
Ineithercase,theemergencyandassistance
callsservicemaynotfunction.
Contact a qualified repairer as soon as
possible.
Operation of the system
Whentheignitionisswitched
on,thegreenLEDcomeson
for3secondsindicatingthatthe
systemisoperatingcorrectly.
TheorangeLEDflashesthen
goesoff:thereisasystemfault.
*Theseservicesaresubjecttoconditionsand
availability.
ConsultaCITROËNdealer.
background
334
Alphabetical index
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016
ABS...............................................................225
Accessories..................................................266
Accessory position.......................................130
Accesstothe3rdrow.....................................86
AdBlue
®
.......................................18,35,42,279
Adjustingheadrestraints..........................79,83
Adjustingseats........................75, 77, 82, 84, 87
Adjustingtheairdistribution.............. 94, 96, 98
Adjustingtheairflow...........................94, 95, 97
Adjustingtheheightandreach
ofthesteeringwheel....................................91
Adjustingtheseatbeltheight.......................228
Adjustingthetemperature..................94, 95, 97
Advice on care and maintenance.................278
Adviceondriving..................................123,124
Airbags....................................................32,233
Airbags,curtain.....................................236,237
Airbags,front.........................................234,237
Airbags,lateral......................................235,237
Airconditioning...............................9,93,95,97
Airconditioning,automatic............................ 97
Airconditioning,manual.................................95
Airintake............................................ 94, 96, 98
Air vents..........................................................92
Alarm...............................................................70
Anti-lockbrakingsystem(ABS)....................225
Anti-pinch................................................73,223
Anti-theft.................................................59,130
Armrest, front..................................................81
ASR...............................................................225
Assistance call......................................224,332
Assistance,emergencybraking...................225
Audiblewarning............................................224
Automatic headlamps.............................23,212
Battery...........................................277,315-318
Battery,charging........................................... 317
Battery, remote control.............................58, 59
Blackpanel......................................................47
Blackscreen...................................................47
Blankingscreen(snowshield)......................261
Blind, panoramic sunroof..............................223
Blind spot sensors..................................24, 182
Blinds, side................................................... 112
BlueHDi...........................................42,279,321
Bonnet...........................................................271
Boot.................................................................63
Boot(fittings)................................................. 117
Boot(opening).................................................51
Brakediscs/pads...........................................278
Brakelamps..........................................305-308
Brakewarninglamp..................................31,34
Braking,dynamicemergency.......................135
Bulbs(changing)...........................301,305-308
Checkingtheengineoillevel..................41,234
Checkingthelevels................................274-276
Checkingtyrepressures
(usingthekit)..............................................290
Checks...................................................272-278
Checks,routine.....................................277, 278
Childlock.......................................................256
Children......................... 245,247,250,251,253
Children (safety)....................232,234,238-256
Child seats, conventional..............................244
Child seats, ISOFIX......................................250
CITROËNConnectBox...............................332
CITROËN Localised
EmergencyCall..........................................332
Closingtheboot..............................................63
Closingthedoors............................... 52, 54, 56
Collisionriskalert.........................................176
Configurations,seats......................................89
Configuration,vehicle.....................................13
Control,emergencybootrelease...................67
Control,emergencydoor................................62
Control, heated seats......................................81
Controlstalk,lighting..............................23,206
Controlstalk,wipers.....................218, 219, 221
Courtesy lamps.............................................121
Cruise control................ 149, 152, 157, 160, 167
Cruise control, dynamic........................160, 167
Cruise control by speed
limitrecognition..........................................150
Cup holder.....................................................105
A
Capacity,fueltank........................................257
Cap, fuel filler................................................257
Cartridge,fragrance.....................................103
Centrallocking....................................51,53,60
Changingabulb............................................301
Changingafuse............................................310
Changingawheel.........................................291
Changingawiperblade....................... 222, 268
Changingtheremotecontrolbattery..............58
C
B
background
.
335
Alphabetical index
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016
Daytimerunninglamps.........................214,301
Deactivatingthepassengerairbag...............234
Deadlocking........................................52, 55, 57
Demisting/defrosting,
front and rear..............................................102
Diesel.....................................................24 , 259
Dimensions...................................................330
Dipstick......................................................... 274
Direction indicators............... 215,301,304-308
Display screen,
instrument panel............................. 17, 18, 145
Distance alert................................................176
Doors...............................................................61
Driver’sattentionwarning.....................185, 186
Drivingeconomically.........................................9
Drivingpositions(storing)...............................78
Drivingtimewarning.............................185, 186
Dynamic stability control (DSC)..............31,225
EBA...............................................................225
Eco-driving.......................................................9
Electronicbrakeforcedistribution
(EBFD)........................................................225
Emergencycall.....................................224,332
Emergencywarninglamps...................224,283
Emissions control system,
SCR......................................................36,279
F
Fatiguedetection..................................185, 186
Fillingthefueltank.................................257-259
Filter, air........................................................277
Filter, oil.........................................................277
Filter, particle........................................276, 277
Filter,passenger
compartment..............................................277
Fittingawheel...............................................299
Fittingroofbars.............................................269
Fittings,boot................................................. 117
Fittings,interior.....................................105, 106
Fittings,rear.................................................. 111
Flap, fuel filler........................................257, 258
Flashingindicators................................210, 215
Floor, concertina.............................................87
Foglamps,front.................... 208,216,301,304
Foglamps,rear..................................... 208,309
Foldingtherearseats.................. 82, 84, 86, 87
Fuel................................................................259
E
D
Energyeconomymode.................................265
Enginecompartment............................272,273
Engine,
Diesel......................... 259,273,321,326,327
Engine,petrol............................... 259,272,322
Environment........................................9,58,93,
102,200,276,282,315
ESC/ASR.......................................................225
Fuel consumption........................................9, 50
Fueltank........................................................258
Fusebox,dashboard.....................................312
Fusebox,engine
compartment..............................................314
Fuses.............................................................310
Gauge,fuel........................................ 17, 18, 257
Gearbox,automatic..............140,146,278,315
Gearbox,manual......................9,139,146,278
Gearlever,manualgearbox.........................139
Gear shift indicator.......................................145
Glovebox..............................................105, 106
Hands-freetailgateaccess.............................68
Hazardwarninglamps..........................224,283
Headlampadjustment...................................215
Headlamps, automatic
dipping........................................................212
Headlamps, automatic illumination...... 207, 211
G
H
background
336
Alphabetical index
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016
Identification, vehicle....................................331
Ignition...........................................................130
Immobiliser, electronic............................59,130
Indicator, AdBlue
®
range.................................42
Indicator, coolant temperature........................40
Indicator,engineoillevel........................ 41, 274
Indicatorandwarning
lamps...................................................... 21-36
Indicators, direction......................................215
Inflatingtyres............................................9,331
Inflatingtyresandaccessories
(usingthekit)..............................................290
Instrument panels......................................17-19
IntelligentTractionControl............................226
ISOFIX..........................................................240
Key, electronic......................................... 51,130
KeylessEntryandStarting.....................53,130
Kit, temporary puncture repair......................284
Labels, identification.....................................331
Lamp, boot....................................................120
Lamps,parking.............................................210
Lanedeparturewarning,assisted................178
LEDs-light-emittingdiodes.........301,305,307
Legrest,electric.............................................80
Level, AdBlue
®
additive...........................35,279
Level,brakefluid.....................................31,275
Level, Diesel additive..............................29, 276
Level,enginecoolant..............................40, 276
Level,engineoil...................................... 41, 274
Level, headlamp wash............................29, 276
Levelsandchecks.................................272-276
Level, screenwash fluid................................276
Light-emittingdiodes-LEDs........301,305,307
Lighting....................................................23,206
Lighting,directional............................... 216, 217
Lighting,guide-me-home.............................210
Lighting,interior............................................121
Lighting,mood..............................................122
Lighting,welcome.........................................214
Loading.............................................................9
Load reduction mode....................................265
Localised Assistance Call.............................332
Locatingyourvehicle......................................52
Lockingfromtheinside...................................60
Low fuel level................................................257
Lumbar......................................................32,80
I
K
L
Jack....................................................... 291-294
Jumpstarting................................................316
J
Headlamps,dipped/main
beam.................................... 23,206,301,302
Headlamps, directional......................... 217,301
Headlamps, Xenon.......................................301
Headlamp wash............................................220
Head restraints, front......................................79
Head restraints, rear.......................................83
Heating................................................94, 95, 97
Hill start assist...............................................138
Hooks............................................................ 116
Horn...............................................................224
background
.
337
Alphabetical index
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016
Net................................................................. 118
Number plate lamps......................................309
Oil consumption............................................274
OIl,engine.....................................................274
Openingthebonnet......................................271
Safety, children.....................232,234,238-256
Scented air freshener...................................103
Openingtheboot................................51,53,63
Openingthedoors....................................51,53
Openingthepanoramicsunroofblind..........223
Pads,brake...................................................278
Paint colour code..........................................331
Panoramicglasssunroof..............................223
Parcel shelf, rear....................................111, 116
ParkAssist....................................................192
Parkingbrake,
electric................................................ 131,278
Parkingsensors,front...................................188
Parkingsensors,rear....................................187
Plates, identification......................................331
Port, USB......................................................109
Pressures, tyres................... 285,290,300,331
Pre-tensioning
seat belts....................................................232
Primingthefuel
system.........................................................321
Protectingchildren................232,234,238-256
Puncture........................................................284
P
N
O
S
Maintenance, routine........................................9
Mapreadinglamps.......................................121
Markings,identification.................................331
Massagefunction...........................................80
Mats............................................................... 110
Memorisingaspeed.....................................149
Mirror, child surveillance...............................205
Mirror, rear view............................................204
Mirrors, door......................... 102,182,203,204
Misfuel prevention.........................................258
Modularity, seats.............................................89
Motorisedtailgate.....................................64-66
Mountings,Isofix...........................................249
Multimedia, rear............................................ 113
M
Range..............................................................50
Range,AdBlue................................................42
Readinglamps,rear...................................... 111
Rearscreen,demisting.................................102
Rechargingthebattery.................................317
Recirculation, air................................ 94, 96, 98
Reduction of electrical load..........................265
Regenerationoftheparticlefilter.................277
Reinitialisation of the under-inflation
detection system.........................................201
Reinitialisingtheremotecontrol.....................58
Remote control...........................................51-59
Removingawheel........................................297
Removingthemat......................................... 110
Replacingbulbs............................................301
Replacingfuses............................................310
Replacingtheairfilter...................................277
Replacingtheoilfilter...................................277
Replacingthepassenger
compartment filter......................................277
Resettingtheserviceindicator.......................39
Resettingthetriprecorder..............................45
Reversingcamera.........................................189
Reversinglamp.....................................305-308
Roof bars.......................................................269
Runningoutoffuel(Diesel)..........................321
R
background
338
Alphabetical index
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016
Screen, cold climate.....................................261
Screenwash, front.........................................220
Screenwash, rear..........................................219
SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction)............279
Seat belts............................................. 228, 244
Seats, electric.................................................77
Seats, front.......................................... 75, 77, 78
Seats, heated..................................................81
Seats, rear.................................... 82, 84, 86, 87
Selector,gear................................................140
Serial number, vehicle..................................331
Service indicator.............................................37
Servicing...........................................................9
Settings,equipment.................................. 11,13
Sidelamps............ 206,210,301,303,305,307
Side repeater................................................305
Snow chains..................................................260
Socket,12Vaccessory................ 105, 109, 112
Sockets,audio..............................................109
Speed limiter.................................149, 152, 154
Speedlimitrecognition.................................150
Spotlamps, side....................................214,305
Stability control (ESC)...................................225
Startingthevehicle....................... 125, 127, 128
Startingusinganotherbattery......................316
Stay, bonnet..................................................271
Steeringwheel,adjustment............................91
Stop.................................................................27
Stoppingthevehicle..................... 125, 127, 128
Stop & Start................25,50,93,102,146,147,
257,271,277,315,318
Stop(warninglamp)........................................27
Storage.......................................... 106, 110, 112
Storingdrivingpositions.................................78
Sun visor.......................................................106
Sun visor flap................................................106
Synchronisingtheremotecontrol...................58
W
Warningandindicatorlamps.................... 21-36
Warninglamp,brakingsystem.......................31
Warninglamp,Dieselenginepre-heater.......24
Warninglamp,SCRemissionscontrol
system...........................................................36
Warninglamp,Service....................................29
Warninglamp,Stop........................................27
Washing(advice)...........................................278
Weights.........................................324,328,329
Wheel, spare......................................... 291-294
Window controls.............................................73
Wiperblades(changing)...................... 222, 268
Wiper, rear.....................................................219
Wipers.............................................25, 218, 221
Wipers, automatic rain sensitive...........218, 221
Under-inflation (detection)............. 34,200,290
Unlocking.................................................. 51,53
Unlockingfromtheinside...............................60
Unlockingtheboot..........................................51
Unlockingthedoors........................................60
Urea...............................................................279
U
T V
Tableofweights............................324,328,329
Tablesofengines......................... 322,326,327
Tables of fuses..............................................310
Tailgate......................................................63,65
Tank,AdBlue
®
additive.................................279
Tank,fuel...............................................257, 258
Technical data....................................... 322-330
Temperature, coolant......................................40
Three flashes (direction indicators)..............215
Tools...................................................... 291-294
Torch.............................................................120
Total distance recorder...................................45
Touch screen tablet........................................11
Towbar...........................................124, 262, 264
Towed loads..................................324,328,329
Towinganothervehicle.................................320
Traction control (ASR)..............26,31,225,227
Trailer............................................124,264,319
Triangle,warning...........................................283
Trip computer............................................ 48-50
Trip distance recorder.....................................45
Tyres..........................................................9,331
Tyre under-inflation
detection.............................. 34,200,202,290
Ventilation.............................. 92,93,94,95,97
Visibility.........................................................102
Vision360°....................................................190
background
background
background
background
background
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016
background
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016
background
16B78.0010
Arial Bold
12 pt
03-16
4DCONCEPT
DIADEIS
Interak
Labelsareappliedatvariouspointsonyourvehicle.They
carrysafetywarningsaswellasvehicleidentication
information.Donotremovethem:theyformanintegralpart
ofyourvehicle.
Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application of the
provisionsoftheEuropeanlegislation(Directive2000/53)
relatingtoEndofLifeVehicles,thatitachievesthe
objectivessetbythislegislationandthatrecycledmaterials
areusedinthemanufactureoftheproductsthatitsells.
Reproduction or translation of all or part of this document
is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles
CITROËN.
Wedrawyourattentiontothefollowingpoints:
- Thettingofelectricalequipmentoraccessoriesnot
listed by CITROËN may cause faults and failures
withtheelectricalsystemofyourvehicle.Contact
aCITROËNdealerforinformationontherangeof
recommendedaccessories.
- Asasafetymeasure,accesstothediagnosticsocket,
usedforthevehicle'selectronicsystems,isreserved
strictlyforCITROËNdealersorqualiedworkshops,
equippedwiththespecialtoolsrequired(riskof
malfunctionsofthevehicle'selectronicsystemsthat
couldcausebreakdownsorseriousaccidents).The
manufacturer cannot be held responsible if this advice is
notfollowed.
- Anymodicationoradaptationnotintendedor
authorised by Automobiles CITROËN or carried out
withoutmeetingthetechnicalrequirementsdenedby
the manufacturer would lead to the suspension of the
legalandcontractualwarranties.
Printed in the EU
Anglais
Foranyworkonyourvehicle,useaqualiedworkshop
thathasthetechnicalinformation,skillsandequipment
required,allofwhichaCITROËNdealerisabletoprovide.
*SubjecttoofcialpublicationoftheresultsbytheFIA.
background
16B78.0010
Arial Bold
12 pt
C4-Picasso-II_en_Chap00_couv-imprimeur_n_ed01-2016
16B78.0040
Anglais
*16B78.0040*
background
306
In the event of a breakdown
C4-Picasso_II_en_Chap08_en_cas_panne_p306_ed01-2016
Lamps on the tailgate
For reassembly, carry out these operations in
reverse order.
Identify the failed bulb.
Open the boot.
Remove the access cover.
Remove the three lamp fixing screws
A
.
Disconnect the lamp connector.
Carefully remove the lamp from the outside
by pressing the retaining clip
B
.
To change a reversing lamp or direction
indicator bulb:
Use a standard pair of pliers to turn the
bulb holder a quarter turn anticlockwise,
and pull it out.
Change the bulb.
Model with LED lamps
Model with conventional bulb lamps
To change a sidelamp and brake lamp bulb:
Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn
anti-clockwise and pull the bulb out.
Change the bulb.
background
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap00_debut
AUDIO AND TELEMATICS GUIDE
background
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap00_debut
On-line handbook
If the "MyCITROËN" function is not available on the CITROËN public
website for your country, you can fi nd your handbook at the following
address:
http://service.citroen.com/ddb/
Find your handbook and the audio and telematic systems on the
CITROËN website, under "MyCITROËN".
Find your handbook and the audio and telematic systems on the
CITROËN website, under "MyCITROËN".
Find your handbook and the audio and telematic systems on the
Select:
Select one of the following means of access to view your handbook on-
line...
the language,
the vehicle, its body style,
the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of
registration of your vehicle.
Referring to the handbook on-line also gives you access to the latest
information available, easily identifi ed by the bookmark, associated with
this symbol:
background
1
.
Audio and Telematics
CITROËN Connect Nav
GPS satellite navigation - Applications - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth
®
GPS satellite navigation - Applications - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth
®
GPS satellite navigation - Applications - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth
telephone
®
telephone
®
Contents
First steps 2
Steering mounted controls 5
Menus 6
Voice commands 8
Navigation 14
Connected navigation 30
Applications 40
Radio Media 54
Telephone 66
Settings 78
Frequently asked questions 88
The system is protected in such a way
that it will only operate in your vehicle.
Displaying of the
Energy Economy
Mode
message signals that a change
to standby is imminent.
The different functions and settings
described vary according to the version
and configuration of your vehicle.
The link below gives access to OSS
(Open Source Software) codes for the
system.
http://www.psa-peugeot-citroen.com/oss
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the
driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile
telephone with the Bluetooth hands-
free system of your audio system must
be done with the
vehicle stationary
and the ignition on.
background
2
FM/87.5 MHz
87.5MHz
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
Audio and Telematics
First steps
With the engine running, a press
mutes the sound.
With the ignition off, a press turns the
system on.
Volume.
Use the buttons either side of or below the
touch screen for access to the menus, then
press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. All
of the touch areas of the screen are white.
Press the cross to go back a level.
Press "OK" to confirm.
The touch screen is of the "capacitive"
type.
To clean the screen, use a soft, non-
abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) with
no additional product.
Do not use sharp objects on the
screen.
Do not touch the screen with wet
hands.
background
3
.
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
Audio and Telematics
Select the audio source (depending on
version):
- FM / DAB * / AM * radio stations.
- USB memory stick.
- CD player.
- Media player connected via the auxiliary
socket (Jack, cable not supplied).
- Telephone connected by Bluetooth * using
Bluetooth * audio streaming.
* Depending on equipment.
Certain information is displayed permanently in
the upper band of the touch screen:
- Reminder of the air conditioning
information and direct access to the
corresponding menu.
- Go directly to the selection of the audio
source, to the list of radio stations (or list of
titles depending on the source).
- Go to the message notifications, emails,
map updates and, depending on the
services, the navigation notifications.
- Go to the settings for the touch screen and
the digital instrument panel.
In very hot conditions, the volume may
be limited to protect the system. It may
go into standby (screen and sound off)
for at least 5 minutes.
The return to normal takes place when
the temperature in the passenger
compartment has dropped.
In the "Settings" menu you can create
a profile for just one person or a group
of people with common points, with
the possibility of entering a multitude
of settings (radio presets, audio
settings, navigation history, contact
favourites, ...); these settings are taken
into account automatically.
background
background
5
.
Audio and Telematics
Steering mounted controls
Media
(short press): change the
multimedia source.
Telephone
(short press): call.
Call in progress
(short press):
access to telephone menu.
Telephone
(long press): reject an
incoming call, end call, access to
telephone menu.
Decrease volume.
Voice commands
:
Short press, system voice
commands.
Long press, smartphone voice
commands via the system.
Mute / Restore the sound.
Or
Mute by pressing the volume
increase and decrease buttons
simultaneously.
Restore the sound by pressing one of
the two volume buttons.
Radio
(rotate): automatic search for
the previous / next station.
Media
(rotate): previous / next track,
move in a list.
Short press
: confirm a selection;
other than selection, access to
presets.
Radio
: display the list of stations.
Media
: display the list of tracks.
Radio
(press and hold): update the
list of stations received.
Increase volume.
background
6
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
21,518,5
12:1323 °C 12:1318,5 21,523 °C
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
Audio and Telematics
Connected navigation
Driving
Applications
Enter navigation settings and choose a
destination.
Use services available in real time, depending
on equipment.
Activate, deactivate and configure certain
vehicle functions.
Operate certain applications on a smartphone
connected via CarPlay
®
or MirrorLink
®
or MirrorLink
®
TM
.
Check the state of the Bluetooth
®
and Wi-Fi
®
and Wi-Fi
®
connections.
Menus
Air conditioning
Manage the various temperature and air flow
settings.
A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n
background
7
.
FM/87.5 MHz
87.5MHz
12:1318,5 21,523 °C 12:1318,5 21,523 °C 12:1318,5 21,523 °C
Audio and Telematics
Settings
Radio Media
Telephone
Configure a personal profile and/or configure
the sound (balance, ambience, ...) and the
display (language, units, date, time, ...).
Select an audio source, a radio station, display
photographs.
Connect a telephone by Bluetooth
®
, read
messages and emails and send quick
messages.
background
8
Audio and Telematics
Voice commands
First steps
Steering mounted controls
Information - Using the system
Press the Push To Talk
button and tell me what you'd
like after the tone. Remember
you can interrupt me at any
time by pressing this button. If you
press it again while I'm waiting for you
to speak, it'll end the conversation. If
you need to start over, say "cancel".
If you want to undo something, say
"undo". And to get information and tips
at any time, just say "help". If you ask
to me do something and there's some
information missing that I need, I'll
give you some examples or take you
through it step by step. There's more
information available in "novice" mode.
You can set the dialogue mode to
"expert" when you feel comfortable.
To ensure that voice commands are
always recognised by the system,
please observe the following
recommendations:
- speak in a normal tone without
breaking up words or raising your
voice.
- always wait for the "beep" (audible
signal) before speaking.
- for best operation, it is
recommended that the windows
and opening roof be closed to
avoid extraneous interference
(according to version).
- before making a voice command,
ask other passengers to not speak.
The voice commands, with a choice
of 12 languages (English, French,
Italian, Spanish, German, Dutch,
Portuguese, Polish, Turkish, Russian,
Arabic, Brazilian), are made using the
language previously chosen and set in
the system.
The voice commands in Arabic for:
"Navigate to address" and "Display POI
in the city", are not available.
Alternative synonyms can be used for
some voice commands.
E.g. Guide to / Navigate to / Go to /...
Example of a "voice command" for
navigation:
"Navigate to address 11 Regent
Street, London"
.
Example of a "voice command" for
the radio and media:
"Play artist Madonna"
.
Example of a "voice command" for
the telephone:
"Call David Miller"
.
Pressing this button activates the
voice commands function.
background
9
.
Audio and Telematics
Global voice commands
These commands can be made from any screen page after pressing the "Voice command" or "Telephone" button located on the steering
wheel, as long as there is no telephone call in progress.
"Voice command"
Help message
Help
There are lots of topics I can help you with.
You can say: "help with phone", "help with navigation", "help with media" or "help with
radio". For an overview on how to use voice controls, you can say "help with voice
controls".
Voice command help
Navigation help
Radio help
Media help
Telephone help
Set dialogue mode as <...>
Select "beginner" or "expert" mode.
Select profile <...>
Select profile 1, 2 or 3.
Yes
Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" and we'll start that again.
No
background
10
Audio and Telematics
"Navigation" voice commands
These commands can be issued from any screen page after pressing the "Voice command" or "Telephone" button on the steering wheel, as
long as there is no telephone call in progress.
Depending on the country, give the destination instructions (address) in the language used by the system.
"Voice command"
Help message
Navigate home
To start guidance or add a stopover, say "navigate to" and then the address or contact
name.
For example, "navigate to address 11 Regent Street, London", or "navigate to contact, John
Miller".
You can specify if it's a preferred or recent destination.
For example, "navigate to preferred address, Tennis club", "navigate to recent destination,
11 Regent Street, London". Otherwise, just say, "navigate home".
To see points of interest on a map, you can say things like "show hotels in Banbury" or
"show nearby petrol station".
For more information you can ask for "help with route guidance".
Navigate to work
Navigate to preferred address <...>
Navigate to contact <…>
Navigate to address <...>
Show nearby POI <...>
Remaining distance
To get information about your current route, you can say "tell me the remaining time",
"distance" or "arrival time".
Try saying "help with navigation" to learn more commands.
Remaining time
Arrival time
Stop route guidance
background
11
.
Audio and Telematics
"Radio Media" voice commands
These commands can be issued from any screen page after pressing the "Voice command" or "Telephone" button on the steering wheel, as
long as there is no telephone call in progress.
"Voice command"
Help message
Tune to channel <...>
You can pick a radio station by saying "tune to" and the station name or frequency.
For example "tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to 98.5 FM". To listen to a preset radio
station, say "tune to preset number". For example "tune to preset number five".
What's playing
To display the details of the current "track", "artist" and "album", you can say "What's
playing"
Play song <...>
Use the command "play" to select the type of music you'd like to hear.
You can pick by "song", "artist", or "album".
Just say something like "play artist, Madonna", "play song, Hey Jude", or "play album,
Thriller".
Play artist <…>
Play album <...>
Media voice commands are available only for a USB connection.
background
12
Audio and Telematics
"Voice command"
Help message
Call contact <...>
*
To make a phone call, say "call" followed by the contact name, for example: "Call David
Miller".
You can also include the phone type, for example: "Call David Miller at home". To make a
call by number, say "dial" followed by the phone number, for example,
"Dial 107776 835 417".
You can check your voicemail by saying "call voicemail".
To send a text, say "send quick message to", followed by the contact, and then the name of
the quick message you'd like to send.
For example, "send quick message to David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of calls,
say "display calls".
For more information on SMS, you can say "help with texting".
Dial <...> *
Display contacts
*
Display calls
*
Call (message box | voicemail)
*
* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and if the download has
been done.
"Telephone" voice commands
If a telephone is connected to the system, these voice commands can be issued from any main screen page after pressing the "Telephone"
button on the steering wheel, as long as there is no telephone call in progress.
If there is no telephone connected by Bluetooth, a voice message announces: "Please first connect a telephone" and the voice session will be
closed.
background
13
.
Audio and Telematics
"Voice command"
Help message
Send text to <...>
To hear your messages, you can say "listen to most recent message".
When you want to send a text, there's a set of quick messages ready for you to use. Just
use the quick message name and say something like "send quick message to Bill Carter,
I'll be late".
Check the phone menu for the names of the supported messages.
Please say "call" or "send quick message to", and then select a line from the list.
To move around a list shown on the display, you can say "go to start", "go to end", "next
page" or "previous page". To undo your selection, say "undo".
To cancel the current action and start again, say "cancel".
Listen to most recent message
*
"Test message" voice commands
If a telephone is connected to the system these voice commands can be issued from any main screen page after pressing the "Telephone"
button on the steering wheel, as long as there is no telephone call in progress.
If no telephone has been connected by Bluetooth, a voice message announces: "Please first connect a telephone" and the voice session will be
closed.
* This function is only available if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and if the download has
been done.
The system only sends pre-recorded "Quick messages".
background
14
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
1
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
Audio and Telematics
Navigation
A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
background
15
.
Audio and Telematics
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Navigation
Select the orientation of the map; north up,
vehicle direction up or perspective.
Navigation
Display the traffic information available.
Navigation
World map
Manually locate an area on the world map or enter
the latitude and longitude coordinates.
Around the vehicle
Display the location criteria selected.
Around home
Around the destination
2D mode
Switch to a 2D map.
Zoom out / zoom in using the touch buttons or
with two fingers on the screen.
Start navigation to the current address.
Save the current address.
Zoom out / zoom in using the touch buttons or
with two fingers on the screen.
background
16
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
Audio and Telematics
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
background
17
.
7
2
3
4
5
6
Audio and Telematics
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Navigation
Stations
Activate or deactivate the content available
(stations, car parks, risk areas and danger areas).
Car park
Danger area
Map color
Select day or night mode for display of the map.
POI on map
Travel
Select the POIs available.
Active life
Commercial
Public
Geographic
Select all
Select or deselect all.
Save your choice or selection.
View map
Modify city
Select or modify a city.
Weather
Display on the map the content available in non-
connected mode.
Petrol Station
Car park
Traf fic
Danger area
Select POI
Select from the POIs available.
Zoom out / zoom in using the touch buttons or
with two fingers on the screen.
background
18
Audio and Telematics
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
background
19
.
Audio and Telematics
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Comments
Zoom in
Zoom in around the city selected.
Around the vehicle
Select a location option.
On the route
At the destination
Weather
Weather information transmitted in TMC mode.
Filling stations
Filling stations around the vehicle
Display the list of POIs.
Filling stations on the route
Filling stations at the destination
Car park
Car parks around the vehicle
Car parks on the route
Car parks at the destination
Zoom out / zoom in using the touch buttons or
with two fingers on the screen.
background
20
Audio and Telematics
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
background
21
.
Audio and Telematics
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Comments
Traf fic
Traffic observed
Traffic information sent in real time.
Danger area
List of danger areas
Display the list of danger areas (roadworks,
breakdowns, accidents, ...).
Select POI
Configure a category of POI to display.
background
22
1
17
18
8
11
9
12
10
13
16
14
15
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
background
23
.
1
1
1
1
17
18
8
11
9
12
10
13
16
14
15
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Comments
Navigation
MENU
Enter address
Select the country.
Save the current address.
Confirm the current address.
Navigation
MENU
My destinations
Recent
Display the lists of destinations and start
navigation.
Preferred
My home
My work
Contact
Delete one or more destinations.
Navigation
MENU
Points of interest
Travel
List of categories available.
After selection of category, select the point of
interest.
Active life
Commercial
Public
Geographic
Search
Search for a point of interest.
Navigation
MENU
Search
Point of interest
Enter a point of interest.
Address
Enter the address of a point of interest.
Local
/
Connected
Enter settings for the POI search mode in a local
or connected database depending on the services
subscribed to.
Confirm the entry.
background
24
1
19
21
20
22
23
24
25
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
background
25
.
1
1
1
19
21
20
23
22
24
25
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Comments
Navigation
MENU
Guidance criteria
Fast
Select the guidance criteria (motorways, tolls and
how traffic is taken into account).
Short
Compromise
Ecological
See on map
Display the route selected using the criteria.
Save your selections.
Navigation
MENU
Routes / waypoints
Waypoints
Display the waypoints saved.
Route
Display details of the route.
Add waypoint
Add a waypoint
Add a waypoint from a list offered.
Preview
Display the map.
Finish
Press to calculate the route.
Delete one or more waypoints.
Move a waypoint in the list.
Navigation
MENU
Settings
Aspects
Enter choices and select the volume for the voice
and stating the names of streets.
Options
Alerts
Vocal
Mapping
Save the selections adopted.
background
26
1
1
8
Audio and Telematics
Choosing a new destination
Select "
Enter address
".
Select "
See on map
" to select the
"
Guidance criteria
".
Select the "
Country
".
Press "
OK
" to select the "
Guidance
criteria
".
Press "
OK
" to start navigation.
Press "
OK
" to start navigation.
And / Or
Press
Navigation
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
MENU
" button to go to the
secondary page.
Towards a new destination
Towards a recent destination
Select "
My destinations
".
Press
Navigation
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
MENU
" button to go to the
secondary page.
Enter the "
City
", the "
Street
" and the
"
Number
" and confirm by pressing
on the suggestions displayed.
Select the "
Recent
" tab.
Select the address chosen in the list to display
the "
Guidance criteria
".
To use the navigation system, it is
necessary to enter the "
City
", the
"
Street
" and the "
Number
" using the
virtual keypad, or to take them from the
list of "
Contacts
" or from the "
History
"
of addresses.
Without confirmation of the street
number, you will be guided to one end
of the street.
Select "
Position
" to see the point of
arrival geographically.
background
27
.
1
10
1
1
9
Audio and Telematics
Or
Towards a contact
Select "
My destinations
".
Select the "
Contact
" tab.
Press
Navigation
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
MENU
" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select a contact in the list offered to start
navigation.
Press "
OK
" to start calculation of the
route.
Towards points of interest (POI)
Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different
categories.
Press
Navigation
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
MENU
" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "
Points of interest
".
Select "
Search
" to enter the name
and address of a POI.
Select the "
Travel
", or "
Leisure
"
or "
Commercial
" or "
Public
" or
"
Geographic
" tab.
Or
Or
Towards "My home" or "My
work"
Select "
My destinations
".
Press
Navigation
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
MENU
" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select the "
Preferred
" tab.
Select "
My home
".
Select "
My work
".
Select a previously saved favourite destination.
background
28
Audio and Telematics
Towards GPS coordinates
Towards a point on the map
Press
Navigation
to display the
primary page.
Press
Navigation
to display the
primary page.
Explore the map by sliding a finger on the
screen.
Explore the map by sliding a finger on the
screen.
Tap the screen to place a marker and
display the sub-menu.
Or
Or
Or
And
Select the destination by pressing on the map.
Press this button to start navigation.
Press this button to start navigation.
Press this button to display the world
map.
Using the grid, select by zoom the
desired country or region.
Press this button to save the address
displayed
Press this button to save the address
displayed.
Press this button to enter the GPS
coordinates.
Press this button to enter the value
for "
Latitude
" using the virtual
k e y p a d .
Press this button to enter the value
for "
Longitude
" using the virtual
k e y p a d .
A marker is displayed in the middle of
the screen, with the "
Latitude
" and
"
Longitude
" coordinates.
A long press on a point opens a list of
POIs nearby.
background
29
.
Audio and Telematics
TMC (Traffic Message
Channel)
TMC (Traffic Message Channel)
messages are linked to a European
standard on the broadcasting of traffic
information via the RDS system on FM
radio, transmitting traffic information in
real time.
The TMC information is then displayed
on a GPS Navigation system map and
taken into account straight away during
navigation, so as to avoid accidents,
traffic jams and closed roads.
The display of danger areas depends
on the legislation in force and
subscription to the service.
background
30
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
Audio and Telematics
Connected navigation
Network connection provided by the vehicle
OR
Network connection provided by the user
Depending on the equipment level of the vehicle
According to version
background
31
.
Audio and Telematics
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the
driver, using a smartphone when
driving is prohibited.
All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary
.
vehicle stationary . vehicle stationary
Connected navigation connection
The principles and standards
are constantly changing. For
communication between your
smartphone and the system to operate
correctly, we recommend that you
keep your smartphone's operating
system up to date, and the time and
date on your smartphone and the
system correct
.
The services offered with connected
navigation are as follows.
A Connected Services pack:
- Weather,
- Filling stations,
- Car park,
- Traffic,
- POI, local search.
A Danger area pack (option).
Activate the Bluetooth function on
the telephone and ensure that it is
visible to all (see the "Connect-App"
section).
Connect the USB cable.
The smartphone is in charge mode
when connected by USB cable.
The system is automatically
connected to the modem included
for the "Emergency or assistance
calls" services and does not require
a connection provided by the user via
their smartphone.
On the arrival of "TOMTOM
TRAFFIC", the services are
available.
For access to connected navigation, you
can use the connection provided by the
vehicle via the "Emergency or assistance
call" services or use your smartphone as
a modem.
Activate and enter settings for
sharing the smartphone connection.
Restrictions of use:
- With CarPlay
®
, connection sharing is
only with a Wi-Fi connection.
- W i t h M i r r o r L i n k
TM
, connection
sharing is only with a USB
connection.
The quality of services depends on the
quality of the network connection.
Select a Wi-Fi connection found by
the system and connect to it (see the
"Connect-App" section).
USB connection
Network connection provided by
the vehicle
Network connection provided by
the user
Bluetooth connection
Wi-Fi connection
background
32
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
12:1318,521,523 °C
12:1318,521,523 °C
1
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
7
27
28
26
29
30
Audio and Telematics
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
background
33
.
7
28
27
26
29
30
Audio and Telematics
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Navigation
Select the orientation of the map; north up,
vehicle direction up or perspective.
Navigation
TOMTOM TRAFFIC
On connection of the system to a network,
"TOMTOM TRAFFIC" is displayed instead of
"TMC", for use of all of the options available, in
real time.
Navigation
Weather
Select the options.
The map display the route chosen, depending on
options.
Stations
Car park
Traffic
Danger area
Map color
Select the display mode for the map.
POI on map
Commercial
Select the POIs available.
Geographic
Leisure
Public
Travel
Save the options.
View map
Modify city
Select or change a city.
Zoom out / zoom in using the touch buttons or
with two fingers on the screen.
background
34
31
32
Audio and Telematics
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
background
35
.
31
32
Audio and Telematics
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Comments
Select city
Select or change a city.
Around the vehicle
Select or change a city.
On the route
At the destination
Weather
Weather information
Display the weather forecast for the day or the
following days.
Filling stations
Filling stations around the vehicle
Display the list of filling stations and the
associated information (address, prices, fuels, ...).
Filling stations on the route
Filling stations at the destination
By distance
By price
Car park
Car parks around the vehicle
Display the list of car parks and the associated
information (address, distance, spaces available,
price, ...).
Car parks on the route
Car parks at the destination
Sort by distance
Sort by spaces
Sort by price
Zoom out / zoom in using the touch buttons or
with two fingers on the screen.
background
36
Audio and Telematics
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
background
37
.
Audio and Telematics
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Comments
Traf fic
Traffic observed
Display traffic information in real time: type,
description and duration (in minutes).
Danger areas
List of danger areas
Display danger areas (roadworks, breakdowns,
accidents, ...) in real time.
Points of interest
Points of
interest
Select POI
Display the list of POIs for the location selected.
background
38
22
23
1
Audio and Telematics
Settings specific to
connected navigation
For access to connected navigation,
you have to select the option:
"
Authorise sending information
".
Select "
Options
".
Select "
Alerts
".
- "
Allow declaration of danger
areas
"
- "
Guidance to final destination
on foot
"
- "
Authorise sending
information
"
Activate or deactivate:
Activate or deactivate "
Warn of
danger zones
".
The display of danger zones is
conditioned by the legislation in force
and subscription to the service.
The temperature displayed at 6 o'clock in the
morning will be the maximum temperature for the
day.
The temperature displayed at 6 o'clock in the evening
will be the minimum temperature for the night.
Select "
Settings
".
Press
Navigation
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
MENU
" button to go to the
secondary page.
Display the weather
Select "
Weather
".
Press this button to display the first
level of information.
Press this button to display the
detailed weather information.
Select "
View map
".
Press
Navigation
to display the
primary page.
Press this button to display the list of
services.
background
39
.
1
Audio and Telematics
To distribute information on the
declaration of danger zones, you
should check the option: "
Allow
declaration of danger areas
".
Declaration of "Danger
areas"
Press
Navigation
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
Declare a new danger
area
" button located in the upper bar
of the touch screen.
Select the option "
Type
" to choose
the type of "Danger area".
Select the "
Speed
" option and enter
it using the virtual keypad.
Press "
OK
" to save and distribute the
information.
You can download the system and map
updates from the Brand's website.
The update procedure can also be
found on the website.
"Danger areas" pack
updates
Press
Settings
to display the primary
page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Select "
System settings
".
Select "
View
" to view the version of
the various modules installed in the
system.
Select "
Update(s) due
".
Select the "
System info
" tab.
background
40
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
3
2
1
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
Audio and Telematics
Applications
According to version / according to equipment
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
background
41
.
2
2
3
Audio and Telematics
Internet Browser
Connectivity
Applications
Press "
Internet Browser
" to display
the browser home page.
Select your country of residence.
Press "
Connectivity
" to go to the
CarPlay
®
or
®
or
®
MirrorLink
TM
function.
Press "
Connectivity
" to go to the
"
Internet Browser
" function.
Press "
Applications
" to display the
applications home page.
Connection to the internet is via one of
the network connections provided by
the vehicle or the user.
Press
Applications
to display the
primary page.
Press
Applications
to display the
primary page.
Press
Applications
to display the
primary page.
Press "
OK
" to save and start the
browser.
background
42
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
2
Audio and Telematics
CarPlay
®
CarPlay
®
CarPlay
smartphone connection
®
smartphone connection
®
background
43
.
2
Audio and Telematics
As a safety measure and because it
requires the sustained attention of
the driver, using a smartphone when
driving is prohibited.
Operation must be with the
vehicle
stationary
.
stationary . stationary
The synchronisation of a smartphone
allows applications on a smartphone that
are adapted to the CarPlay
®
technology
®
technology
®
to be displayed in the vehicle's screen,
having first activated the CarPlay
®
function in the smartphone.
As the principles and standards are
constantly changing,
it is recommended
that you keep your smartphone's
operating system updated
.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go
to the Brand's internet website in your
country.
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when connecte
d by a USB cable.
Press "
Telephone
" to display the
CarPlay
®
interface.
®
interface.
®
Press "
CarPlay
" to display the
CarPlay
®
interface
®
interface
®
On connecting the USB cable, the
CarPlay
®
function deactivates the
®
function deactivates the
®
system's Bluetooth
®
mode.
®
mode.
®
In the system, press "
Applications
"
to display the primary page.
Or
Press "
Connectivity
" to go to the
CarPlay
®
function.
®
function.
®
background
44
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
2
Audio and Telematics
MirrorLink
TM
smartphone connection
background
45
.
2
Audio and Telematics
As a safety measure and because it
requires the sustained attention of
the driver, using a smartphone when
driving is prohibited.
Operation must be with the
vehicle
stationary
.
stationary . stationary
The synchronisation of a
smartphone allows applications on a
smartphone that are adapted to the
MirrorLink
TM
technology to be displayed
in the vehicle's screen.
The principles and standards
are constantly evolving. For the
communication process between
the smartphone and the system to
work correctly, the smartphone must
be unlocked;
update the operating
system of your smartphone as
well as the date and time in the
smartphone and the system
.
For the list of eligible smartphones,
connect to the Brand's internet website
in your country.
The "
MirrorLink
TM
" function requires
the use of a compatible smartphone
and applications.
There may be a wait for the availability
of applications, depending on the
quality of your network.
When connecting a smartphone to
the system, it is recommended that
Bluetooth
®
be started on the smartphone
®
be started on the smartphone
®
Depending on the smartphone, it may be
necessary to activate the "
MirrorLink
TM
"
function.
During the procedure, several screen
pages relating to certain functions
are displayed.
Accept to start and end the
connection.
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
Press "
MirrorLink
TM
" to start the
system's application.
Once connection is established, a page
is displayed with the applications already
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted
to MirrorLink
TM
t e c h n o l o g y .
Access to the different audio sources remains
accessible in the margin of the MirrorLink
TM
display, using touch buttons in the upper bar.
Access to the menus for the system is possible
at any time using the dedicated buttons
From the system, press on
"
Applications
" to display the primary
page.
As a safety measure, applications
can only be viewed with the vehicle
stationary; display is interrupted once
the vehicle is moving.
Press "
Connectivity
" to go to the
MirrorLink
TM
function.
background
46
12:1318,521,523 °C
Audio and Telematics
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
background
47
.
Audio and Telematics
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Applications
MirrorLink
TM
Go to or return to the applications already
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to
MirrorLink
TM
technology.
Go to a menu list depending on the application
chosen.
"Back": abandon the current operation, go up one
level.
"Home": go to or return to the "Car mode" page on
your smartphone.
Go to the primary page of the "Applications"
menu.
background
48
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
3
3
2
1
4
6
5
Audio and Telematics
According to equipment
Level 2
Level 3
background
49
.
4
5
6
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Applications
Trip computer
Instant
System providing information about the current
journey (range, fuel consumption…).
Trip 1
Trip 2
Back to the Applications page.
background
50
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
7
12
8
13
9
11
10
1
3
2
Audio and Telematics
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
background
51
.
1
1
1
1
11
12
13
7
8
9
10
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Applications
OPTIONS
Bluetooth
connection
All
Display all telephones detected and saved.
Connected
Display all telephones connected.
Search
Start the search for a device to be connected.
Applications
OPTIONS
Wi-Fi network
connection
Secured
Display the secured Wi-Fi networks.
Not secured
Display the not secured Wi-Fi networks.
Stored
Display the stored Wi-Fi networks.
Applications
OPTIONS
Manage connection
Display the status of the subscription to the
connected services, the status of the network
connection and the connection mode.
Applications
OPTIONS
Share Wi-Fi
connection
Activation
Activate or deactivate the Wi-Fi connection
sharing.
Settings
Select a Wi-Fi network found by the system and
connect.
Save the settings.
background
52
1
Audio and Telematics
Bluetooth
®
connection
®
connection
®
Procedure from the system
Connection sharing
Press on "
Connect-App
" to display
the primary page.
Press on "
Bluetooth connection
".
Select "
Search
".
The list of detected telephones is
displayed.
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
that you deactivate and then reactivate the
"Bluetooth" function in your telephone.
The "
Mobile internet data
" profile
must be activated for connected
navigation (where the vehicle does not
have "Emergency and assistance call"
services), having first activated sharing
of this connection on your smartphone.
The system offers to connect the
telephone with 3 profiles:
- "
Telephone
" (hands-free kit, telephone
only),
- "
Streaming
" (wireless play of audio files
on the telephone),
- "
Mobile internet data
".
Select the name of the chosen
telephone in the list.
Press "
OK
" to confirm.
Select one or more profiles.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the
driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile
telephone with the Bluetooth hands-
free system of your audio system must
be done with the
vehicle stationary
and the ignition on.
Procedure from the telephone
Select the name of the system in the
list of devices detected.
In the system, accept the connection request
from the telephone.
Activate the Bluetooth function on the
telephone and ensure that it is "visible
to all" (telephone configuration).
To complete the pairing, whichever
procedure used (from the telephone or
from the system), ensure that the code
is the same in the system and in the
telephone.
Depending on the type of telephone,
you may be asked to accept or not the
transfer of your contacts and messages.
background
53
.
1
1
1
12
13
Audio and Telematics
Wi-Fi connection
Sharing the Wi-Fi connection
Managing connections
To protect from any piracy and provide
maximum security for your systems,
it is recommended that you use a
security code or a complex password.
The Wi-Fi connection and the sharing
of the Wi-Fi connection are exclusive.
Press "
OK
" to confirm.
Press "
OK
" to start the connection.
Press "
Connect-App
" to display the
primary page.
Network connection by the smartphone Wi-Fi.
Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the
system.
Press
Connect-App
to display the
primary page.
Press
Connect-App
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Select "
Wi-Fi network connection
".
Select "
Share Wi-Fi connection
".
Select "
Manage connection
".
And / Or
Select the "
Secured
", "
Not secured
"
or "
Stored
" tab.
Select the "
Activation
" tab to
activate or deactivate sharing of the
Wi-Fi connection.
Select the "
Settings
" to change the
name of the system network and the
password.
With this function you can view the access
to connected services, the availability of
connected services and modify the connection
mode.
Using the virtual keypad, enter the
"
Key
" for the Wi-Fi network and the
"
Password
".
Select a network.
background
54
FM/87.5 MHz
87.5MHz
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
2
1
4
3
FM/87.5 MHz
87.5MHz
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
AM/531 kHz
PO
kHz
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
2
1
3
4
Audio and Telematics
Radio Media
A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n
Level 1
Level 2
background
55
.
3
2
4
Audio and Telematics
Level 1
Level 2
Comments
Radio Media
Source
Radio
Select change of source.
USB
iPod
CD
AUX
Bluetooth
Radio Media
Frequency / Presets
Frequency
Carry out an automatic or manual search for radio
stations.
Presets
Make a long press on an empty location to preset
a station.
Radio Media
Band
FM
Press the Band button to change waveband.
DAB
AM
Radio Media
List
Radio stations
Open the list and press a radio station to select it.
background
56
1
9
6
7
8
5
10
11
13
14
15
12
9
9
6
6
7
7
8
8
5
5
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
background
57
.
5
12
8
6
13
14
15
9
7
10
11
1
1
1
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Radio Media
OPTIONS
Audio settings
Ambience
Select the sound ambience.
Distribution
Sound distribution by the Arkamys
®
system.
®
system.
®
Sound
Adjust the volume or activate volume linked to
speed.
Voice
Adjust the voice volume.
Ringtone
Adjust the ringtone volume.
Save settings.
Radio Media
OPTIONS
Radio settings
General
Activate or deactivate settings.
Announcements
Save settings.
Radio Media
OPTIONS
Radio stations
FM
Display the list of radio stations for the band
selected.
DAB
AM
Presets
Select a preset radio station.
Frequency
Enter a frequency manually.
Change the screen display mode.
Update the list according to reception.
background
58
21
1
17
18
19
20
16
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
background
59
.
17
20
18
21
19
1
1
16
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Radio Media
OPTIONS
Music files
Albums
Choose a selection mode.
Artists
Genres
Playlists
Folders
Radio Media
OPTIONS
Managing photos
USB
Display photos.
The system supports the following image formats:
.gif, .jpg, .jpeg, .bmp, .png, .raw and .tiff with a
maximum file size of 10 Mb per image.
background
background
61
.
1
2
2
2
Audio and Telematics
Press
Radio Media
to display the
menu.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Press "
Frequency
".
Press "
Frequency
".
Enter the values using the virtual
keypad.
First enter the units then click on the
decimals zone to enter the figures
after the decimal point.
Press one of the buttons for an
automatic search for radio stations.
Press
Radio Media
to display the
primary page.
Radio
Selecting a station
Radio reception may be affected by
the use of electrical equipment not
approved by the Brand, such as a USB
charger connected to the 12 V socket.
The exterior environment (hills,
buildings, tunnel, car park, below
ground...) may prevent reception,
even in RDS station tracking mode.
This phenomenon is normal in the
propagation of radio waves and is in no
way indicative of a fault with the audio
system.
Select "
Radio stations
" in the
secondary page.
Or
Or
Move the cursor for a manual search
for frequencies up or down.
Select a radio station or frequency.
(refer to the corresponding section)
Press "
Presets
".
Make a long press on one of the
buttons to preset the station.
Preset a station
Press "
OK
" to confirm.
background
62
1
1
10
10
11
Audio and Telematics
Press
Radio Media
to display the
primary page.
Press
Radio Media
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Select "
Radio settings
".
Select "
Radio settings
".
Select "
General
".
Select "
General
".
Select "
Announcements
".
Activate/deactivate "
Station follow
".
Activate / Deactivate "
Display radio
text
".
Activate / Deactivate "
Traffic
announcement
".
Activate/ Deactivate RDS
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue
listening to the same station by automatic
retuning to alternative frequencies.
However, in certain conditions, coverage
of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the entire country as radio
stations do not cover 100 % of the
territory. This explains the loss of
reception of the station during a journey.
Press "
OK
" to confirm.
Press "
OK
" to confirm.
Press "
OK
" to confirm.
The "Radio Text" function allows
information transmitted by the radio
station, relating to the station or the
song playing, to be displayed.
Display text information
Play TA messages
The TA (Traffic Announcement)
function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function
needs good reception of a radio station
that carries this type of message. While
traffic information is being broadcast,
the current media is automatically
interrupted so that the TA message can
be heard. Normal play of the media
previously playing is resumed at the
end of the message.
background
63
.
1
10
3
Audio and Telematics
Select the audio source.
Press
Radio Media
to display the
primary page.
Press "
Band
" to select the "
DAB
"
waveband.
Press
Radio Media
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
DAB-FM auto tracking
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the
territory.
When the digital radio signal is poor,
"DAB-FM auto tracking" allows you to
continue listening to the same station,
by automatically switching to the
corresponding "FM" analogue station
(if there is one).
If "DAB-FM auto tracking" is activated,
there is a difference of a few seconds
when the system switches to "FM"
analogue radio with sometimes a
variation in volume.
Once the digital signal is restored, the
system automatically changes back to
" D A B " .
Digital radio provides higher quality
reception.
The different multiplexes offer a
choice of radio stations arranged in
alphabetical order.
If the "DAB" station being listened to
is not available on "FM" ("
DAB-FM
"
option greyed out), or "DAB/FM auto
tracking" is not activated, the sound
will cut out while the digital signal is too
w e a k .
Select "
Radio settings
".
Select "
General
".
Activate / Deactivate "
Station
follow
".
Press "
OK
".
DAB radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting)
Terrestrial Digital Radio
background
64
Audio and Telematics
Media
USB port
Selecting the source
Select "
Source
".
Press
Radio Media
to display the
primary page.
The system builds playlists (in temporary
memory), an operation which can take from
a few seconds to several minutes at the first
connection.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The playlists are updated every time the
ignition is switched off or connection of a USB
memory stick. The lists are memorised: if they
are not modified, the subsequent loading time
will be shorter.
Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port
or connect the USB device to the USB port
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Auxiliary (AUX) socket
First adjust the volume of your portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
audio system.
Display and management of the controls are
via the portable device.
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input"
has been checked in the audio settings.
(depending on equipment)
Connect the portable device (MP3 player…) to
the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
(not supplied).
Choose the source.
Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
audio streaming
®
audio streaming
®
Streaming allows you to listen to music from
your telephone.
The Bluetooth profile must be activated. First
adjust the volume on your portable device (to a
high level).
Then adjust the volume of your audio system.
If play does not start automatically, it may be
necessary to start the audio playback from the
telephone.
Control is from the portable device or by using
the system's touch buttons.
Once connected in streaming mode,
the telephone is considered to be a
media source.
To protect the system, do not use a
USB hub.
CD player
(depending on equipment)
Insert the CD in the player.
background
65
.
Audio and Telematics
Connecting Apple
®
Connecting Apple
®
Connecting Apple
players
®
players
®
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB port
®
player to the USB port
®
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifications available are those
of the portable device connected
(artists / albums / genres / playlists /
audiobooks / podcasts).
The default classification used is by
artist. To modify the classification used,
return to the first level of the menu
then select the desired classification
(playlists for example) and confirm
to go down through the menu to the
desired track.
The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
your Apple
®
player.
®
player.
®
The audio equipment will only play audio
files with ".wma, .aac, .flac, .ogg and .mp3"
file extensions and with a bit rate of between
32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of file (.mp4, ...) can be played.
".wma" files must be of the standard wma 9
type.
The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and
48 KHz.
In order to be able to play a burned CDR or
CDRW, when burning it is preferable to select
standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet.
If the disc is burned in another format, it may
not be played correctly.
It is recommended that the same burning
standard is always used on an individual disc,
with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for the best sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Joliet standard is recommended.
It is advisable to restrict file names to
20 characters, without using of special
characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing
and displaying problems.
Information and advice
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT 32
(file allocation table).
The system supports USB mass
storage devices, BlackBerry
®
devices
®
devices
®
or Apple
®
players via USB ports. The
®
players via USB ports. The
®
adaptor cable is not supplied.
Control of the peripheral device is with
the audio system controls.
Other peripherals, not recognised on
connection, must be connected to the
auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming,
depending on compatibility.
It is recommended that the original USB
cable for the portable device is used.
To protect the system, do not use a
USB hub.
background
66
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
4
1
1
8
14
5
3
9
12
6
2
10
7
11
13
Audio and Telematics
Telephone
A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
background
67
.
14
12
13
3
2
5
6
7
4
8
9
10
11
Audio and Telematics
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Telephone
Bluetooth
Contact
All
View contacts according to presentation choices.
Select a contact or a favourite saved in the
system via the profile selected to start the call.
Telephone
Address
Favourites
Sort the contacts by Surname-First name or First
name-Surname.
Update the contacts from the telephone.
Search
Search for a contact in the directory.
Create
Telephone
Create a new contact in the system.
Address
Email
Telephone
Bluetooth
Calls
All
View calls according to choice of presentation.
Select a contact to start the call.
Incoming
Outgoing
Missed
View details for the contact.
background
68
19
20
21
22
1
15
16
17
18
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
background
69
.
1
1
1
19
20
21
22
15
16
17
18
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Telephone
OPTIONS
Bluetooth
connection
All
Display all telephones detected and saved.
Connected
Display all connected telephones.
Search
Start the search for a device to connect.
Telephone
OPTIONS
Messages
All
Display messages according to the choice made.
Received
Sent
Telephone
OPTIONS
Email
Received
Display emails according to the choice made.
Sent
Not read
Mailbox
background
70
23
27
24
28
25
29
26
30
1
23
24
25
26
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
background
71
.
1
1
27
28
29
30
23
24
25
26
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Telephone
OPTIONS
Settings
Security
Make driving safe.
Voicemail
Enter and save the number for the telephone
voicemail.
Ringtone
Adjust the ringtone volume.
Statistics
Display data for the telephone connected.
Save the options.
Telephone
OPTIONS
Quick messages
Delayed
Select a quick message from the categories, as
required.
My arrival
Not available
Other
background
72
Audio and Telematics
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
Pairing a Bluetooth
telephone
®
telephone
®
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the
driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile
telephone with theBluetooth hands-free
system of your audio system must be
done with the
vehicle stationary
and
the ignition on.
Procedure from the telephone
Select the system name in the list of
devices detected.
In the system, accept the connection request
from the telephone.
Procedure from the system
Press on
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Press on "
Bluetooth search
".
Select "
Search
".
The list of telephones detected is
displayed.
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
that you deactivate and then reactivate the
"Bluetooth" function in your telephone.
The system offers to connect the telephone
with 3 profiles:
-
Telephone
(hands-free kit, telephone
only),
-
Streaming
(wireless play of audio files on
the telephone),
-
Mobile internet data
.
Depending on the type of telephone,
you may be asked to accept or not
the transfer of your contacts and
messages.
Select the name of the chosen
telephone in the list.
Press "
OK
" to confirm.
Select one or more profiles.
Or
Activate the Bluetooth function on the
telephone and ensure that it is "visible
to all" (telephone configuration).
To complete the pairing, whichever
procedure used (from the telephone or
from the system), ensure that the code
is the same in the system and in the
telephone.
The "
Mobile internet data
" profile
must be activated for connected
navigation, having first activated
sharing of the connection on your
smartphone.
Connection sharing
background
73
.
1
Audio and Telematics
Press
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Select "
Bluetooth connection
" to
display the list of paired devices.
On return to the vehicle, if the last
telephone connected is present again,
it is automatically recognised and
within about 30 seconds of switching
on the ignition, the connection is
established without any action on your
part (Bluetooth activated).
The services available depend on
the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
used. Check in your telephone's
manual and with your service provider
for the services available to you.
The ability of the system to connect
with just one profile depends on the
telephone.
All three profiles may connect by default.
Go to the Brand's website for more information
(compatibility, additional help, ...).
To modify the connection profile
:
Automatic reconnection
Press the "details" button.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Press "
OK
" to confirm.
Select one or more profiles.
The profiles compatible with the system
are HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
MAP and PAN.
background
74
1
Audio and Telematics
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
superimposed display in the screen.
Make a short press on the steering
mounted
TEL
button to accept an
incoming call.
Make a long press
on the steering mounted
TEL
button
to reject the call.
Or
And
Select "
End call
".
Press on the name of the telephone
chosen in the list to disconnect it.
Press again to connect it.
Select the basket at top right of the
screen to display a basket alongside
the telephone chosen.
Press the basket alongside the
telephone chosen to delete it.
Managing paired telephones
This function allows the connection or
disconnection of a peripheral device as
well as the deletion of a pairing.
Press
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Select "
Bluetooth connection
" to
display the list of paired peripheral
devices.
Deleting a telephone
background
75
.
2
3
Audio and Telematics
on the steering mounted button.
Using the telephone is not
recommended while driving.
Park the vehicle.
Make the call using the steering
mounted controls.
Making a call
Calling a new number
Press
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Enter the phone number using the
digital keypad.
Press "
Call
" to start the call.
Calling a contact
Press
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Or make a long press
on the steering mounted
TEL
button.
Select "
Contact
".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
Select "
Call
".
Calling a recently used number
Press
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Make a long press
Select "
Calls
".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
It is always possible to make a call
directly from the telephone; as a safety
measure, first park the vehicle.
Or
background
76
2
12
13
14
1
Audio and Telematics
The access to "
Messages
" depends on
the compatibility of the smartphone and
the integral system.
Depending on the smartphone, access
to your messages or email may be
slow.
Managing messages
The "
Email
" function allows email
addresses to be entered for a contact,
but the system is not able to send
emails.
Managing contacts / entries
Press
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Select "
Contact
".
Select "
Create
" to add a new contact.
In the "
Telephone
" tab, enter the
telephone numbers for the contact.
In the "
Address
" tab, enter the
addresses for the contact.
In the "
Email
" tab, enter the email
addresses for the contact.
Press "
Answer
" to send a quick
message stored in the system.
Press
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Select "
Messages
" to display the list
of messages.
Select the "
All
" or "
Received
" or
"
Sent
" tab.
Select the detail of the message
chosen in one of the lists
Press "
Call
" to start the call.
Press "
Play
" to hear the message.
The services available depend on
the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
used.
Check in the manual for your
smartphone and with your service
provider for the services available to
you.
background
77
.
1
1
Audio and Telematics
Managing email
Press
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Select "
Email
" to display the list of
messages.
Select the "
Received
" or "
Sent
" or
"
Not read
" tab.
Select the email chosen in the list.
Press "
Play
" to start playing the
email.
Access to "
Email
" depends on the
compatibility of the smartphone and the
integral system.
Managing quick messages
Press
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Press on the "
OPTIONS
" button to
go to the secondary page.
Select "
Quick messages
" to display
the list of messages.
Select the "
Delayed
" or "
My arrival
"
or "
Not available
" or "
Other
" tab
with the possibility of creating new
messages.
Select the message chosen in one of
the lists.
Press "
Create
" to write a new
message.
Press "
Transfer
" to select the
addressee(s).
Press "
Play
" to start playing the
m e s s a g e .
background
78
12:1318,5 21,523 °C
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
3
4
5
6
7
Audio and Telematics
S e t t i n g s
A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n
Level 1
Level 2
background
79
.
2
5
6
7
3
4
Audio and Telematics
Level 1
Level 2
Comments
Settings
Color schemes
Color schemes: 1,2,3, ...
Having chosen the color scheme, save the
setting.
Settings
Audio settings
Ambience
Select the sound ambience.
Distribution
Sound distribution by the Arkamys
©
system.
©
system.
©
Sound
Adjust the volume or activate linked to speed.
Voice
Adjust the voice volume.
Ringtone
Adjust the ringtone volume.
Save the settings.
Settings
Turn off screen
Function allowing the display to be switched off.
Pressing the screen reactivates it.
Settings
Profile (1, 2, 3)
Activate the profile selected.
background
80
1
15
16
15
16
9
8
10
11
12
13
14
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
background
81
.
1
15
16
1
1
11
12
13
14
9
8
10
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Comments
Settings
OPTIONS
System settings
Units
Distance and fuel
consumption
Set the units used for distance, fuel consumption
and temperature.
Temperature
Factory settings
Reinitialize
Restore the factory settings.
System info
View
View the versions of the different modules
(system, mapping, risk areas) installed in the
system as well as the updates available.
Save the settings.
Settings
OPTIONS
Languages
All
Select the language then confirm.
Europe
Asia
America
Having selected the language, save the setting.
Settings
OPTIONS
Screen configuration
Animation
Activate or deactivate settings.
Brightness
Move the cursor to adjust the brightness of the
screen and/or of the instrument panel.
Save the settings.
background
82
1
17
18
19
20
21
22
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
background
83
.
1
17
18
1
1
20
19
21
22
Audio and Telematics
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Comments
Settings
OPTIONS
Setting
the time-date
Date
Date
Enter the date and select the date format.
Date format:
Time
Time
Set the time.
Time Zone
Define the time zone.
Time format:
Select the time format: 12h / 24h.
Synchronisation with
GPS (UTC):
Activate or deactivate synchronisation with the
satellites.
Save the settings.
Settings
OPTIONS
Setting of the
profiles
Profile 1
Enter settings for the profiles.
Profile 2
Profile 3
Common profile
Save the settings.
Settings
OPTIONS
Driver screen
configuration
Personalisation of the
dashboard
Choose and select the display information
required on the dashboard.
Confirm the selections.
background
84
3
4
5
6
7
1
19
Audio and Telematics
Press
Settings
to display the primary
page.
Profile settings
Audio settings
Press
Settings
to display the primary
page.
Select "
Audio settings
".
Select "
Ambience
".
Or
"
Position
".
Or
"
Sound
".
Or
"
Voice
".
Or
"
Ringtone
".
On-board audio: Arkamys
©
Sound
©
Sound
©
Staging optimises the distribution of
sound in the passenger compartment.
The settings for "
Position
" (All
passengers, Driver and Front only) are
common to all sources.
Activate or Deactivate "
Touch tones
",
"
Volume linked to speed
" and
"
Auxiliary input
".
The sound distribution (or spatialisation
with the Arkamys
©
system) is audio
©
system) is audio
©
processing that allows the quality of the
sound to be adapted according to the
number of passengers in the vehicle.
Available only with the front and rear
speakers configuration.
The audio
Ambience
settings
(6 ambiences available) as well as the
Bass
,
Medium
and
Treble
settings
are different and independent for each
sound source.
Activate or Deactivate "
Loudness
".
Press "
OK
" to save the settings.
Press "
OK
" to confirm.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Select "
Profile 1
", "
Profile 2
",
"
Profile 3
" or "
Common profile
".
Select "
Setting of the profiles
".
Press this button to enter a name for
the profile using the virtual keypad.
As a safety measure and because it
requires the sustained attention of the
driver, changes to settings must only be
done with the
vehicle stationary
.
vehicle stationary . vehicle stationary
background
85
.
3
2
4
5
6
7
Audio and Telematics
Select a "
Profile
" (1 or 2 or 3) to
associate the "
Audio settings
" with
it.
Select "
Audio settings
".
Select "
Ambience
".
Or
"
Distribution
".
Or
"
Sound
".
Or
"
Voice
".
Or
"
Ringtone
".
The location for the photograph is
square; the system deforms the original
photograph if in another format.
Initialisation of the profile selected
activates the English language by default.
Press "
OK
" to save the settings.
Press "
OK
" to accept the transfer of
the photograph.
Press "
OK
" again to save the
settings.
Press this button to add a photograph
to the profile.
Insert a USB memory stick containing
the photograph in the USB port.
Select the photograph.
Press this button to initialise the
profile selected.
background
86
1
1
1
8
9
10
15
16
1
Audio and Telematics
Press
Settings
to display the primary
page.
Press
Settings
to display the primary
page.
Press
Settings
to display the primary
page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Select "
System settings
".
Select "
Screen configuration
".
Select "
Units
" to change the units
for distance, fuel consumption and
temperature.
Select "
Languages
" to change the
language.
Activate or deactivate "
Automatic
scrolling
".
Move the cursor to adjust the
brightness of the screen and/or of the
instrument panel.
Select "
Factory settings
" to return
to the initial settings.
Select "
System info
" to display the
versions of the different modules
installed in the system.
Modifying system settings
Returning the system to factory settings
activates the English language by
default.
Select "
Animation
".
Select "
Brightness
".
Select the language
Press
Settings
to display the primary
page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Select "
Setting the time-date
".
Setting the date
background
87
.
1
17
18
Audio and Telematics
Press
Settings
to display the primary
page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Select "
Date
".
Select "
Time
".
Select "
Setting the time-date
".
Adjustment of the time and date is only
available if "GPS synchronisation" is
deactivated.
The change between winter and
summer time is done by changing the
time zone.
The system does not automatically
manage the change between winter
and summer time (depending on
country).
Setting the time
Press this button to define the date.
Press this button to adjust the time
using the virtual keypad.
Press "
OK
" to confirm.
Press "
OK
" to confirm.
Press "
OK
" to confirm.
Press this button to define the time
z o n e .
Select the display format of the date.
Select the display format for the time
(12h / 24h).
Activate or deactivate
synchronisation with the satellites
(UTC).
Every time the color scheme is
changed, the system restarts,
temporarily displaying a black screen.
As a safety measure, the procedure
for changing the color scheme is only
possible with the vehicle stationary.
Press
Settings
to display the primary
page.
Select "
Color schemes
".
Select a color scheme in the list then
press "
OK
" to confirm.
Color schemes
background
88
Audio and Telematics
The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
The route calculation is not
successful.
The route settings may conflict with the current location (exclusion of
toll roads on a toll motorway).
Check the route settings in the "Navigation"
menu.
The POIs do not appear.
The POIs have not been selected.
Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The audible warning of
"Danger areas" does not
work.
The audible warning is not active.
Activate audible warnings (without the possibility
of adjusting the volume) in the "Navigation" menu.
The system does not
suggest a detour around an
incident on the route.
The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages.
Select setting for the "Traffic info" function in
the list of route settings (Without, Manual or
Automatic).
I receive a "Danger area"
alert which is not on my
route.
Other than guidance, the system announces all "Danger areas"
positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an
alert for "Danger areas" located on nearby or parallel roads.
Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of the
"Danger area". Select "On the route" to no longer
receive alerts other than navigation instructions or
to reduce the time for the announcement.
Frequently asked questions
Navigation
background
89
.
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
Certain traffic jams along
the route are not indicated
in real time.
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive
the traffic information.
Wait until the traffic information is being received
correctly (display of the traffic information icons
on the map).
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for
the traffic information.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the traffic information available.
The altitude is not
displayed.
On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to
receive more than 4 satellites correctly.
Wait until the system has started up completely so
that there is GPS coverage by at least 4 satellites.
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the
weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This phenomenon is normal. The system
is dependent on the GPS signal reception
conditions.
background
90
Audio and Telematics
Radio
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
The quality of reception of
the radio station listened
to gradually deteriorates
or the stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station
listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area
through which the vehicle is travelling.
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
short-cut menu to enable the system to check
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...)
block reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a franchised dealer.
I cannot find some radio
stations in the list of
stations received.
The station is not received or its name has changed in the list.
Press on the "Update list" button in the "Radio
stations" secondary menu.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name
(the title of the song for example).
The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
The name of the radio
station changes.
background
91
.
Audio and Telematics
Media
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
Playback of my USB
memory stick starts only
after a very long wait
(around 2 to 3 minutes).
Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down
access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the
catalogue time).
Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
structure on the memory stick.
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio
data or contains an audio format which the player does not recognise.
Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be
played if it is too badly damaged.
Check the content in the case of a recorded CD:
refer to the advice in the "AUDIO" section.
The audio system's CD player does not play
DVDs.
Some recorded CDs will not be played by the
audio system because they are not of adequate
quality.
The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the player (udf, ...).
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is
not recognised by the audio system.
There is a long waiting
period following the
insertion of a CD or
connection of a USB
memory stick.
When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain
amount of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few
seconds to a few minutes.
This phenomenon is normal.
The CD player sound is
poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.
Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are
unsuitable.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
background
92
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
I cannot connect my
Bluetooth telephone.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the
telephone may not be visible.
Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is
switched on.
Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible
to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system.
You can check the compatibility of your telephone
at the Brand's website (services).
The volume of the
telephone connected
in Bluetooth mode is
inaudible.
The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone.
Increase the volume of the audio system, to
maximum if required, and increase the volume of
the telephone if necessary.
The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone
communication.
Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows,
reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, ...).
Telephone
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
Some characters in the
media information are not
displayed correctly while
playing.
The audio system does not display some types of characters.
Use standard characters to name tracks and
folders.
Playing of streaming files
does not start.
The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play.
Start the playback from the device.
The names of tracks and
the track length are not
displayed on the screen
when streaming audio.
The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.
background
93
.
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
Some contacts are
duplicated in the list.
The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the
contacts on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both.
When both synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be
duplicated.
Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
telephone contacts".
Contacts are not shown in
alphabetical order.
Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings
chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order.
Modify the display setting in the telephone
directory.
The system does not receive
SMS text messages.
The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to
the system.
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
In changing the setting
of treble and bass the
equalizer setting is
deselected.
The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the settings for treble
and bass and vice-versa.
Modify the treble and bass or equalizer settings
to obtain the desired musical ambience.
In changing the equalizer
setting, treble and bass
return to zero.
When changing the
balance settings, the
distribution setting is
deselected.
The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings
and vice-versa.
Modify the balance or distribution settings to
obtain the desired musical ambience.
When changing an
distribution setting,
the balance setting is
deselected.
Settings
background
94
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
There is a difference in
sound quality between the
different audio sources.
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings can be adapted to
the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences
when changing source.
Check that the audio settings are adapted to the
sources listened to. Adjust Balance, Treble, Bass
to the middle position, select the "None" musical
ambience and set the loudness correction to the
"Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive"
position in radio mode.
With the engine off, the
system switches off after a
few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time
depends on the state of charge of the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode
and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
The date and time cannot
be set.
Setting of the date and time is only available if the synchronisation
with the satellites is deactivated.
Settings menu / Options / Time-Date setting.
Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS
synchronisation" (UTC).
background
95
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
CITROËN Connect Radio
Multimedia audio system - Applications - Bluetooth
®
Multimedia audio system - Applications - Bluetooth
®
Multimedia audio system - Applications - Bluetooth
telephone
®
telephone
®
Contents
First steps 96
Steering mounted controls - Type 1 98
Steering mounted controls - Type 2 99
Menus 100
Applications 102
Radio Media 106
Telephone 118
Settings 132
Frequently asked questions 143
The system is protected in such a way
that it will only operate in your vehicle.
The display of the
Energy Economy
Mode
message signals that a change
to standby is imminent.
The different functions and settings
described vary according to the version
and configuration of your vehicle.
The link below gives access to OSS
(Open Source Software) codes for the
system.
http://www.psa-peugeot-citroen.com/oss
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the
driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile
telephone with the Bluetooth hands-
free system of your audio system must
be done with the
vehicle stationary
and the ignition on.
background
96
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
First steps
With the engine running, a press
mutes the sound.
With the ignition off, a press turns the
system on.
Volume.
Use the buttons either side of or below the
touch screen for access to the menus, then
press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. All
of the touch areas of the screen are white.
Press in the grey zone to go back a level or
confirm.
Press the back arrow to go back a level or
confirm.
The touch screen is of the "capacitive"
type.
To clean the screen, use a soft, non-
abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) with
no additional product.
Do not use sharp objects on the
screen.
Do not touch the screen with wet
hands.
background
97
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Select the audio source (depending on
version):
- FM / DAB * / AM * stations.
- Telephone connected by Bluetooth * and
using Bluetooth * audio streaming.
- CD player.
- USB memory stick.
- Media player connected to the auxiliary
socket (Jack, cable not supplied).
* Depending on equipment.
Certain information is displayed permanently in
the upper band of the touch screen:
- Reminder of the air conditioning
information, and direct access to the
corresponding menu.
- Reminder of the Radio Media and
Telephone menu information.
- Access to the Settings of the touch screen
and digital instrument panel.
In very hot conditions, the volume may
be limited to protect the system. It may
go into standby (screen and sound off)
for at least 5 minutes
The return to normal takes place when
the temperature in the passenger
compartment has dropped.
In the "Settings" menu you can create
a profile for just one person or a group
of people with common points, with the
possibility of entering a multitude of
settings (radio presets, audio settings,
ambiences, ...); these settings are
taken into account automatically.
background
98
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Steering mounted controls - Type 1
Radio
:
Short press: display the list of radio
stations.
Long press: update the list.
Media
:
Short press: display the list of folders.
Long press: display the sorting
options.
Decrease volume.
Radio :
Select the previous / next preset
radio station.
Select the previous / next item in a
menu or a list.
Media:
Select of the previous / next track
Select the previous / next item in a
menu or a list.
Mute / Restore sound by
simultaneously pressing the increase
and decrease volume buttons.
Change audio source (Radio; USB;
AUX (if a device is connected); CD;
Streaming)
Confirm a selection.
Increase volume.
background
99
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Media
(short press): change the
multimedia source.
Telephone
(short press): call.
Call in progress
(short press):
access to telephone menu.
Telephone
(long press): reject an
incoming call, end call, access to
telephone menu.
Decrease volume.
Voice commands
:
Short press, smartphone voice
commands via the system.
Mute/ Restore the sound.
Or
Mute by pressing the volume
increase and decrease buttons
simultaneously.
Restore the sound by pressing one of
the two volume buttons.
Radio
(rotate): previous / next preset.
Media
(rotate): previous / next track,
move in a list.
Short press
: confirm a selection;
other than selection, access to
presets.
Radio
: display the list of stations.
Media
: display the list of tracks.
Radio
(press and hold): update the
list of stations received.
Increase volume.
Steering mounted controls - Type 2
background
100
21,518,5
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Menus
Radio Media
Applications
Select an audio source or radio station.
Access configurable equipment.
Air conditioning
Manage the different temperature and air flow
settings.
Navigation
Configure the guidance and select your
destination via MirrorLink
TM
or CarPlay
®
.
According to version.
background
101
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Settings
Driving
Telephone
Configure a personal profile and/or configure
the sound (balance, ambience, ...) and the
display (language, units, date, time, ...).
Activate, deactivate or configure certain vehicle
functions.
Connect a telephone by Bluetooth
®
.
Operate certain applications on a smartphone
connected via MirrorLink
TM
or CarPlay
®
.
background
102
1
5
6
4
2
3
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Applications
According to version / according to equipment
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
background
103
.
1
4
5
6
2
3
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Applications
Temperature
conditioning
State
Activate / deactivate the temperature conditioning.
Settings
Configure the pre-conditioning.
Save the parameters.
Confirm the settings.
Applications
Trip computer
Instant
System providing information about the current
journey (range, consumption…).
Trip 1
Trip 2
Go back to the Applications page.
Applications
Photos
Photo gallery
Photos
Go to the photo gallery.
Go back a level.
Applications
OPTIONS
Bluetooth connection
Search
Start the search for a device to be connected.
Delete
Delete one or more devices.
background
background
105
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port.
The system can read folders and image files in
the formats: .tiff; .gif; .jpg/jpeg; .bmp; .png.
Viewing photos
Press
Applications
to display the
primary page.
Press "
Photos
".
Select a folder.
Press this button to display the
details of the photo.
Press the back arrow to go back a
level.
Select an image to view.
To protect the system, do not use a
USB hub.
background
106
2
1
3
4
5
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Radio Media
According to version
Level 1
Level 2
background
107
.
1
2
3
4
5
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
Comments
Radio Media
SOURCES
Radio
Select change of source.
Bluetooth
CD
AUX
USB
iPod
Radio Media
Frequency
FM / DAB / AM
Display the current radio station.
Radio Media
List
Update the list according to the stations received.
Preset
Make a short press to preset the station.
Radio Media
Preset
Select a preset station or preset a station.
Radio Media
OPTIONS
AM band / DAB band / FM band
Press the Band button to change waveband.
Audio settings
Configure the audio settings.
News
Activate or deactivate the options.
TA
RDS
FM-DAB Follow-up
Radio Media
87.5 MHz
Enter a frequency of the FM and AM bands on the
virtual keypad.
background
108
1
2
3
4
5
5
5
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
background
109
.
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
5
5
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Radio Media
SOURCES
Radio
Frequency
Display the current radio station.
List
Display the list of stations received.
Preset
Select a preset station or preset a station.
OPTIONS
FM band / DAB band /
AM band
Press the band button to change band.
Audio settings
Configure the audio settings.
News
Activate or deactivate the options.
TA
RDS
FM-DAB Follow-up
Radio Media
SOURCES
Bluetooth
OPTIONS
Audio settings
Configure the audio settings.
Radio Media
SOURCES
CD
Display the details of the music being played.
OPTIONS
Audio settings
Configure the audio settings.
background
110
1
5
5
6
7
8
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
background
111
.
1
1
6
7
5
5
8
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Radio Media
SOURCES
AUX
OPTIONS
Audio settings
Configure the audio settings.
Radio Media
SOURCES
USB
Player
Display the details of the music being played.
Tracks list
Display the current selection.
Library
Display the music library.
OPTIONS
Audio settings
Configure the audio settings.
background
112
4
5
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Press
Radio Media
to display the
menu.
Press
Radio Media
to display the
primary page.
Press the frequency.
Enter the FM and AM waveband
values using the virtual keypad.
Press one of the buttons for an
automatic search for radio stations.
Radio
Selecting a station
Radio reception may be affected by
the use of electrical equipment not
approved by the Brand, such as a USB
charger connected to the 12V socket.
The exterior environment (hills,
buildings, tunnel, car park, below
ground...) may prevent reception,
even in RDS station tracking mode.
This phenomenon is normal in the
propagation of radio waves and is in no
way indicative of a fault with the audio
system.
Or
Or
Or
Move the cursor for a manual search
for frequencies up or down.
Select a radio station or frequency.
Select a radio station or frequency.
Press "
Preset
".
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Make a short press on the star
outline. If the star is solid, the radio
station is already preset.
Make a long press on one of the
buttons to preset the station.
Press "
Band
" to change waveband.
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Preset a station
Changing waveband
Press "
OK
" to confirm.
background
113
.
5
5
5
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Press
Radio Media
to display the
primary page.
Press
Radio Media
to display the
primary page.
Press
Radio Media
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Activate/deactivate "
RDS
".
Activate / Deactivate "
NEWS
".
Activate / Deactivate "
TA
".
TA ". TA
Activate/ Deactivate RDS
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue
listening to the same station by automatic
retuning to alternative frequencies.
However, in certain conditions, coverage
of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the entire country as radio
stations do not cover 100 % of the
territory. This explains the loss of
reception of the station during a journey.
The "Radio Text" function allows
information transmitted by the radio
station and related to the station or the
song playing to be displayed.
Display text information
Play TA messages
The TA (Traffic Announcement)
function gives priority to TAalert
messages. To operate, this function
needs good reception of a radio station
that carries this type of message. While
traffic information is being broadcast,
the current media is automatically
interrupted so that the TA message can
be heard. Normal play of the media
previously playing is resumed at the
end of the message.
background
114
5
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Audio settings
Press
Radio Media
to display the
primary page.
Press "
Audio settings
".
On-board audio: Arkamys
©
Sound
©
Sound
©
Staging optimises the distribution of
sound in the passenger compartment.
The sound distribution (or spatialisation
with the Arkamys
©
system) is audio
©
system) is audio
©
processing that allows the quality of the
sound to be adapted according to the
number of passengers in the vehicle.
On the "
Tone
" tab, the
Ambience
audio
settings and
Bass
,
Medium
and
Treble
are different and independent for each
audio source.
On the "
Balance
" tab, the
All
passengers
,
Driver
and
Driver and Driver
Front only
settings are common to all sources.
On the "
Sound
" tab, activate or
deactivate "
Volume linked to speed
",
"
Auxiliary input
" and "
Touch tones
".
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Select the "
Tone
" or "
Balance
" or
"
Sound
"
or
"
or " or
Ringtones
" tab to
configure the audio settings.
Press the back arrow to confirm.
background
115
.
5
5
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
DAB radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting)
Press
Radio Media
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
FM-DAB Follow-up
Terrestrial Digital Radio
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the
territory.
When the digital radio signal is poor,
the "FM-DAB Follow-up" allows you to
continue listening to the same station,
by automatically switching to the
corresponding "FM" analogue station
(if there is one).
If the "FM-DAB Follow-up" is activated,
there is a difference of a few seconds
when the system switches to "FM"
analogue radio with sometimes a
variation in volume.
Once the digital signal is restored, the
system automatically changes back to
" D A B " .
Digital radio provides higher quality
reception.
The different multiplexes offer a
choice of radio stations arranged in
alphabetical order.
If the "DAB" station being listened
to is not available on "FM", or if the
"FM-DAB Follow-up" is not activated,
the sound will cut out while the digital
signal is too weak.
Activate / Deactivate "
FM-DAB
Follow-up
".
Press
Radio Media
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Press "
Band
" to select "
DAB band
".
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
background
116
1
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Media
USB port
Selecting the source
Press the "
SOURCES
" button.
Press
Radio Media
to display the
primary page.
The system builds playlists (in temporary
memory), an operation which can take from
a few seconds to several minutes at the first
connection.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The playlists are updated every time the
ignition is switched off or connection of a USB
memory stick. The lists are memorised: if they
are not modified, the subsequent loading time
will be shorter.
Insert the USB memory stick in the USB port or
connect the USB device to the USB port using
a suitable cable (not supplied).
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
First adjust the volume of your portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
audio system.
Display and management of the controls are
via the portable device.
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input"
has been checked in the audio settings.
Connect the portable device (MP3 player…) to
the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
(not supplied).
Choose the source.
Bluetooth Streaming
®
Bluetooth Streaming
®
Bluetooth Streaming
Streaming allows you to listen to music from
your telephone.
The Bluetooth profile must be activated. First
adjust the volume on your portable device (to a
high level).
Then adjust the volume of your system.
If play does not start automatically, it may be
necessary to start the audio playback from the
smartphone.
Control is from the portable device or by using
the system's touch buttons.
Once connected in Streaming mode,
the smartphone is considered to be a
media source.
To protect the system, do not use a
USB hub.
background
117
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Connecting Apple
®
Connecting Apple
®
Connecting Apple
players
®
players
®
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB port
®
player to the USB port
®
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifications available are those
of the portable device connected
(artists / albums / genres / playlists /
audiobooks / podcasts), you can also
use a classification structured in the
form of a library.
The default classification used is by
artist. To modify the classification used,
return to the first level of the menu
then select the desired classification
(playlists for example) and confirm
to go down through the menu to the
desired track.
The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
your Apple
®
player.
®
player.
®
The audio equipment will only play audio
files with ".wav, .wma, .aac, .ogg and .mp3"
file extensions and with a bit rate of between
32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of file (.mp4, ...) can be played.
".wma" files must be of the
standard wma 9 type.
The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44
and 48 KHz.
It is advisable to restrict file names to
20 characters, without using of special
characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing
and displaying problems.
In order to be able to play a burned CDR or
CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or
Joliet if possible when burning the CD.
If the disc is burned in another format, it may
not be played correctly.
It is recommended that the same burning
standard is always used on an individual disc,
with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum)
for the best acoustic quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Joliet standard is recommended.
Information and advice
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT 32
(file allocation table).
The system supports USB Mass
Storage devices, BlackBerry
®
devices
®
devices
®
or Apple
®
players via USB ports. The
®
players via USB ports. The
®
adaptor cable is not supplied.
Control of the peripheral device is with
the audio system controls.
Other peripherals, not recognised on
connection, must be connected to the
auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming,
depending on compatibility.
It is recommended that the original USB
cable for the portable device is used.
To protect the system, do not use a
USB hub.
background
118
4
4
4
1
1
1
5
5
5
3
3
3
2
2
2
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Telephone
According to version
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
background
119
.
1
2
3
4
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Telephone
Bluetooth
search
PHONE
Bluetooth connection
Search
Start the search for a device to be connected.
Delete
Delete one or more devices.
MirrorLink
Open the MirrorLink function.
CarPlay
Open the CarPlay function.
Telephone
Bluetooth
search
Keypad
Enter a telephone number.
Telephone
Bluetooth
search
Recent calls
All
View the calls according to the presentation
selected.
Select a contact to make the call.
Outgoing
Missed
Incoming
Telephone
Bluetooth
search
Contacts
Search
Confirm
Search for a contact in the contacts directory.
Telephone
Go to the details of the contact sheet.
background
120
5
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
background
121
.
5
5
5
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
Comments
Telephone
OPTIONS
On hold (auto)
ON - OFF
Activate or deactivate the automatic placing on
hold of the current conversation.
Telephone
OPTIONS
Sort contacts by name
Sort contacts by
first name
Sort the contacts by Surname-first name or First
name-surname.
Telephone
OPTIONS
Ring volume
Adjust the volume of the ringtone.
background
122
1
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
MirrorLink
TM
smartphone connection
background
123
.
1
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
As a safety measure and because it
requires the sustained attention of
the driver, using a smartphone when
driving is prohibited.
Operation must be with the
vehicle
stationary
.
stationary . stationary
The synchronisation of a
smartphone allows applications on a
smartphone that are adapted to the
MirrorLink
TM
technology to be displayed
in the vehicle's screen.
The principles and standards
are constantly evolving. For the
communication process between
the smartphone and the system to
work correctly, the smartphone must
be unlocked;
update the operating
system of your smartphone as
well as the date and time in the
smartphone and the system
.
For the list of eligible smartphones,
connect to the Brand's internet website
in your country.
T h e " M i r r o r L i n k
TM
" function requires
a compatible smartphone and
applications.
There may be a wait for the availability
of applications, depending on the
quality of your network.
When connecting a smartphone to the
system, it is recommended that "Bluetooth"
®
be started on the smartphone
Depending on the smartphone, it may be necessary
to activate the "
MirrorLink
TM
" function.
During the procedure, several screen
pages relating to certain functions
are displayed.
Accept to start and end the
connection.
Connect the USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
Press "
MirrorLink
TM
"
to start the
application in the system.
Once connection is established, a page
is displayed with the applications already
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted
to the MirrorLink
TM
t e c h n o l o g y .
Access to the different audio sources remains
accessible in the margin of the MirrorLink
TM
display, using touch buttons in the upper bar.
Access to the menus for the system is possible
at any time using the dedicated buttons
Telephone not connected by
Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
Telephone connected by Bluetooth
®
Telephone connected by Bluetooth
®
Telephone connected by Bluetooth
From the system, press "
Telephone
"
to display the primary page.
From the system, press "
Telephone
"
to display the primary page.
As a safety measure, applications
can only be viewed with the vehicle
stationary; display is interrupted once
the vehicle is moving.
Press the "
PHONE
" button to display
the secondary page.
Press "
MirrorLink
TM
" to start the
application in the system.
background
124
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
background
125
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Telephone
MirrorLink
TM
Go to or return to the applications already
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to
the MirrorLink
TM
technology.
Go to a menu list depending on the application
chosen.
"Back": abandon the current operation, go up one
level.
"Home": go to or return to the "Car mode" page on
your smartphone.
Go to the primary page of the "Telephone" menu.
background
126
1
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
CarPlay
®
CarPlay
®
CarPlay
smartphone connection
®
smartphone connection
®
background
127
.
1
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
As a safety measure and because it
requires the sustained attention of
the driver, using a smartphone when
driving is prohibited.
Operation must be with the
vehicle
stationary
.
stationary . stationary
The synchronisation of a
smartphone allows applications on a
smartphone that are adapted to the
CarPlay
®
technology to be displayed
®
technology to be displayed
®
in the vehicle's screen, having first
activated the CarPlay
®
function in the
®
function in the
®
smartphone.
As the principles and standards are
constantly changing,
it is recommended
that you keep your smartphone's
operating system updated
.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go
to the Brand's internet website in your
country.
Connect the USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
Connect the USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
From the system, press
Telephone
to display the Carplay
®
interface.
®
interface.
®
Press "
CarPlay
" to display the
CarPlay
®
interface.
®
interface.
®
On connecting the USB cable, the
CarPlay
®
function deactivates the
®
function deactivates the
®
system's Bluetooth
®
mode.
®
mode.
®
From the system, press
Telephone
to display the primary page.
Press the "
PHONE
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Or
If the smartphone is already
connected by Bluetooth
®
.
You can go to the CarPlay
®
navigation at any time by pressing
the system's
Navigation
button.
background
128
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
Pairing a Bluetooth
telephone
®
telephone
®
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the
driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile
telephone with the Bluetooth hands-
free system of your audio system must
be done with the
vehicle stationary
and the ignition on.
Procedure from the telephone
Select the name of the system in the
list of devices detected.
In the system, accept the connection request
from the telephone.
Procedure from the system
Press
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Press "
Bluetooth search
".
The list of telephones detected is
displayed.
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
that you deactivate and then reactivate the
Bluetooth function in your telephone.
Depending on the type of telephone,
you may be asked to accept or not
the transfer of your contacts and
messages.
Select the name of the chosen
telephone in the list.
Activate the Bluetooth function on the
telephone and ensure that it is "visible
to all" (telephone configuration).
To complete the pairing, whichever
procedure used (from the telephone or
from the system), ensure that the code
is the same in the system and in the
telephone.
background
129
.
1
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Press
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Press "
Bluetooth connection
" to
display the list of paired devices.
On return to the vehicle, if the last
telephone connected is present again,
it is automatically recognised and
within about 30 seconds of switching
on the ignition, the connection is
established without any action on your
part (Bluetooth activated).
The services available depend on
the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
used. Check in your telephone's
manual and with your service provider
for the services available to you.
The ability of the system to connect with
just one profile depends on the telephone.
All three profiles may connect by default.
Go to the Brand's website for more information
(compatibility, additional help, ...).
To modify the connection profile
:
Automatic reconnection
Press the "details" button of a paired
device.
Press the "
PHONE
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Press "
OK
" to confirm.
Select one or more profiles.
The profiles compatible with the system
are HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
MAP and PAN.
The system offers to connect the telephone
with 3 profiles:
- "
Telephone
" (hands-free kit, telephone
only),
- "
Streaming
" (wireless playing of the audio
files on the telephone),
- "
Internet data
".
background
130
1
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
superimposed display in the screen.
Make a short press on the steering
mounted
PHONE
button to accept an
incoming call.
Make a long press
on the steering mounted
PHONE
button to reject the call.
Or
And
Press "
End call
".
Press on the name of the telephone
chosen in the list to disconnect it.
Press again to connect it.
Press the basket at the top right
of the screen to display a basket
alongside the telephone chosen.
Press the basket alongside the
telephone chosen to delete it.
Managing paired telephones
This function allows the connection or
disconnection of a peripheral device as
well as the deletion of a pairing.
Press
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Press the "
PHONE
" button to go to
the secondary page.
Press "
Bluetooth connection
" to
display the list of paired peripheral
devices.
Deleting a telephone
Using the telephone is not
recommended while driving.
Park the vehicle.
Make the call using the steering
mounted controls.
Making a call
Calling a new number
Press
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Enter the phone number using the
digital keypad.
Press "
Call
" to start the call.
background
131
.
4
3
5
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
on the steering mounted button.
Calling a contact
Setting the ringtone
Press
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Or make a long press
on the steering mounted
PHONE
button.
Press "
Contacts
".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
Press "
Call
".
Calling a recently used number
Press
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Make a long press
Press "
Recent calls
".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
It is always possible to make a call
directly from the telephone; as a safety
measure, first park the vehicle.
Or
Press
Telephone
to display the
primary page.
Press "
Ring volume
" to display the
volume bar.
Press the arrows or move the cursor
to set the ring volume.
Press the "
OPTIONS
" button to go to
the secondary page.
background
132
3
4
1
2
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
S e t t i n g s
According to version / according to equipment
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
background
133
.
1
2
3
4
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Settings
Brightness
Ambience
Move the cursor to adjust the brightness of the
screen and/or of the instrument panel.
Settings
Profiles
Profile 1
Select a profile.
Profile 2
Profile 3
Common profile
Name:
Profile name
modification
Configure the profiles.
Reset the profile
Yes / No
Profile activated
Activate/deactivate the profile selected.
Save the settings.
Settings
Dark
Function which switches off the lit display.
Pressing the screen reactivates it.
background
134
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
According to equipment
Level 1
Level 2
background
135
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
Comments
Settings
Configuration
System configuration
Configure certain system parameters.
Ambience
Select an ambience for the screen integrated in
the system.
Language
Select the display language for the the screen
and/or the instrument panel.
Screen configuration
Set the configuration of the screen and/or the
instrument panel.
Customization
Configure the instrument panel for a personalised
display.
Date and time
Set the date and time and select the display
format.
background
136
6
5
7
8
9
10
11
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
background
137
.
6
5
7
8
9
10
11
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Settings
Configuration
System
configuration
Units
Distance and fuel
consumption
Configure the display units for the distance,
consumption and temperature.
Temperatures
Factory settings
Reset
Restore the original settings.
System info
View
Consult the version of the different modules
installed in the system.
Save the parameters.
Settings
Configuration
Ambience
Select an ambience for the screen integrated in
the system.
Confirm the selection and start the change of
ambience.
Settings
Configuration
Language
All
Select the display language for the screen and/or
the instrument panel.
Europe
Asia
America
Save the parameter.
background
138
14
15
14
15
12
13
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
background
139
.
12
13
14
15
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Comments
Settings
Configuration
Screen
configuration
Brightness
Select the display brightness level.
Animation
Automatic scrolling
Activate or deactivate the parameters.
Animated transitions
Save the parameters.
Settings
Configuration
Temperature conditioning
Customization
Choose and select the display information
required.
Confirm
Confirm the selections.
Settings
Configuration
Date and time
Time
Time
Set the time.
Time Zone
Set the time zone.
AM
Select the display format.
12h
GPS Synchronisation
Activate or deactivate the synchronisation with the
satellites.
Save the settings.
Date
Date
Set the date and select the display format.
Setting the date
Save the settings.
background
140
1
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Press
Settings
to display the primary
page.
Profile settings
Adjust the brightness
Press "
OK
" to save.
Select "
Profile 1
" or "
Profile 2
" or
"
Profile 3
" or "
Common profile
".
Press "
Profiles
".
Press this button to enter a name for
the profile using the virtual keypad
As a safety measure and because it
requires the sustained attention of the
driver, changes to settings must only be
done with the
vehicle stationary
.
vehicle stationary . vehicle stationary
Press this button to activate the
profile.
Press this button to initialise the
profile selected.
Press
Settings
to display the primary
page.
Move the cursor to adjust the brightness
of the screen and/or of the instrument
panel (according to version).
Press
Brightness
.
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Press the back arrow again to
confirm.
background
141
.
5
6
7
12
13
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Press
Settings
to display the primary
page.
Press
Settings
to display the primary
page.
Press
Settings
to display the primary
page.
Press "
Configuration
" to go to the
secondary page.
Press "
Configuration
" to go to the
secondary page.
Press "
Configuration
" to go to the
secondary page.
Press "
System configuration
".
Press "
Screen configuration
".
Press "
Units
" to change the units
for distance, fuel consumption and
temperature.
Select "
Language
" to change the
language.
Activate or deactivate: "
Automatic
scrolling
".
Select "
Animated transitions
".
Move the cursor to set the brightness
of the screen and/or instrument panel
(according to version).
Press "
Factory settings
" to return to
the initial settings.
Press "
System info
" to display the
versions of the different modules
installed in the system.
Modifying system settings
Returning the system to factory settings
activates the English language by
default (according to version).
Press "
Animation
".
Press "
Brightness
".
Select the language
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Press the back arrow to confirm.
background
142
15
14
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Press
Settings
to display the primary
page.
Select "
Date
".
Select "
Time
".
Press "
Date and time
".
Adjustment of the time and date is only
available if "GPS Synchronisation:" is
deactivated.
The change between winter and
summer time is done by changing the
time zone.
The system does not automatically
manage the change between winter
and summer time (depending on the
country of sale).
Setting the time
Press this button to define the date.
Press this button to adjust the time
using the virtual keypad.
Press the back arrow to save the
date.
Press this button to define the time
z o n e .
Select the display format of the date.
Select the display format for the time
(12h / 24h).
Activate or deactivate
synchronisation with satellites (UTC).
Press
Settings
to display the primary
page.
Press "
Date and time
".
Setting the date
Press "
Configuration
" to go to the
secondary page.
Press "
Configuration
" to go to the
secondary page.
Press "
OK
" to save the time.
Press the back arrow to save the
settings.
Press the back arrow again to
confirm.
background
143
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Radio
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
The quality of reception of
the radio station listened
to gradually deteriorates
or the stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station
listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area
through which the vehicle is travelling.
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
upper band to enable the system to check
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...)
block reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a franchised dealer.
I cannot find some radio
stations in the list of
stations received.
The station is not received or its name has changed in the list.
Press the round arrow on the "List" tab of the
"Radio" page.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name
(the title of the song for example).
The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
The name of the radio
station changes.
Frequently asked questions
The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.
background
144
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
Media
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
Playback of my USB
memory stick starts only
after a very long wait
(around 2 to 3 minutes).
Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down
access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the
catalogue time).
Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
structure on the memory stick.
Some characters in the
media information are not
displayed correctly while
playing.
The audio system does not display some types of characters.
Use standard characters to name tracks and
folders.
Playing of streaming files
does not start.
The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play.
Start the playback from the device.
The names of tracks and
the track length are not
displayed on the screen
when streaming audio.
The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.
background
145
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
I cannot connect my
Bluetooth telephone.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the
telephone may not be visible.
Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is
switched on.
Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible
to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system.
You can check the compatibility of your telephone
at the Brand's website (services).
The volume of the
telephone connected
in Bluetooth mode is
inaudible.
The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone.
Increase the volume of the audio system, to
maximum if required, and increase the volume of
the telephone if necessary.
The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone
communication.
Reduce the ambient noise level (close the
windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow
down, ...).
Contacts are not shown in
alphabetical order.
Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings
chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order.
Modify the display setting in the telephone
directory.
Telephone
background
146
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
In changing the setting
of treble and bass the
equalizer setting is
deselected.
The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the settings for treble
and bass and vice-versa.
Modify the treble and bass or equalizer settings to
obtain the desired musical ambience.
In changing the equalizer
setting, treble and bass
return to zero.
When changing the
balance settings, the
distribution setting is
deselected.
The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings
and vice-versa.
Modify the balance or distribution settings to
obtain the desired musical ambience.
When changing a
distribution setting,
the balance setting is
deselected.
There is a difference in
sound quality between the
different audio sources.
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings can be adapted to
the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences
when changing source.
Check that the audio settings are adapted to the
sources listened to. Adjust the audio functions to
the middle position.
With the engine off, the
system switches off after a
few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time
depends on the state of charge of the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
Settings
background
147
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016
B l u e t o o t h
®
audio system
Contents
First steps 148
Steering mounted controls - Type 1 149
Steering mounted controls - Type 2 150
Menus 151
Radio 152
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 154
Media 156
Telephone 161
Frequently asked questions 166
Your audio system is coded in such
a way that it will only operate in your
vehicle.
All work on the system must be
carried out exclusively by a dealer or
qualified workshop, to avoid any risk of
electrocution, fire or mechanical faults.
To avoid discharging the battery, the
audio system may switch off after a few
minutes if the engine is not running.
The different functions and adjustments
described vary according to the version
and configuration of your vehicle.
As a safety measure and because it
requires the sustained attention of the
driver, the pairing of your Bluetooth
telephone to the Bluetooth hands-free
audio system must only be carried out
with the
vehicle stationary
and the
ignition on.
background
148
Audio and Telematics
First steps
Press: On / Off
Rotate: adjust volume.
Short press: change audio source
(Radio; USB; AUX (if a device is
connected); CD; Streaming).
Long press: display the
Telephone
menu (if a telephone is connected).
Radio
:
Short press: display the list of radio
stations.
Long press: update the list.
Media:
Short press: display the list of folders.
Long press: display the sorting
options.
Select the screen display mode,
between:
Date; Audio functions; Trip computer;
Telephone.
Adjust audio settings:
Front/rear fader; left/right balance;
bass/treble; loudness; audio
ambience.
Activation / Deactivation of automatic
volume adjustment (linked to the
speed of the vehicle).
Radio
:
Manual step by step search up /
down for radio stations.
Select previous / next MP3 track.
Media:
Select previous / next folder / genre /
artist / playlist on the USB device.
Scroll in a list.
Abandon the current operation.
Go up one level (menu or folder).
Confirm or display contextual menu.
Buttons 1 to 6.
Short press: select the preset radio
station.
Long press: preset a station.
Radio:
Automatic step by step search up /
down for radio stations.
Media:
Select previous / next CD, USB,
streaming track.
Scroll in a list.
Access to main menu.
Activate / Deactivate TA (traffic
announcements)
Long press: select type of
announcement.
Select waveband: FM / DAB / AM.
background
149
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016
Steering mounted controls - Type 1
Radio
:
Short press: display the list of radio
stations.
Long press: update the list.
Media
:
Short press: display the list of folders.
Long press: display the sorting
options.
Decrease volume.
Radio
:
Select the previous / next preset
radio station.
Select the previous / next item in a
menu or a list.
Media
:
Select of the previous / next track.
Select the previous / next item in a
menu or a list.
Mute / Restore sound by
simultaneously pressing the increase
and decrease volume buttons.
Other than telephone calls
:
Short press: change audio source
(Radio; USB; AUX (if a device is
connected); CD; Streaming), confirm
if the "
Telephone
" menu is open.
Long press: open the "
Telephone
"
menu.
In the event of a telephone call
:
Short press: accept the call.
Long press: reject the call.
During a telephone call:
Short press: open the contextual
telephone menu.
Long press: end the call.
Confirm a selection.
Increase volume.
background
150
Audio and Telematics
Steering mounted controls - Type 2
Decrease volume.
Mute / Restore sound.
Other than telephone call
:
Short press: change audio source
(Radio; USB; AUX (if a device is
connected); CD; Streaming), confirm
if the "
Telephone
" menu is open.
Long press: open the "
Telephone
"
menu.
In the event of a telephone call:
Short press: accept the call.
Long press: reject the call.
During a telephone call:
Short press: open the contextual
telephone menu.
Long press: end the call.
Increase volume.
Access to the main menu.
Start voice recognition of your
smartphone via the system.
Radio
:
Short press: display the list of radio
stations.
Long press: update the list.
Media:
Short press: display the list of folders.
Long press: display the sorting
options.
Radio:
Select the previous / next preset
radio station.
Select the previous / next item in a
menu or a list.
Media:
Select the previous / next track.
Select the previous / next item in a
menu or a list.
Press the thumbwheel: confirm.
background
151
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016
Menus
"
Multimedia
": Media settings, Radio
settings.
D e p e n d i n g o n v e r s i o n .
Move from one menu to another.
Enter a menu.
"
Trip computer
".
"
Maintenance
": Diagnosis, Warning
log, ...
"
Connections
": Manage
connections, search for devices.
"
Telephone
": Call, Directory
management, Telephone
management, End call.
"
Personalisation-configuration
":
Define the vehicle settings, Choice
of language, Display configuration,
Choice of units, Date and time
adjustment.
Press the "
MENU
" button.
background
152
Audio and Telematics
RDS
Short procedure
Long procedure
The external environment (hills,
buildings, tunnels, basement car
parks, ...) may block reception,
including in RDS mode. This is a
normal effect of the way in which radio
waves are transmitted and does not
indicate any failure of the audio system.
Press the "
MENU
" button.
Select "
Audio functions
".
Press
OK
.
Select the "
FM waveband
preferences
" function.
Press
OK
.
Select "
RDS
".
Press
OK
, RDS is displayed in the
screen.
In "
Radio
" mode, press the
OK
button to
activate or deactivate RDS directly.
RDS, if activated, enables you to continue
listening to the same station by automatic
retuning to alternative frequencies.
However, in certain conditions, coverage
of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the country as radio stations
do not cover 100 % of the territory. This
explains the loss of reception of a station
that can occur during a journey.
If RDS is not available, the RDS symbol
appears barred in the screen.
Radio
Selecting a station
Press the
SOURCE
button
repeatedly and select the radio.
Press this button to select a
waveband (FM / AM / DAB).
Press one of the buttons to carry
out an automatic search for radio
stations.
Press one of the buttons to carry out
a manual search up / down for radio
frequencies.
Press this button to display the list of
stations received locally.
To update this list, press for more
than two seconds. The sound is cut
while updating.
background
153
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016
Receiving TA messages
Press the
TA
button to activate or
deactivate traffic messages.
The TA (Traffic Announcement)
function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function
needs good reception of a radio station
transmitting this type of message.
When a traffic report is transmitted, the
current audio source (Radio, CD, ...)
is interrupted automatically to play the
TA message. Normal playback of the
audio source resumes at the end of the
transmission of the message.
Take care when increasing the volume
while listening to TA messages. The
volume may prove too high on return to
the original audio source.
Select "
RadioText (TXT) display
"
and confirm
OK
to save.
Select or deselect categories.
With the radio displayed on the
screen, press
OK
to display the
contextual menu.
Make a long press on this button to
display the list of categories.
Receiving INFO messages
The INFO function gives priority to TA
traffic announcements. To be active,
this function needs good reception
of a radio station that transmits this
type of message. When a message is
transmitted, the current audio source
(Radio, CD, USB, ...) is interrupted
automatically to receive the INFO
message. Normal play resumes at the
end of the message transmission.
Radio text is information transmitted by
the radio station related to the current
programme or song.
Display RADIO TEXT
Activate or deactivate the reception of
the corresponding messages.
background
154
1
3
5
2
4
6
6 5 4 3
21
Audio and Telematics
Long press: select the desired
categories of announcements from
Transport, News, Entertainment and
Flash special (availability according
to the station).
Change of station within the same
"multiplex service".
Starting of a search for the previous /
next "multiplex service".
Change of band (FM1, FM2, DAB,...)
Digital radio provides a superior audio
quality and also additional categories of
traffic announcements (TA INFO).
The different "multiplex services"
offer a choice of radio stations in
alphabetical order.
Terrestrial digital radio
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio
Display options:
if active but not available, the display
will be struck out.
A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n
Preset radio station, buttons 1 to 6.
Short press: select the preset radio
station.
Long press: preset a radio station.
Display the name of the multiplex
service being used.
Display the list of all radio stations
and "multiplexes".
Represents the signal strength for
the band being listened to.
Display RadioText (TXT) for the
current radio station.
Display the name of the current radio
station.
If the current "DAB" radio station is not
available on "FM", "DAB FM" is struck out.
When changing region, an update
of the list of preset radio stations is
advisable.
background
155
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016
Select "
Multimedia
" and confirm.
Select "
DAB / FM auto tracking
"
and confirm
Press the "
MENU
" button.
When the radio station is displayed in
the screen, press on "
OK
" to display
the contextual menu.
(Frequency search (RDS), DAB / FM
auto tracking, RadioText (TXT) display,
Information on the station, ...)
DAB / FM tracking
"DAB" does not have 100% coverage of
the country.
When the digital signal is weak,
"DAB / FM auto tracking" allows you to
continue listening to the same station,
by automatically switching to the
corresponding analogue "FM" station
(if there is one).
When "DAB / FM auto tracking" is
active, the DAB station will be selected
automatically.
If "DAB / FM auto tracking" is
activated, there will be a difference of
a few seconds in the programme when
the system changes to analogue "FM"
radio, with sometimes a variation in
volume.
If the "DAB" station you are listening
to is not available on "FM" ("
DAB/FM
"
option barred), or if "DAB / FM auto
tracking" is not on, the sound will be cut
when the digital signal is too weak.
background
156
Audio and Telematics
Media
USB port
This unit consists of a USB port and an
auxiliary Jack socket, depending on version.
Insert a USB memory stick into the USB port
or connect a USB peripheral device to the USB
port using a suitable cable (not supplied).
The system changes automatically to "USB"
source.
The system creates playlists (temporary
memory), which can take from a few seconds
to several minutes on the first connection.
Reducing the number of non-music files and
the number of folders reduces this waiting
time. Playlists are updated every time a new
USB memory stick is connected.
Press this button to display the
contextual menu for the Media
function.
Press this button to select the play
mode.
Press this button to confirm.
Play mode
The play modes available are:
-
Normal
: the tracks are played in order,
depending on the classification of the
selected files.
-
Random
: the tracks in an album or folder
are played in a random order.
-
Random on all media
: all of the tracks
saved in the media are played in random
order.
-
Repeat
: the tracks played are only those
from the current album or folder.
The choice made is displayed at the top of the
screen.
While connected by USB, the portable
device may be charged automatically.
To protect the system, do not use a
USB hub.
Any additional equipment connected
to the system must conform to
the standard of the product or
standard IEC 60950-1.
background
157
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016
Choosing a track to play
F i l e c l a s s i fi c a t i o n
P l a y i n g fi l e s
Make a long press on this button to
display the different classifications.
Choose by "
Folder
" / "
Artist
" /
"
Genre
" / "
Playlist
" * .
Press
OK
to select the desired
classification, then press
OK
again
to confirm.
Make a long press on this button to
display the chosen classification.
Navigate in the list using the left /
right and up / down buttons.
Confirm the selection by
pressing
OK
.
Press one of these buttons to go to
the previous / next track in the list.
Press and hold one of these buttons
for fast forward or fast back.
Press one of these buttons to go
to the next "
Folder
" / "
Artist
" /
"
Genre
" / "
Playlist
" * in the list.
* Depending on availability and the type of
device used.
Press one of these buttons to go to
the previous / next track.
Press one of these buttons to go to
the previous / next folder.
background
158
Audio and Telematics
Jack auxiliary (AUX) socket
Connect the portable device (MP3 player, …) to
the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
(not supplied).
Press the
SOURCE
button several
times in succession and select
"
AUX
".
First adjust the volume on your portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume on
your audio system. Operation of controls is via
the portable device.
Do not connect a device to both the
Jack auxiliary socket and the USB port
at the same time.
CD player
Insert circular compact discs only.
Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs
or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may
cause faults which are no reflection on the
quality of the vehicle's player.
Insert a CD in the player, play begins
automatically.
To play a disc which has already
been inserted, press the
SOURCE
button several times in succession
and select
CD
.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press the
LIST
button to display the
list of tracks on the CD.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or fast back.
Playing an MP3 compilation
Insert an MP3 CD compilation in the player.
The audio equipment searches for all of the
music tracks, which may take anything between
a few seconds and several tens of seconds,
before play begins.
On a single disc, the CD player can
read up to 255 MP3 files spread over
8 folder levels.
However, it is advisable to keep to a
limit of two levels to reduce the access
time before the CD is played.
While the CD is being played, the folder
structure is not followed.
All of the files are displayed on a single
level.
External CD players connected via the
USB port are not recognised by the
system.
Any additional equipment connected
to the system must conform to the
standard of the product or standard
IEC 60950-1.
background
159
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016
To play a disc which has already
been inserted, press the
SOURCE
button several times in succession
and select
CD
.
Press one of the buttons to select a
folder on the CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press the
LIST
button to display
the list of directories of the MP3
compilation.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward play.
Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
audio streaming
®
audio streaming
®
Streaming allows music files on the telephone
to be played via the audio system.
Connect the telephone.
(Refer to the "
Pairing a telephone
" section).
Audio files can be selected using the buttons
on the audio system control panel and the
steering mounted controls ** . Contextual
information may be displayed in the screen.
Activate the streaming source by
pressing the
SOURCE
* b u t t o n .
Connecting Apple
®
Connecting Apple
®
Connecting Apple
players
®
players
®
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB port
®
player to the USB port
®
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifications available are those of the
portable device connected (artists / albums /
genres / playlists).
The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
your Apple
®
player.
®
player.
®
* In certain cases, play of the audio files must
be initiated from the keypad.
** If the telephone supports the function. The
audio quality depends on the quality of
transmission by the telephone.
background
160
Audio and Telematics
The CD player can play files with .mp3, .wma,
.wav and .aac file extensions, with a bit rate of
of 32 to 320 Kbps.
It also supports TAG mode (ID3 tag, WMA TAG).
Other file types (mp4, ...) may be played.
Files of the ".wma" type should be to the
wma9 standard.
The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44
and 48 KHz.
Via the USB port, the system can play audio
files with the extension ".mp3, .wma, .wav, .cbr,
.vbr" with a bit rate of 32 to 320 Kbps.
No other file types (.mp4, ...) can be played.
Files of the ".wma" type should be to the
wma9 standard.
The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44
and 48 KHz.
File names should have less than
20 characters, avoiding special characters
(e.g.: " ? ; ù) so as to avoid any reading or
display problems.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or
CDRW, the ISO 9660 level 1. 2 or Joliet file
format is recommended when recording.
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may
not be played correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording
format is always used for an individual disc,
with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Joliet format is recommended.
Information and advice
To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.
It is recommended that you use
genuine Apple
®
USB cables for correct
®
USB cables for correct
®
operation.
Use only USB memory sticks formatted
FAT32 (File Allocation Table).
background
161
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016
Telephone
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
Pairing a Bluetooth
telephone
®
telephone
®
As a safety measure and because it
requires the sustained attention of the
driver, the pairing of your a Bluetooth
telephone to the Bluetooth hands-free
audio system must only be carried
out with the vehicle stationary and the
ignition on
The services available depend on
the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone
used.
Refer to the instructions for your
telephone and to your service provider
for the services available to you.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth
function and ensure that it is "visible to
all" (telephone configuration).
Go to the Brand's website for more
information (compatibility, more
help, ...).
* If your telephone is fully compatible.
The "
Telephone
" menu gives access to the
following functions in particular: "
Directory
" * ,
"
Calls list
", "
View paired devices
".
Depending on the type of telephone, you may
be asked to accept or confirm access by the
system to each of these functions.
If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not
restricted.
A message appears in the screen confirming
the pairing.
Procedure from the telephone
Completing the pairing
Procedure from the system
Select the name of the system in the
list of devices detected.
To complete the pairing, whichever
procedure is used (from the telephone
or from the system), check that the
code displayed in the system and the
telephone is the same and confirm.
Press the
MENU
button.
Select the "
Connections
" menu.
Confirm with
OK
.
A window is displayed with a search in progress
message.
In the list of devices detected, select a
telephone to pair. Only one telephone can be
paired at a time.
Confirm with
OK
.
Select "
Search for a Bluetooth
device
".
Information and advice
background
162
Audio and Telematics
Confirm with
OK
.
Confirm with
OK
.
Confirm with
OK
.
Confirm with
OK
.
The telephone connection
automatically includes hands-free
operation and audio streaming.
The ability of the system to connect
to just one profile depends on the
telephone. Both profiles may connect
by default.
A number indicates the profile of the
connection with the system:
- 1 for media or 1 for telephone.
- 2 for media and telephone.
When you delete a pairing in the
system, remember to delete it from your
telephone as well.
Indicates that a device is connected.
Indicates the audio streaming profile.
Indicates the hands-free telephone
profile.
Press the
MENU
button.
Managing connections
Select "
Connections
".
Select "
Connections management
"
and confirm. The list of paired
devices is displayed.
Select a telephone.
Then select and confirm:
- "
Connect telephone
" /
"
Disconnect telephone
":
to connect / disconnect the
telephone or the hands-free kit
only.
- "
Connect media player
" /
"
Disconnect media player
":
to connect / disconnect
streaming only.
- "
Connect telephone +
media player
" / "
Disconnect
telephone + media player
":
to connect / disconnect the
telephone (hands-free kit and
streaming).
- "
Delete connection
": to delete
the pairing.
background
163
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
superimposed display in the screen.
Select the "
YES
Select the " YES Select the "
" tab in the screen
using the buttons.
Confirm with
OK
.
Confirm with
OK
.
Press this button at the steering
mounted controls to accept the call.
Making a call
In the "
Telephone
" menu.
Select "
Call
".
Select "
Calls list
".
Select "
Dial
".
Or
Or
Select "
Directory
".
Press this button for more than
two seconds for access to your
directory, then navigate using the
thumb wheel.
In the "
Telephone
" menu.
Select "
End call
".
Ending a call
During a call, press one of the
buttons for more than 2 seconds.
Confirm with
OK
to end the call.
The system accesses the telephone's
contacts directory, depending on its
compatibility, and while it is connected
by Bluetooth
With certain telephones connected by
Bluetooth, you can send a contact to
the directory of the audio system.
Contacts imported in this way are
saved in a permanent directory
visible to all, whatever the telephone
connected.
The menu for the directory is not
accessible if it is empty.
background
164
Audio and Telematics
During a call, press
OK
to display the
contextual menu.
In the contextual menu, select "
End
call
" to end the call.
Managing calls
Hang up
(so that the caller cannot hear)
In the contextual menu:
- select "
Micro OFF
" to switch off
the microphone.
- deselect "
Micro OFF
" to switch
the microphone on.
In the contextual menu:
- select "
Telephone mode
" to
transfer the call to the telephone
(for example, to leave the vehicle
while continuing a conversation).
- deselect "
Telephone mode
" to
transfer the call to the vehicle.
Microphone off
Telephone mode
If the contact has been cut off, when you
reconnect on returning to the vehicle,
the Bluetooth connection will be restored
automatically and sound returned to the
system (depending on the compatibility of the
telephone).
In some cases telephone mode must be
activated from the telephone.
From the contextual menu, select
"
DTMF tones
" and confirm to use
the digital keypad to navigate in the
interactive voice response menu.
From the contextual menu, select
"
Switch
" and confirm to return to a
call left on hold.
Interactive voice response
Dual call
Confirm with
OK
.
Confirm with
OK
.
Confirm with
OK
.
Confirm with
OK
.
Confirm with
OK
.
background
165
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016
To modify the contacts saved in the
system, press
MENU
then select
"
Telephone
" and confirm.
Select "
Directory management
"
and confirm.
You can:
- "
Consult an entry
",
- "
Delete an entry
",
- "
Delete all entries
".
Make a long press on
SRC/TEL
.
The system accesses the telephone's
contacts directory, depending on
its compatibility, and while it is
connected by Bluetooth.
With certain telephones connected
by Bluetooth you can send a contact
to the directory of the audio system.
Contacts imported in this way are
saved in a permanent directory
visible to all, whatever the telephone
connected.
The menu for the directory is not
accessible if it is empty.
Select "
Directory
" to see the list of
contacts.
Directory
Confirm with
OK
.
OR
Voice recognition
This function allows you to use your
smartphone's voice recognition via the system.
To start voice recognition, depending on the
type of steering mounted controls:
Make a long press on the end of the lighting
control stalk.
Press this button.
Voice recognition requires the use of a
compatible smartphone first connected
to the vehicle by Bluetooth.
background
166
Audio and Telematics
The table below gives answers to the most frequently asked questions on your audio system.
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
With the engine off, the
audio system switches off
after a few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the audio system operating time
depends on the state of charge of the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy
mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's
battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
The message "the audio
system is overheated"
appears on the display.
In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature
is too high, the audio system switches to an automatic thermal
protection mode leading to a reduction in volume or CD play
stopping.
Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
allow the system to cool.
Frequently asked questions
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
There is a difference in
sound quality between the
different audio sources
(radio, CD...).
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience and Loudness) can be adapted to the different
sound sources, which may result in audible differences when
changing source (radio, CD...).
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience and Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the
audio functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear Balance
and Left-Right Balance) to the middle position,
select the musical ambience "None" and set the
loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD
mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
Radio
background
167
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
The preset stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
An incorrect waveband is selected.
Press the BAND button to return to the waveband
(FM, FM2, DAB, AM) on which the stations are
preset.
The traffic announcement
(TA) is displayed. I do
not receive any traffic
information.
The radio station is not part of the regional traffic information
network.
Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic
information.
The quality of reception of
the radio station listened
to gradually deteriorates
or the stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station
listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area
through which the vehicle is travelling.
Activate the RDS function to enable the system
to check whether there is a more powerful
transmitter in the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, underground car parks...) block
reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
a fault in the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through an automatic car wash or into an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a franchised dealer.
Sound cut-outs of 1 to
2 seconds in radio mode.
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for another
frequency giving better reception of the station.
Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is
too frequent and always on the same route.
background
168
Audio and Telematics
Media
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
The Bluetooth connection
is broken.
The state of charge of the device may be too low.
Charge the battery of the portable device.
The message "USB device
error" is displayed in the
screen.
The USB memory stick is not recognised.
The USB memory stick may be corrupt.
Reformat the USB memory stick.
The CD is ejected every
time or is not played.
The CD is upside down, cannot be read, does not contain audio
files or contains audio files of a format not recognised by the audio
system.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system not recognised by
the audio system.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The sound from the CD is
poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.
Insert a good quality CD and store them in
suitable conditions.
The audio settings (base, treble, ambience) are unsuitable.
Return bass and treble settings to 0, without
selecting an ambience.
I am unable to play
the music files on my
smartphone via the USB
port.
Depending on the smartphone, access by the audio system to music
on the smartphone may have to be approved on the latter.
Manual activate the MTP profile on the
smartphone (USB settings menu).
background
169
.
Audio and Telematics
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
I am unable to access my
voicemail.
Few telephones or service providers allow the use of this function.
Call your voicemail box, via the telephone menu,
using the number supplied by your service
provider.
I am unable to access my
directory of contacts.
Check the compatibility of your telephone.
You did not give access to your contacts when pairing the telephone.
Accept or confirm access by the system to the
contacts on your telephone.
I am unable to continue a
conversation when getting
into my vehicle.
Telephone mode is activated.
Deselect telephone mode to transfer the call to
the vehicle.
I am unable to pair my
telephone by Bluetooth.
Telephones (models, versions of operating systems) have their own
specific aspects in the pairing procedure and some telephones are
not compatible.
Before starting the pairing procedure, delete the
pairing of the telephone from the system AND of
the system from the telephone, so as to see the
compatibility of the telephones.
Telephone
background
background
background
background
05-16
I 06-16
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap04_fi n
4Dconcept
Diadeis
Interak
background
Transversal-Citroen_en_Chap04_fi n
16SYSCC040
Anglais
*16SYSCC040*
background
background

Specifications

Citroen 2016 CITROëN C4 PICASSO Questions and Answers

Find answers or ask new question.
Questions and Answers

Related Products

Product Citroen 2016 CITRO N DS5 image
Citroen 2016 Citroën DS5 Car
2021-04-23 1 docs
Product Citroen 2017 CITRO N BERLINGO MULTISPACE image
Citroen 2017 Citroën Berlingo Multispace Car
2019-11-16 1 docs
Product Citroen 2008 C3 PLURIEL image
Citroen 2008 C3 PLURIEL Car
2019-12-29 1 docs
Product Citroen 2013 5 DS4 image
Citroen 2013.5 DS4 cars
2020-01-11 1 docs
Product Sealey VS2005 image
Sealey VS2005 Diesel Injector Puller for Citroen, Peugeot, Fiat
2024-10-23 1 docs
Product Sealey VSE4785 image
Sealey VSE4785 Front Pivot Arm Bush Tool for Peugeot 407/508, Citroen C5/C6
2024-10-22 1 docs